JP6965949B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, a gaming machine capable of increasing the attention of a player to a game has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1) .

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-128522

In such a gaming machine, it is desirable to increase satisfactorily attention to the game of Yu technique's.

In view of the above points, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of satisfactorily increasing the degree of attention to gaming.

In order to achieve the above object, in the gaming machine of the present invention , an operating means that can be operated by the player, a movable means that can be moved, and a first condition that can be satisfied by operating the operating means are satisfied. wherein in a state where there first condition and a movable controllable movable control means said movable means when different second condition is established and, said movable control means, moving period before Symbol movable means first It is possible to suggest that the first control, which is a period, can be executed, and that the gaming machine is in a state where a privilege advantageous to the player can be given during the execution period of the first control. From the time when the condition is satisfied until the second condition is satisfied, a specific period can be set as a non-movable period in which the movable means is not moved , and the specific period elapses and the second condition is satisfied. In this case, the first period is set so as to end the predetermined movable control to the movable means at a specific timing, and it can be suggested that the first control is executed during the non-movable period. der is, has the means to be shorter than the first period mobility period of the movable means by the first control when a specific condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , the first condition that can be satisfied by operating the operating means, the movable means that can be operated by the player, and the operating means is satisfied. and a movable controllable movable control means said movable means when different second condition is satisfied with 1 condition, the movable control means, first movable period prior Symbol movable means is a first period It is possible to suggest that the control can be executed and that the gaming machine is in a state where a privilege advantageous to the player can be given during the execution period of the first control , and the first condition is satisfied. wherein until the second condition is satisfied, can be set to a specific time period as a non-movable periods never be movable said movable means, when said second condition the specific period has elapsed is satisfied from a specific are given the said first time period to terminate the movable control setting to the movable means at the timing, during said immovable period, Ri suggested that der that the first control is executed, the specific When the condition is satisfied, there is a means for shortening the movable period of the movable means by the first control to be shorter than the first period . This has the effect of increasing the player's attention to the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the main component part of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. It is a perspective view which shows the main component part of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. It is a perspective view which shows the main component part of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the composition of the 1st effect unit, the 2nd effect unit, the 3rd effect unit, and a specific unit. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the movable mode of the 1st effect unit. It is a schematic diagram which shows the state when the 1st effect unit, the 2nd effect unit, and the 3rd effect unit move to a 2nd position, and the specific unit moves to a 4th position. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the whole electric composition in a pachinko machine. It is a figure which mainly shows the electrical composition of a main control device. It is a figure which mainly shows the electrical composition of a voice lamp control device and a display control device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning / failing lottery and the like. It is a figure which shows the structure of the 1st hold area. The special symbol winning / failing table storage area is shown, where (a) shows a special symbol winning / failing table for the low probability mode, and (b) shows a special symbol winning / failing table for the high probability mode. It is a figure for demonstrating the distribution table storage area, (a) shows the distribution table (first distribution information group) for the 1st result display part, and (b) is for the 2nd result display part. The distribution table (second distribution information group) is shown. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the hold information executed by the main MPU. It is a figure for demonstrating the special figure special electric address table. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation start processing executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the data setting process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during special figure change executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special drawing determination executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power start processing executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for a round executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during opening of special electric power which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during closing of a special electric power which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power termination processing executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal drawing control processing which is executed in the main MPU. Fuzu This is a diagram for explaining the Fuden address table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for demo display executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the voice side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main side command correspondence processing which is executed in the voice side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main side command correspondence processing following FIG. 37. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing executed by the display side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the command correspondence processing which is executed in the display side MPU. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the pattern data table which displays prompting the player to operate an effect unit. It is a flowchart which shows the other correspondence processing executed in the display side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the task processing which is executed in the display side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the command setting process which is executed in the display side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the display side command correspondence processing which is executed in the voice side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st frame button correspondence processing executed in the voice side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the specific unit movable lottery process which is executed in the voice side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the production unit movable process executed by the audio side MPU. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the display mode of a special symbol, the effective period of operation of an effect unit, and the display mode of a symbol display device. It is a timing chart which shows the operation effective period of the effect unit, the state of the 1st frame button, the state of the 1st effect unit, the 2nd effect unit, the 3rd effect unit, and the state of a specific unit. It is a schematic diagram which shows the movable mode of the 1st to 3rd effect units and a specific unit, (a) shows the movable mode of the 1st to 3rd effect units and a specific unit at a time point T4, and (b) is a movable state at a time point T41b. The movable modes of the first to third effect units and the specific unit are shown, (c) shows the movable modes of the first to third effect units and the specific unit at the time point T41d, and (d) shows the movable modes of the first to third effect units and the specific unit at the time point T41f. 3 The movable mode of the effect unit and the specific unit is shown, (e) shows the movable mode of the first to third effect units and the specific unit at the time point T41h, and (f) shows the movable mode of the first to third effect units and the specific unit at the time point T41j. The movable mode of a specific unit is shown. It is a flowchart which shows the effect | production unit movable processing executed by the audio side MPU in the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the production unit operation valid period, the state of the 1st frame button, the state of the 1st effect unit, the 2nd effect unit, and the state of the 3rd effect unit in the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect unit movable process which a voice side MPU executes in the modification of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which mainly shows the electrical structure of the voice lamp control device and the display control device in the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect | production unit movable processing executed by the audio side MPU in the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect | production unit movable processing executed by the audio side MPU in the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which mainly shows the electrical structure of the voice lamp control device and the display control device in 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing in 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st frame button correspondence processing which the voice side MPU executes in 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the production unit operation effective period, the state of the 1st frame button, the 1st effect unit, the 2nd effect unit, the 3rd effect unit, and the state of a specific unit in the 5th Embodiment of this invention. A schematic showing a state in which the first effect unit, the second effect unit, and the third effect unit in the modified example of the fifth embodiment of the present invention move to the second position and the specific unit moves to the fourth position. It is a figure. It is a figure which mainly shows the electrical structure of the voice lamp control device and the display control device in the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing which the voice side MPU executes in the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the specific unit preprocessing executed by the voice side MPU in the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st frame button correspondence processing which the voice side MPU executes in the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect unit special movable process executed by the audio side MPU in the 6th Embodiment of this invention. 6 is a timing chart showing the effective period of operation of the effect unit, the state of the first frame button, the state of the first effect unit, the second effect unit, the third effect unit, and the state of the specific unit according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st frame button correspondence processing which the voice side MPU executes in the modification of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing which the voice side MPU executes in the modification of 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the specific unit preprocessing executed by the voice side MPU in the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st frame button correspondence processing which the voice side MPU executes in 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the specific unit movable lottery process which a voice side MPU executes in 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect unit special movable process executed by the voice side MPU in 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect unit special movable processing following FIG. 74. It is a timing chart which shows the production unit operation valid period, the state of the 1st frame button, the 1st effect unit, the 2nd effect unit, the 3rd effect unit, and the state of a specific unit in the 8th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which mainly shows the electrical structure of the voice lamp control device and the display control device in the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect unit special movable process executed by the audio side MPU in the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect unit special movable processing following FIG. 78. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing which the voice side MPU executes in the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect unit standby release processing executed by the audio side MPU in the 9th Embodiment of this invention. 9 is a timing chart showing the effect period of the effect unit operation, the state of the first frame button, the state of the first effect unit, the second effect unit, the third effect unit, and the state of the specific unit according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect | production unit movable processing executed by the audio side MPU in the tenth embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the voice side MPU in the tenth embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the specific unit correspondence processing which the voice side MPU executes in the tenth embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st frame button correspondence processing which the voice side MPU executes in 10th Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the production unit operation valid period, the state of the 1st frame button, the 1st effect unit, the 2nd effect unit, the 3rd effect unit, and the state of a specific unit in the tenth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which mainly shows the electrical structure of the voice lamp control device and the display control device in eleventh embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing which the voice side MPU executes in eleventh embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect | production unit movable processing executed by the audio side MPU in eleventh embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process corresponding to the specified number of operations executed by the voice side MPU in eleventh embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the effective period of operation of the effect unit, the state of the 1st frame button, the state of the 1st effect unit, the 2nd effect unit, and the state of the 3rd effect unit in the eleventh embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the whole electric structure of the pachinko machine in another embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the structure of the 1st effect unit, the 2nd effect unit, the 3rd effect unit, and the specific unit in another embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the movable mode of the 1st effect unit in other embodiment of this invention.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In each of the following embodiments, parts that are the same or equal to each other will be described with the same reference numerals.

(First Embodiment)
An example in which the first embodiment of the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a pachinko machine) 10 which is a kind of gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views in which the main components of the pachinko machine 10 are developed, and FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 5 is a front view of the game board 43 in the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with a gaming machine main body 12 that is rotatably attached to the front of the eleven. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates on all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. Then, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment in the game hall.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit arranged behind the inner frame 13. It has 15 doors. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable (open / close) with respect to the outer frame 11.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 has the left side (fixed end side on one end side with respect to the rotation center) as the rotation base end side and the right side (other with respect to the rotation center) when viewed from the front. It is supported by the inner frame 13 so that it can rotate forward with the open end side on the end side as the rotation tip side. As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 is supported by the inner frame 13 so as to be rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side when viewed from the front. There is.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the gaming machine main body 12 is locked so that the gaming machine main body 12 cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11 on the rotation tip side thereof, and the front door frame. A locking device 16 having a function of putting 14 into a locked state that cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame 13 is provided. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 (see FIG. 1) provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the front door frame 14 is configured by assembling decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 21 having a substantially rectangular opening in a substantially central portion. Has been done. A window panel 22 having two colorless and transparent flat glass sheets is arranged on the back surface side of the front door frame 14, and the front surface (game area) of the game board 43, which will be described later, is the pachinko machine 10 via the window panel 22. It is visible from the front side of. The window panel 22 may be made of a synthetic resin and is colorless and transparent, instead of the flat glass.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 4, the front door frame 14 has an upper bulging portion 23 and a lower bulging portion 24 protruding in front of the front door frame 14 below the window portion 21. Are lined up and down. Then, as shown in FIG. 4, an upper plate 25 opened upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 23 so that the game ball can be stored in the upper plate 25. Further, the upper plate 25 is formed so that the bottom surface at the opening is inclined downward toward the right side when viewed from the front (see FIGS. 1 and 4), and is charged (stored) in the upper plate 25 by the inclination. ) It has a function of guiding the ball to the game ball launching mechanism 44 described later.

Further, the upper bulging portion 23 is provided with a first frame button 26 (operating means) at a substantially central portion of the upper surface (a portion of the upper surface that is not opened), and is in front of the first frame button 26. A second frame button 27 (operating means) is provided on the right side of the view. The first frame button 26 is operated when the stage (background) to be displayed is changed or the notice effect (conversation effect or character effect) to be displayed is changed (added) in the symbol display device 80 described later. Will be done. Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, a super reach is mounted as one effect of the game times, and the first frame button 26 is operated by the player during a predetermined super reach. The second frame button 27 is operated by the player when changing the volume, the amount of light, or the like controlled by the voice lamp control device 92, which will be described later. In the pachinko machine 10, the first frame button 26 has a substantially circular shape in the top view, and the second frame button 27 has a substantially cross shape in the top view. However, the shapes of the first frame button 26 and the second frame button 27 have a shape. Can be changed as appropriate.

The stage is a production (background) mode in which the production displayed on the symbol display device 80 is unified. In the pachinko machine 10, the "underwater stage", "beach stage", and "city stage" are used. There are three stages. Then, various productions such as reach production, which will be described later, are set so as to be productions according to the theme corresponding to each stage. Further, the stage can be changed by the player operating the first frame button 26 during a period during which the fluctuation display is not performed and a predetermined period during which the fluctuation display is performed on the symbol display device 80 (main display unit 71) described later. This is performed, and each time the first frame button 26 is operated, the change is repeated in the order of "underwater stage"-> "beach stage"-> "city stage"-> "underwater stage".

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the upper bulging portion 23 is provided with a ball lending button 28 and a return button 29 on the right side of the front view from the second frame button 27. As a result, when the ball lending button 28 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall or the like, the ball lending button 28 is operated in response to the operation. Rental balls are supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return button 29 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. However, the ball lending button 28 and the return button 29 are not required for pachinko machines, so-called cash machines, in which game balls are lent directly to the upper plate 25 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit. In this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the ball lending button 28 and the return button 29 to make the parts configuration common. As a result, it is possible to standardize a pachinko machine (CR machine) using a card unit and a cash machine.

Inside the lower bulging portion 24, a lower plate 30 is provided which opens upward like the upper plate 25 and stores balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 25. The game balls paid out from the payout device 99 provided in the back pack unit 15 are discharged to the upper plate 25 and the lower plate 30 through the discharge passage provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14. ..

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 4, an operation handle 31 operated by the player to drive the game ball into the front surface of the game board 43, which will be described later, is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 30 when viewed from the front. .. Inside the operation handle 31, a touch sensor 31a for detecting that the operation handle 31 is being touched by the player, and a game ball even in a situation where the player is rotating the operation handle 31. It has a built-in push-button type stop switch 31b for stopping firing (see FIG. 1) and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation of the operation handle 31 by a change in electrical resistance. Then, when the operation handle 31 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 31a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, so that the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 31 The game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes according to the above, and the game ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 43 described later with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 31 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 31a and the stop switch 31b are off.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a ball pulling lever 32 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 30 when discharging the ball stored in the lower plate 30 is provided on the lower front portion of the lower plate 30. The ball pulling lever 32 is usually arranged in the right direction, and by sliding it to the left, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 30 opens, and the game ball naturally falls from the bottom opening. It is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 32 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 30 is placed below the lower plate 30.

Further, the front door frame 14 is provided with an illumination unit 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED around the window unit 21, and a pair of speaker units 34 are provided at both left and right ends above the window unit 21. It is equipped. In the pachinko machine 10, each illumination unit 33 lights up or blinks at the time of hitting or reaching, to notify that the pachinko machine 10 is hitting or reaching, and the speaker unit 34. By notifying that the player is hitting or reaching, the effect of the effect during the game is enhanced. In addition, the illumination unit 33 also functions as an error lamp that blinks when an error occurs. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 35 made of ABS resin, which is chrome-plated in the area around the illumination portion 33, is attached.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 41 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11, and a substantially elliptical window hole is formed in the central portion of the resin base 41. 42 is formed. The resin base 41 is detachably attached to the game board 43 shown in FIG. 5, and is provided with a game ball launching mechanism 44 for firing the game ball into the front region of the game board 43. The game ball launch mechanism 44 is attached below the window hole 42 in the resin base 41, and launches the launch rail 45 extending toward the induction rail described later and the game ball stored in the upper plate 25 on the launch rail 45. The ball feeding device 46 is provided with a ball feeding device 46, and a firing solenoid 47, which is an electric actuator that launches a game ball supplied on the launch rail 45 toward the induction rail. Then, the launch solenoid 47 is driven and controlled by operating the operation handle 31 provided on the front door frame 14, and the game ball is launched.

Here, the configuration of the game board 43 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. The game board 43 has a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, an inner rail 51, an outer rail 52, and a general winning opening 53 on the front surface of a base plate 50 made of a resin material cut into a substantially rectangular shape in the front view. The first start port (first start ball entry section) 54, the second start port (second start ball entry section) 55, the variable winning device 56, the normal symbol start gate 57, the variable display device unit 58, etc. are assembled. It is configured. The general winning opening 53, the first starting opening 54, the second starting opening 55, the variable winning device 56, the ordinary symbol starting gate 57, and the variable display device unit 58 are formed in the through holes formed in the base plate 50 by router processing. It is arranged and fixed from the front side of the game board 43 with wood screws or the like. Then, in such a game board 43, the peripheral portion is attached and fixed to the back surface side of the inner frame 13 so that the central portion of the front surface can be visually recognized via the window portion 21 of the front door frame 14. There is.

On the back side of the game board 43, detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, corresponding to the general winning opening 53, the first starting opening 54, the second starting opening 55, the variable winning device 56, and the ordinary symbol starting gate 57, respectively. 56c and 57a (see FIG. 12) are provided. Then, when a ball enters the general winning opening 53, the first and second starting ports 54, 55, the variable winning device 56, and the normal symbol starting gate 57, the ball entry is detected by the corresponding detection sensor, and the detection result is obtained. It is output to the main control device 91, which will be described later. As the detection sensor, for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor is used, but the sensor to be used is arbitrary as long as it can individually detect the entry of a game ball.

Further, when the occurrence of a ball entering the general prize opening 53, the first starting port 54, the second starting port 55, and the variable winning device 56 is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out based on the detection result. Will be done.
In the present embodiment, when a ball is entered into the general winning opening 53, 10 game balls are paid out, and when a ball is entered into the variable winning device 56, 15 game balls are paid out. When the payout is executed and the balls enter the first and second starting ports 54 and 55, the payout of three game balls is executed. The number of these prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls for entering the first starting port 54 may be larger than the number of prize balls for entering the second starting port 55. .. Further, the number of prize balls for winning the variable winning device 56 is not limited to a configuration larger than the number of other prize balls. For example, the number of prize balls for winning the variable winning device 56 is the general winning opening 53. The number of prize balls may be less than the number of prize balls for entering the ball.

The inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52 are formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape, and the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52 form a guide rail and a game ball launching mechanism. The game ball launched from 44 is attached to the base plate 50 so as to be guided to the upper part of the game area. Further, on the front surface of the game board 43, a resin connecting member 59 connecting between the lower right tip of the inner rail 51 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 52 is arranged in front view. There is. The game area is an area on the front surface of the game board 43 surrounded by the inner rail 51, the outer rail 52, and the connecting member 59, and is an area in which the game is played according to the behavior of the game ball (launched game ball). The area where is flowing down).

A return ball prevention member 60 is attached to the tip side of the inner rail 51 (upper left portion in FIG. 5), and the game ball once launched to the upper part (game area) of the game board 43 is guided by the guide rail (inner rail 51). It is possible to suppress the return to the inside (the area between the outer rail 52 and the outer rail 52). A return rubber 61 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 52 (upper right part in FIG. 5) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a force equal to or higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 61. , The momentum is being dampened and bounced back toward the center.

A first starting port 54 through which a game ball can enter is arranged in the lower center of the game board 43 in front view, and a game ball is located on the lower right side of the game board 43 in front view (right side of the first starting port 54). A second starting port 55 is provided so that the ball can enter the ball. Then, when the game ball enters the first starting port 54, the entry of the game ball is detected by the corresponding detection sensor 54a (see FIG. 12). Similarly, when a game ball enters the second starting port 55, the corresponding detection sensor 55a (see FIG. 12) detects the entry of the game ball. Then, the detection result is output to the main control device 91, which will be described later, and the main control device 91 determines whether or not the special symbol is hit (determines whether or not to shift to the open / close execution mode), and a lottery is performed. The display according to the result is shown on the symbol display device 80, which will be described later.

Further, an electric accessory 63 is provided at the second starting port 55. The electric accessory 63 is configured to be openable and closable, and when the electric accessory 63 is in the closed state, the game ball does not enter the second starting port 55 or is difficult to enter, and the electric accessory 63 is electrically operated. When the accessory 63 is in the open state, the game ball is in a state in which it is easy to enter the second starting port 55.

The normal symbol start gate (through gate) 57 is provided on the right side of the center of the front view of the game board 43. Then, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 57, the passage (entry ball) of the game ball is detected by the corresponding detection sensor 57a (see FIG. 12), and the detection result is output to the main control device 91 described later. Will be done. Further, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 57, the main control device 91, which will be described later, determines whether or not the normal symbol hits (determines whether or not the electric accessory 63 is opened). Then, when the determination result is a hit (the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric accessory open state), the electric accessory drive unit 63a (see FIG. 12) is driven and the electric accessory 63 is in the open state. Therefore, the game ball can easily enter the second starting port 55.

As will be described in detail later, the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode are installed in the present embodiment, and during the high-probability mode, the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased and the electric accessory 63 is likely to be in the open state. It has become. Therefore, in the high probability mode (during the high frequency support mode), it is more advantageous for the player to pass the normal symbol start gate 57 to open the electric accessory 63, so that the game ball has a symbol. The game ball is launched so as to pass the right side of the display device 80 (so-called right-handed hit).

The variable winning device 56 is arranged on the lower right side of the front view of the game board 43, and includes a large winning opening 56a leading to the back side of the game board 43, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate 56b covering the large winning opening 56a, and a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate 56b. It is configured to have a variable winning drive unit 56d (see FIG. 12) such as a solenoid for driving the opening / closing plate 56b to the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate 56b as an axis. The large winning opening 56a is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to enter. Then, when it is determined that the main control device 91, which will be described later, has won the transition to the open / close execution mode (wins the winning lottery), the variable winning drive unit 56d is driven and the open / close plate 56b is tilted downward on the front surface. Then, the game ball temporarily forms an open state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the large winning opening 56a, and operates so as to alternately repeat the open state and the normally closed state. For example, the normally closed large winning opening 56a is opened for a predetermined period (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 game balls are inserted). The opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 56 is determined by the determined hit type. For example, in the case of the 16R probability variation hit result described later, the opening / closing operation is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a privileged gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is given to the player as a game value (game value). The payout will be made. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode, the player launches the game ball so that the game ball passes through the right side of the symbol display device 80 and enters the grand prize opening 56a (so-called right-handed hitting). The open / close execution mode is a mode that shifts when a lottery for winning the first lottery game or the second lottery game in the main control device 91, which will be described later, is won, and the open / close execution mode will be described later. do.

A plurality of general winning openings 53 are provided below the front view of the game board 43. Further, an out port 66 is provided at the lowermost part of the front view of the game board 43, and a game ball that has not entered various winning openings is discharged from the game area through the out opening 66. ..

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Aspects that are not included are also included. In this specification, the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 53, the first starting opening 54, the second starting opening 55, and the variable winning device 56 (large winning opening 56a) is also referred to as winning.

A sticking space 70 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 43 when viewed from the front, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space 70 is a front door frame. It can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window portion 21 of 14.

Further, a main display unit 71 composed of a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means is provided in the lower left corner portion (outside of the outer rail 52) of the game board 43 in front view. The main display unit 71 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the window unit 21 of the front door frame 14.

The main display unit 71 is based on the winning of the first result display unit 71a and the second starting port 55 showing the result of the first lottery game performed by the main control device 91 based on the winning of the first starting port 54. The second result display unit 71b showing the result of the second lottery game performed by the main control device 91, when the variable winning device 56 is in the open / close execution mode (or is in the open / close execution mode) by winning the winning lottery. In the case), the variable winning device 56 in the opening / closing execution mode has a round display unit 71c indicating the number of times the variable winning device 56 is opened.

Specifically, the first result display unit 71a performs a variable display regarding the first lottery game, and the variable display (blinks) until the variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on the first lottery game elapses. After the display), as the stop result of the fluctuation display, the stop display is performed in the lighting state indicating the result of the first lottery game. Then, when the lottery result of the first lottery game is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the first result display unit 71a and the variable display is stopped. Later, it shifts to the open / close execution mode.

Further, in the second result display unit 71b, the variation display regarding the second lottery game is performed, and the variation display (blinking display) is performed until the variation time (dynamic display time) determined based on the second lottery game elapses. After that, as the stop result of the fluctuation display, the stop display is performed in the lighting state indicating the result of the second lottery game. Then, when the lottery result of the second lottery game is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the second result display unit 71b and the variable display is stopped. Later, it shifts to the open / close execution mode.

Here, based on the first and second lottery games (winning to any of the first and second starting ports 54 and 55), the variable display is displayed on the corresponding first and second result display units 71a and 71b. The period from the start to the display of the predetermined stop result and the stop of the variation display corresponds to one game (variation display). However, one game round is not limited to the above contents, for example, a single result display unit is provided, and the single result display unit is provided in both the first and second lottery games. In the configuration in which the variation display is performed in, the variation display is started in the single result display unit, and the period until the variation display is stopped while the predetermined stop result is displayed is regarded as one game. do.

Further, the main display unit 71 has other display units 71d in addition to the first and second result display units 71a and 71b and the round display unit 71c. In the other display unit 71d, for example, a variable display is performed triggered by a prize in the normal symbol start gate 57, and as a result of stopping the variable display, an internal lottery performed based on a prize in the normal symbol start gate 57 is performed. The results are shown. Then, if the result of the internal lottery triggered by the winning of the normal symbol start gate 57 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open state of the electric accessory, the other display unit 71d displays a predetermined stop result. After the lighting is displayed, the state shifts to the electric accessory open state. In the electric accessory open state, the electric accessory 63 is in the open state, and the game ball is in a state in which it is easy to win a prize in the second starting port 55.

Further, if the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 57 while the other display unit 71d is performing the variable display triggered by winning the normal symbol start gate 57, the maximum number of passages is 4 in the present embodiment. It is held up to the number of times, and the number of holds is also displayed. Further, if a game ball wins in the first and second starting ports 54 and 55 while the variable display is being performed in the first result display unit 71a or the second result display unit 71b, the number of winnings is the number of winnings in the present embodiment. The first starting port 54 is held up to 4 times, and the second starting port 55 is held up to 4 times, and the number of times of holding is also displayed.

The plurality of LEDs constituting the main display unit 71 are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, so that the number of LEDs is small depending on the combination of the emission colors. It is possible to suggest various game states of. Further, the main display unit 71 may be configured by using another display device such as a liquid crystal display device.

The variable display device unit 58 is arranged in the center of the game board 43. The variable display device unit 58 changes and displays the first special symbol while synchronizing with the fluctuation display on the first result display unit 71a to display the lottery result of the first lottery game and changes on the second result display unit 71b. A symbol display device 80 having a display screen 80a for displaying the lottery result of the second lottery game by varyingly displaying the second special symbol while synchronizing with the display, and a center frame 81 arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 80. have. The center frame 81 is installed with its upper portion extending in front of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen 80a is not lowered due to the fall of the game ball does not occur. ..

The design display device 80 is composed of a large 17-inch size liquid crystal display having a substantially rectangular shape. Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the first special symbol showing the determination result of the first game lottery triggered by the winning of the first starting port 54 and the second starting opening 55 as the trigger. 2 The upper upper display area Dm for displaying the second special symbol indicating the determination result of the lottery game, and the lower lower display area Dn for displaying the reserved symbols (holding of the first lottery game and the second lottery game). have.

In the symbol display device 80, the display content of the display screen 80a is controlled by the display control device 93 described later. Further, the symbol display device 80 is not limited to a liquid crystal display, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device having a display screen such as a CRT.

In the pachinko machine 10, the upper display area Dm is arranged so that the symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower directions, and these symbols are scrolled in the left-right direction so as to be variablely displayed. Then, the variable display on the symbol display device 80 (display screen 80a) is started when a prize is won in the first starting port 54 or the second starting port 55. That is, when the first result display unit 71a or the second result display unit 71b performs the variable display, the symbol display device 80 performs the variable display accordingly. Then, in the game round of shifting to the open / close execution mode, the symbol display device 80 stops and displays a predetermined combination of symbols on the preset effective line.

The first special symbol and the second special symbol displayed in the upper display area Dm are nine types of main symbols with the numbers "1" to "9" shown in FIGS. 7 (a) to 7 (i), respectively. And a sub-design consisting of a shell-shaped pattern shown in FIG. 7 (j). More specifically, the main symbol is composed of nine types of character symbols such as an octopus to which numbers "1" to "9" are added.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of the upper row, the middle row, and the lower row are set in the upper display area Dm of the symbol display device 80, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is the main. The symbols and sub-symbols are arranged in a cyclic manner in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol string Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers (descending order with respect to the fluctuation direction of the symbols), and between each main symbol. Sub-designs are arranged one by one. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers (ascending order with respect to the fluctuation direction of the symbols), and one sub symbol is provided between each main symbol. They are arranged one by one.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are each composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers (ascending order with respect to the fluctuation direction of the symbols), and then the main symbol of "9" is arranged. The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged between the main symbol of "1" and the main symbol of "1", and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols.

Further, in the upper display area Dm, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. In the pachinko machine 10, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set in the upper display area Dm.

Then, when the effect for the game times (variable display times) is performed in the upper display area Dm triggered by the winning of the first start port 54 or the second start port 55, the symbols in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed. The variable display is started so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. After that, the variable display is switched to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbols are statically displayed in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 for game use. The production of is finished.

In addition, when the effect for the game round is completed, if the game round corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode, a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on any of the effective lines, and the open / close execution mode is formed. The hit video is displayed as a transition to (occurrence of hit result).

As described above, the symbol display device 80 (first result display unit 71a or second result display unit 71b) fluctuates when any of the first and second start ports 54 and 55 is awarded. The period from the start of the display to the display of the predetermined stop result and the stop of the variable display corresponds to one game. Further, the mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 80 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern to be variablely displayed by the symbol display device 80 is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 7, and for example, only numbers may be variablely displayed as the pattern.

The lower display area Dn is provided horizontally longer than the upper display area Dm. The lower display area Dn has a first reserved symbol display area Ds on the left side of the front view and a second reserved symbol display area Dt on the right side of the front view, and has a first reserved symbol display area Ds and a second reserved symbol. It has an execution pending symbol display area Du between it and the display area Ds. The first reserved symbol display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of reserved symbols triggered by winning a prize in the first starting port 54, and in this pachinko machine 10, winning a prize in the first starting port 54 is held up to four times. Therefore, the four small areas are equally divided into the first to fourth display areas Ds1 to Ds4. The second reserved symbol display area Dt is an area for displaying the number of reserved symbols triggered by winning a prize in the second starting port 55, and in this pachinko machine 10, winning a prize in the second starting port 55 is held up to four times. Therefore, the four small areas are equally divided into the first to fourth display areas Dt1 to Dt4. The execution pending symbol display area Du is an area for displaying the reserved symbols corresponding to the game times that are variablely displayed on the symbol display device 80.

Then, in the upper display area Dm, when the game ball wins the first starting port 54 while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing, the start of the first lottery game triggered by the winning is suspended, and the lower In the first reserved symbol display area Ds of the side display area Dn, the display area (center side display area) having the smallest number among the first to fourth display areas Ds1 to Ds4 in which the reserved symbol is not displayed is the first. 1 The reserved symbol of the lottery game is displayed. Similarly, if the game ball wins the second starting port 55 while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing, the start of the second lottery game triggered by the winning is suspended, and the lower display area Dn In the second reserved symbol display area Dt, the second lottery game is reserved in the display area (display area on the center side) of the smallest number among the first to fourth display areas Dt1 to Dt4 where the reserved symbol is not displayed. The design is displayed.

On the back side of the game board 43, as shown in FIG. 5, four are moved when the player operates the first frame button 26 during a predetermined period (effective period for operating the effect unit described later). A first effect unit (normal effect means) 310, two second effect units (normal effect means) 320, one third effect unit (normal effect means) 330, and one specific unit (specific effect means) 340 are provided. Has been done. Specifically, the center frame 81 is configured to have a substantially rectangular opening 82 that exposes the display screen 80a, and in front view, the first effect unit 310 is located at each corner of the opening 82. The second effect unit 320 is provided in the central portion on both the left and right sides of the opening 82, the third effect unit 330 is provided in the central portion below the opening 82, and the specific unit 340 is provided in the opening. It is provided in the central part above the 82.

In the present embodiment, the specific unit 340 causes the player to detect (notify) that a hit result is generated (shifted to the open / close execution mode) during the game turn by moving. The first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 increase the player's attention to the game while expecting the player to move the specific unit 340 by moving. Is.

Here, the configurations of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, the third effect unit 330, and the specific unit 340 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram for explaining the configurations of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, the third effect unit 330, and the specific unit 340.

As shown in FIG. 8, each first effect unit 310 has a circular shape when viewed from the front, and has a first movable portion 311 (normally movable portion) that covers a part of the display screen 80a from the front and the first movable portion. It is provided with a first drive unit 312 for moving the unit 311.

The first drive unit 312 has a first rail 312a each extending obliquely from each corner of the opening 82 toward the center and provided with a first transfer belt (not shown) conveyed by a drive roller. ing. Each first rail 312a is provided so as to extend inside and outside the opening 82 in front view with reference to the peripheral edge of the opening 82, and one end side exists on the back surface of the center frame 81. ..

Each of the first rails 312a is provided with a first guide member 312b that is integrated with the first movable portion 311 and has a one-to-one correspondence with the first rail 312a. Specifically, each first guide member 312b has a connecting portion (not shown), and is provided on each first rail 312a by attaching the connecting portion so as to mesh with each first transport belt. ing.

Further, the first drive unit 312 has a first drive unit 312c for driving the drive roller. Then, when the first drive unit 312c is controlled by the MPU 152 provided in the voice lamp control device 92, which will be described later (see FIG. 14), the drive roller is driven to transport the transport belt. The first guide member 312b (first movable portion 311) moves along the first rail 312a. As a result, the first movable portion 311 integrated with the first guide member 312b also moves along the first rail 312a.

The above is the basic configuration of the first production unit 310. The configurations of the second effect unit 320, the third effect unit 330, and the specific unit 340 are basically the same as those of the first effect unit 310. Briefly, the second effect unit 320 has a circular shape when viewed from the front, and has a second movable portion 321 (normally movable portion) that covers a part of the display screen 80a from the front, a second rail 322a, and a second guide. It includes a member 322b and a second drive unit 322 having a second drive unit 322c. The third effect unit 330 has a circular shape when viewed from the front, and has a third movable portion 331 (normally movable portion) that covers a part of the display screen 80a from the front, a third rail 332a, a third guide member 332b, and a third. It includes a third drive unit 332 having three drive units 332c. The specific unit 340 has a circular shape when viewed from the front, and includes a specific movable portion 341 that covers a part of the display screen 80a from the front, and a specific drive unit 342 having a specific rail 342a, a specific guide member 342b, and a specific drive unit 342c. It has.

Then, when the drive units 322c, 332c, and 342c are controlled by the MPU 152 provided in the voice lamp control device 92, which will be described later (see FIG. 14), the drive rollers are driven and the transfer belt is conveyed. As a result, the guide members 322b, 332b, and 342b move along the rails 322a, 332a, and 342a. As a result, the movable portions 321, 331, and 341 integrated with the guide members 322b, 332b, and 342b move along the rails 322a, 332a, and 342a.

In the present embodiment, the first movable portion 311, the second movable portion 321 and the third movable portion 331, and the specific movable portion 341 have a circular shape, respectively, but the diameters are the first movable portion 311 and the first movable portion 311 and the first movable portion 341. The size is increased in the order of the two movable parts 321 and the third movable part 331, and the specific movable part 341. Further, the lengths of the first rail 312a, the second rail 322a, the third rail 332a, and the specific rail 342a are increased in the order of the first rail 312a, the second rail 322a, the third rail 332a, and the specific rail 342a. There is.

Next, the movable mode of the first effect unit 310 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 9 shows the first effect unit 310 provided in the lower left corner of the opening 82 in the front view, but the same applies to the movable mode of the first effect unit 310 provided in the other corners. ..

As shown in FIG. 9A, in the first effect unit 310, the first guide member 312b is an end portion on the first rail 312a on the one end side (opposite side to the center side of the opening 82) in the longitudinal direction. When present in, a part of the first movable portion 311 is hidden behind the center frame 81, and only a part of the area covers the display screen 80a. This position becomes the initial position (retracted position, hereinafter referred to as the first position) in the first movable portion 311. If not, it is placed in the first position.

Then, in the situation where the first movable unit 311 is arranged at the first position, when the first drive unit 312c is in the drive state, the transfer belt is conveyed, so that as shown in FIG. 9B, The first movable portion 311 (first guide member 312b) begins to move along the first rail 312a, and as shown in FIG. 9C, the first movable portion 311 (first guide member 312b) is first. It is movable until it reaches the end of the rail 312a on the other end side (center side of the opening 82) in the longitudinal direction. This position becomes the limit movable position in the first movable portion 311 (hereinafter referred to as the second position), and when the first movable portion 311 reaches the second position, the state shown in FIG. 9 (b) is reached and then FIG. 9 (a). ) Return to the first position. That is, the first movable portion 311 starts to move from the first position, reaches the second position, and then returns to the first position (first position → second position → first position) in one movable mode. ing.

In the present embodiment, the first effect unit 310 has a first movable portion so that when the first movable portion 311 reaches the second position, the entire first movable portion 311 is arranged on the display screen 80a. The diameter of 311 and the length of the first rail 312a are adjusted.

The above is the movable mode of the first effect unit 310. Since the movable modes of the second effect unit 320, the third effect unit 330, and the specific unit 340 are basically the same as the movable modes of the first effect unit 310, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Briefly, in the second movable portion 321 and the third movable portion 331, each guide member 322b and 332b is an end of each rail 322a and 332a on the one end side (opposite side to the center side of the opening 82) in the longitudinal direction. The case where it exists in the portion is set as the initial position retract position (hereinafter referred to as the first position) of each movable portion 321 and 331, and each guide member 322b and 332b is the other end portion in the longitudinal direction of each rail 322a and 332a. If the case where it exists at the end of the side (center side of the opening 82) is defined as the limit movable position (hereinafter referred to as the second position) of each movable portion 321 and 331, it starts to move from the first position and is the second position. It is said that one movable mode is from reaching to the first position to returning to the first position.
The first and second positions of the first movable portion 311 and the second movable portion 321 and the third movable portion 331 are different from each other.

Similarly, in the specific movable portion 341, the initial case of the specific movable portion 341 is when the guide member 342b is present at one end side (opposite side to the center side of the opening 82) in the longitudinal direction of each rail 342a. The position (retracted position, hereinafter referred to as the third position) is specified, and the case where the guide member 342b exists at the other end side (center side of the opening 82) in the longitudinal direction of each rail 342a is specified. Assuming that the limit movable position of the movable portion 341 (hereinafter referred to as the fourth position), the movable mode is one time from the start of movement from the third position to the return to the third position after reaching the fourth position.

As with the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320 and the third effect unit 330 are arranged so that the entire movable portions 321 and 331 are arranged on the display screen 80a at the second position. The diameter of each movable portion 321 and 331 and the length of each rail 322a and 332a are adjusted. Similarly, in the specific unit 340, the diameter of the specific movable portion 341, the length of the specific rail 342a, and the like are adjusted so that the entire specific movable portion 341 is arranged on the display screen 80a at the fourth position. .. However, in the present embodiment, when the first movable portion 311 and the second movable portion 321 and the third movable portion 331 are each movable to the second position and the specific movable portion 341 is moved to the fourth position, FIG. As shown in No. 10, the movable portions 31 to 341 do not come into contact with each other. FIG. 10 is a schematic view showing a state in which the first movable portion 311, the second movable portion 321 and the third movable portion 331 are movable to the second position, and the specific movable portion 341 is moved to the fourth position. be.

Subsequently, one movable period of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 of the present embodiment will be described. The first production unit 310, the second production unit 320, and the third production unit 330 can move between the first position and the second position in one movement, respectively, but one movement period (basic movement). Period) is different. Specifically, the lengths of the first production unit 310, the second production unit 320, and the third production unit 330 are increased in the order of the first rail 312a, the second rail 322a, and the third rail 332a. The moving speeds (moving speeds) are equalized. Therefore, one movable period (basic movable period) becomes longer in the order of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330. Therefore, for example, when the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 start to move at the same time, the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 can move in this order. Is finished.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 11.
FIG. 11 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 43), there is a main control device 91 that controls the main control of the game, and a voice lamp control device that controls the voice, the lamp display, and the like. 92 and a display control device 93 that controls the symbol display device 80 are mounted.

Each of these control devices 91 to 93 is configured such that each control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like. Each board box is provided with a box base (front case body) having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base, and these box bases and the box cover are separated from each other by means of preventing separation (or). It is sealed by being inseparably connected by a box joint as a (bonding means). Since the substrate boxes are inseparably connected by these box joints, the substrate box needs to be destroyed or partially cut off when the internal space of the substrate box is opened. It should be noted that, for example, a plurality of box coupling portions are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box, and at least one of them is used to perform the coupling process.

Any configuration can be applied to the box joint as long as the box base and the box cover cannot be opened, but the box base and the box can be formed by inserting a locking claw into the elongated hole constituting the box joint. It is designed so that it cannot be opened with the cover. The joining process by the box joining part prevents illegal opening after the joining, and even if illegal opening is performed, such a situation can be detected early and easily, and once. Even after opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting the locking claw into at least one elongated hole among the plurality of box coupling portions. Then, when the board box is opened when a defect occurs in the housed control board or when the control board is inspected, a connecting portion between the box connecting portion into which the locking claw is inserted and another box connecting portion or the like. , Cut the connecting part between the box joint and the box body. As a result, the box base of the board box and the box cover are separated, and the internal control board can be taken out. After that, when the coupling process is performed again, the locking claw may be inserted into the elongated hole of the other box coupling portion. If the history of opening the board box is left in the board box, it is possible to easily find out whether or not the board box has been opened illegally by looking at the board box.

Further, a plurality of bonding pieces are provided on one short side of the substrate box so as to project to the side thereof. These coupling pieces are provided so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of bonded pieces formed on the mounting bases of the respective control devices 91 to 93, and the board box and the mounting base are provided by the coupling pieces and the coupling pieces. The combination process is performed with and.

As a trace means for detecting unauthorized opening of the substrate box, a sealing sticker may be attached so as to straddle the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the sealing sticker is peeled off from the sticking portion, the adhesive layer of the sealing sticker remains on the substrate box side, and a trace thereof remains. Further, the seal seal is provided with an IC tag that transmits a response wave containing identification information to a ring wave of a predetermined frequency, and when the seal seal is removed, the antenna of the IC tag is cut off and the response is described above. It may be configured so that the transmission of waves is impossible.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 11, the back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main control device 91, the display control device 93, and the voice lamp control device 92. There is. The back pack unit 15 includes a transparent back pack 94, and a payout mechanism portion 95 and a control device collecting unit 96 are attached to the back pack 94.

The payout mechanism 95 includes a tank 97 to which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, a tank rail 98 connected below the tank 97 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail. It is provided at the most downstream portion of the 98, and includes a payout device 99 that pays out balls according to a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 99a (see FIG. 12). Then, the game ball paid out from the payout device 99 is discharged to the upper plate 25 or the lower plate 30 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 99. A vibrator (not shown) for adding vibration to the tank rail 98 is attached to the tank rail 98. Further, the payout mechanism unit 95 is equipped with, for example, a back pack board provided with a power switch for turning on and off the power supply while supplying a main power supply of 24 volts AC.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control device collective unit 96 generates and outputs a payout control device 100 having a function of controlling the payout device 99 and predetermined electric power required by various control devices and the like, and also a player. It is provided with a power supply and a launch control device 101 for controlling the launch of the game ball accompanying the operation of the operation handle 31 by the user. The payout control device 100 and the power supply and launch control device 101 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 100 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 11, the payout control device 100 is provided with a state return switch 102, and the power supply and emission control device 101 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob (not shown) and a RAM erase switch 103. There is. The state return switch 102 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 99a (see FIG. 12). The operation knob is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid 47. The RAM erase switch 103 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

The payout control device 100, the power supply and the launch control device 101 are configured such that the control board and the like are housed in the board box as in the case of each of the above control devices, and the same fraud deterrent means as described above is provided. .. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a storage and retention function for various data, and can maintain the state at the time of a power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure, and can return to the state at the time of a power failure when recovering from the power failure. It has become like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the back pack 94 is provided with an external output terminal plate 104 at an upper corner portion on the rotation shaft side of the back pack unit 15. The external output terminal board 104 has an output terminal for outputting a signal when the tank 97 or the like runs out of game balls, an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. Output terminal for outputting a signal each time the machine is rented, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and a state transition such as an opening / closing execution mode. At that time (or during the transition to the state), an output terminal or the like for outputting a signal is provided. Then, through these output terminals, a signal regarding the state of the pachinko machine 10 is output to the management control device on the game hall side.

It should be noted that an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of game balls are rented is not required in a so-called cash machine. Further, for each control device (each control board), as will be described in detail later, an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, and a random number generation used in various lottery. A device, a clock pulse generation circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. are installed as needed.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. 12 to 14 are block diagrams showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 12 mainly shows the overall configuration, FIG. 13 mainly shows the configuration of the main control device 91, and FIG. 14 mainly shows the configuration of the main control device 91. The configuration of the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 is shown. In FIG. 14, the supply lines of the operating power from the power supply and launch control device 101 to the main control device 91 and the payout control device 100 are indicated by double-line arrows, and the other supply lines and signal lines are indicated by solid line arrows. ing.

As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the main control device 91 includes a main control board 111 that controls the main control of the game. The MPU 112 is mounted on the main control board 111, and the ROM 113 and the RAM 114 are built in the MPU 112. In the following, the MPU 112, ROM 113, and RAM 114 of the main control device 91 will be described as the main MPU 112, the main ROM 113, and the main RAM 114.

The main ROM 113 is configured to use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory as read-only. The main ROM 113 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the main MPU 112. For example, as shown in FIG. 13, the special symbol winning / failing table storage area 113a and the distribution table are stored. Storage area 113b, Reach table storage area 113c, Variable display time table storage area 113d, Stop result table storage area 113e, Normal symbol hit / miss table storage area 113f, Special figure special electric address table storage area 113g, Normal figure general electric address table storage It has an area 113h, an update data table storage area 113i, and a command information storage area 113j.

The main RAM 114 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access. When compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the main ROM 113. Then, the main RAM 114 temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the main ROM 113 is executed. The main RAM 114 is, for example, a lottery counter buffer 114a, a special symbol holding ball storage area 114b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 114c, a special symbol special electric counter area 114d, a special symbol special electric timer counter area 114e, and a high probability mode flag storage area. 114f, time saving flag storage area 114g, time saving number counter area 114h, Fuzu Fuden counter area 114i, Fuzu Fuden timer counter area 114j, various hit result flag storage area 114k, other various counter areas 114m, other various flag storage areas It has 114n.

Further, the main control board 111 or the main MPU 112 is provided with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like in addition to the above elements. It is not essential that the main MPU 112 has a one-chip configuration incorporating the main ROM 113 and the main RAM 114, and the main MPU 112, the main ROM 113, and the main RAM 114 are individually chipped. It may be a configured configuration. This also applies to each control device described later other than the main control device 91.

The main MPU 112 is provided with an input port and an output port (not shown), respectively. An input / output port may be provided instead of the input port and the output port, and the configuration may be such that the input port and the output port can be switched as needed. This also applies to the MPU of each control device described later other than the main control device 91. Various control devices 92 and 100 are connected to the input side and the output side of the main MPU 112, and various detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a, 115, various drive units 56d, 63a and the main. The display unit 71 is connected. First, the connection configurations with the various detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a, 115, the various drive units 56d, 63a, and the main display unit 71 will be described. The detection sensor 115 is a magnet detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor, a vibration detection sensor, or the like.

On the input side of the main MPU 112, a winning detection provided for a general winning opening 53, a first starting opening 54, a second starting opening 55, a variable winning device 56, and a normal symbol starting gate 57 in the game area. Sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a (hereinafter, collectively referred to as winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a) are electrically connected via electrical wiring. In this case, the main control board 111 and the winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a may be connected to each other via one electric wiring, and a relay board is interposed in the middle of each signal path. It may be configured as such. This also applies to the configuration related to the connection with other devices. The main MPU 112 receives signals from the winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a through the winning IC 116 mounted on the main control board 111, and determines the winning of each winning unit based on the reception result. (Judgment of entry) is performed. In addition, the main MPU 112 executes a winning lottery (first and second lottery games) triggered by winning a prize in the first starting port 54 and the second starting port 55, and also wins a prize in the normal symbol start gate 57. Based on this, the electric accessory opening lottery (support lottery) is executed.

The winning IC 116 is a route abnormality confirmation means or a route abnormality confirmation circuit, and the winning IC 116 transmits a normal signal between the winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a and the main MPU 112. Check if transmission is taking place.

Further, on the input side of the main MPU 112, in addition to the above-mentioned winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a, other detection sensors 115 such as a magnet detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor, and a vibration detection sensor are connected via electrical wiring. Is electrically connected. The main MPU 112 receives signals from other detection sensors 115 such as a magnet detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor, and a vibration detection sensor, and based on the reception result, determines the presence or absence of an abnormality that is the target of each detection. do.

On the output side of the main MPU 112, a variable winning drive unit 56d that opens and closes the opening / closing plate 56b of the variable winning device 56 and an electric accessory driving unit 63a that opens and closes the electric accessory 63 are electrically connected via electrical wiring. Is connected. Further, the main display unit 71 is electrically connected to the output side of the main MPU 112 via electrical wiring. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 111, and the main MPU 112 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 56d and the electric accessory drive unit 63a through the driver circuit, and displays the main display unit 71. Take control.

For example, in the open / close execution mode, the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 56d is executed in the main MPU 112 so that the large winning opening 56a is opened and closed. Further, when the electric accessory 63 is won in the open state, the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 63a is executed in the main MPU 112 so that the electric accessory 63 is opened and closed. Further, at each game round, the display control of the main display units 71 (first and second result display units 71a, 71b) is executed on the main MPU 112. Then, when the lottery result of whether or not to open the electric accessory 63 is shown, the display control of the main display unit 71 (other display unit 71d) is executed on the main MPU 112.

The main MPU 112 sets information in the main RAM 114 according to the progress of the game. Although omitted in FIG. 12, an external output terminal board 104 (see FIG. 3) is connected to the output side of the main MPU 112, and the main MPU 112 signals according to the information set in the main RAM 114. The output setting is made to the external output terminal board 104, and the state of the pachinko machine 10 is recognized by the hall computer in the game hall.

Next, the configuration in the connection (communication) between the main control device 91 and the payout control device 100 will be described. First, before explaining the configuration in these connections (communication), the electrical configuration of the payout control device 100 will be described.

The payout control device 100 includes a payout control board 121 that controls the payout of game balls through the payout device 99, the payout control board 121 is equipped with an MPU 122, and the MPU 122 has a ROM 123 and a RAM 124. .. In the following, the MPU 122, ROM 123 and RAM 124 provided in the payout control device 100 will be referred to as the payout side MPU 122, the payout side ROM 123 and the payout side RAM 124.

The payout side ROM 123 is configured to use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory as read-only. The payout side ROM 123 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the payout side MPU 122.

The payout side RAM 124 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access. When compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the payout side ROM 123. Then, the payout side RAM 124 temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the payout side ROM 123 is executed. In addition to the above elements, the payout control board 121 or the payout side MPU 122 is provided with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like.

The payout side MPU 122 is electrically connected to the payout device 99. The payout device 99 is switched between a state in which the game ball supplied from the tank 97 to the payout device 99 is blocked from flowing down to the downstream side and a state in which the game ball is sent out to the downstream side. A payout motor 99a for driving a ball stop member such as a rotating body is provided, and a payout detection sensor 99b for individually detecting a game ball sent out to the downstream side is provided. A payout motor 99a is electrically connected to the output side of the payout side MPU 122 via electrical wiring, and a payout detection sensor 99b is electrically connected to the input side of the payout side MPU 122 via electrical wiring. Has been done. The payout side MPU 122 executes the payout of the game ball by supplying a drive signal to the payout motor 99a via the driver circuit provided on the payout control board 121, and pays out based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor 99b. Grasp the number of completed game balls.

Further, the payout side MPU 122 is electrically connected to the ball rental connection terminal plate 131 provided on the back pack unit 15 via electrical wiring, and the ball rental connection terminal plate 131 is electrically connected via electrical wiring. Is electrically connected to the card unit. As a result, the player can receive the rental of the game ball by appropriately manually operating the ball rental button 28 provided on the pachinko machine 10. The payout side MPU 122 executes ball lending control by transmitting and receiving an electric signal to and from the card unit.

Further, in addition to the payout device 99 and the card unit, a fullness detection sensor (not shown) that detects whether the game ball is full in the lower plate 30 as a ball tray is electrically connected to the payout side MPU 122. In addition, a ballless detection sensor (not shown) or the like that detects whether the tank 97 is in a ballless state is electrically connected.

Then, the payout side MPU 122 controls the payout of the game ball based on the communication with the main side MPU 112. As a configuration for performing the communication, a plurality of signal paths exist between the main control board 111 and the payout control device 100.

In detail about the signal path, when the main MPU 112 confirms that the prize has been won in the prize section corresponding to the generation of the prize ball based on the detection results of the prize detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, the signal path is directed toward the payout side MPU 122. A prize ball command (payout command information) is transmitted, and a first signal path SL1 is provided for transmitting the prize ball command. In this case, the prize ball command includes information indicating that it is a prize ball command and information on the number of prize balls to be executed, and is configured as information of a plurality of bits.

There are a plurality of types of prize ball commands, and the command information storage area 113j of the main ROM 113 is referred to. Then, when the winning to the general winning opening 53 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, and when the winning to the variable winning device 56 is specified, 13 are output. The prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the game ball is output, and when the winning of the first and second starting ports 54 and 55 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is output. NS.

Here, in the present embodiment, the first signal path SL1 is set to perform serial communication instead of parallel communication in communicating the prize ball command. That is, the information of the plurality of bits included in the prize ball command is sequentially transmitted through a single signal path. The first signal path SL1 is provided by a single connector unit in which connectors for electrically connecting to the connectors provided on the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 are provided at both ends of the electrical wiring. Although it is configured, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured by a plurality of connector units by passing a relay board or the like in the middle of the signal path.

Further, a second signal path SL2 and a third signal path SL3 are provided as signal paths for transmitting information from the payout side MPU 122 to the main side MPU 112. The second signal path SL2 is used to transmit a payout status command (payout status information) from the payout side MPU 122 to the main side MPU 112. The payout status commands include a prize ball completion command indicating that the prize ball has been completed and the number of completed prize balls, an abnormality start command indicating that a predetermined abnormality has occurred in paying out the game ball, and the predetermined value. It contains an abend command that indicates that the error has been cleared. That is, the payout status command includes information indicating the type of its own command and information indicating the content of the payout status, and is configured as a plurality of bits of information. The predetermined abnormality relating to the payout of the game ball includes, for example, a full state of the lower plate 30 and a ball-less state of the tank 97.

In communicating the payout status command, the second signal path SL2 is set to perform serial communication instead of parallel communication, like the first signal path SL1. That is, the configuration is such that the information of the plurality of bits included in the payout status command is sequentially transmitted through a single signal path. The second signal path SL2 is provided by a single connector unit in which connectors for electrically connecting to the connectors provided on the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 are provided at both ends of the electrical wiring. Although it is configured, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured by a plurality of connector units by passing a relay board or the like in the middle of the signal path.

The third signal path SL3 is used to transmit a payout permission signal from the payout side MPU 121 to the main side MPU 112. The payout permission signal is information transmitted from the payout side MPU 122 to the main side MPU 112 in order for the main side MPU 112 to grasp the output timing of the prize ball command.

The payout permission signal consists of 1-bit information. When the output of the prize ball command is prohibited, the LOW level signal is transmitted, and when the output of the prize ball command is permitted, the HI level signal is transmitted. NS. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the HI level signal is transmitted when the output of the prize ball command is prohibited, and the LOW level signal is output when the output of the prize ball command is permitted. It may be configured to be.

The third signal path SL3 is provided by a single connector unit in which connectors for electrically connecting to the connectors provided on the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 are provided at both ends of the electrical wiring. Although it is configured, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured by a plurality of connector units by passing a relay board or the like in the middle of the signal path.

In this way, the command communication between the main MPU 112 and the payout side MPU 122 is serial communication instead of parallel communication, so that the electrical wiring that electrically connects the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 can be used. On the other hand, even if a fraudulent act using a so-called hanging board for connecting an illegal board is performed, the possibility that the illegal board is hidden by electrical wiring or the like is reduced. The above action is performed in an attempt to illegally pay out a large amount of game balls, and the signal path between the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 is likely to be targeted as the target of the above action. In this case, in a configuration in which bidirectional command communication is performed between the main MPU 112 and the payout side MPU 122, if parallel communication is adopted as the command communication, the number of electrical wirings increases accordingly, and the above-mentioned illegal boards are used. It is easy to hide due to electrical wiring. On the other hand, since the command communication is performed by serial communication, it becomes difficult for the illegal board to be hidden in the electrical wiring, and it becomes easy to find the board if it is temporarily installed.

Next, the configuration in the electrical connection between the main control device 91 and the payout control device 100 and the power supply and launch control device 101 will be described.

The power supply and launch control device 101 includes a power supply and launch control board 141, and the power supply and launch control board 141 has a function of supplying operating power to various devices including the main control device 91 and the payout control device 100. A power supply circuit 142 having the power supply circuit 142 is provided. The power supply circuit 142 is provided with a power supply unit 143 for power-on and a power supply unit 144 for power failure.

The power supply unit 143 for power-on is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like, and the main control device 91, the payout control device 100, or the like is based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source. The required operating voltage is generated for each, and the generated operating voltage is supplied to the main control device 91, the payout control device 100, and the like. As an outline, the power supply unit 143 at the time of power-on takes in the AC 24-volt power supply supplied through the connection board provided in the back pack unit 15, and has a + 12V voltage for driving various sensors, motors, and the like. A + 5V voltage or the like for logic is generated, and these + 12V voltage and + 5V voltage are supplied to the main control device 91, the payout control device 100, and the like. The connection board is provided with a power switch for turning on / off the power of the pachinko machine 10.

Further, the main control device 91 is provided with a power failure monitoring board 117 at an intermediate position of the power supply path between the power supply unit 143 for power-on and the main MPU 112. The power failure monitoring board 117 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage supplied from the power supply unit 143 at the time of power supply. Then, when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts, it is determined that a power cutoff has occurred, and the output setting of the power failure signal (power cutoff signal) to the main MPU 112 is set to correspond to the occurrence of the power failure (power cutoff). Specifically, a LOW level power failure signal is transmitted in a situation where it is determined that a power cutoff has not occurred, and a HI level power failure signal is transmitted in a situation where it is determined that a power failure has occurred. ..
The relationship between LOW and HI may be reversed.

The power supply unit 144 for power failure is composed of a capacitor, and when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is ON (when power is supplied from a commercial power supply), the power supplied from the power supply unit 143 for power supply is used. It will be charged. Further, in a power cut state (when the power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off) such as when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF or when a power failure occurs in the commercial power supply, the power supply unit 144 for power supply is discharged. As a result, storage retention power (backup power) is supplied to the main RAM 114. Therefore, even in such a situation, the information stored in the main RAM 114 is stored and retained without being erased while the storage and holding power is being supplied from the power supply unit 144 at the time of power failure.

The capacity of the power supply unit 144 for power failure is secured relatively large, and the information stored in the main RAM 114 before the power is cut off is retained within a predetermined period (for example, 1 day or 2 days). ..
Further, the configuration of the power supply unit 144 for power failure is not limited to the capacitor, and may be a battery, a non-rechargeable battery, or the like. In the case of a non-rechargeable battery, it is not necessary to store electricity in the power supply unit 144 at the time of power failure when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is ON, but it is necessary to replace the battery periodically.

Further, although the description by illustration is omitted, the power supply and the emission control board 141 are provided with a power supply unit for power failure processing, which is different from the power supply unit 144 for power failure. In the power supply and emission control board 141, even after the DC stable 24 volt power supply becomes less than 22 volt, it is controlled for a sufficient time for executing the power failure processing by discharging from the power supply unit for power failure processing. It is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the drive power supply for the system, at a normal value. As a result, the main MPU 112 can normally execute and complete the power failure processing.

Here, a configuration related to the supply of operating power from the power supply circuit 142 to the main MPU 112 and the payout side MPU 122 will be described.

The electric power from the power supply unit 143 at the time of power-on is supplied to the VCS terminal of the main MPU 112 and the VCS terminal of the payout side MPU 122. In a situation where power is supplied from a commercial power source by the power supplied to the VCS terminal, various control processes are executed by the MPUs 112 and 122, and information is stored and held by the RAMs 114 and 124. Will be.

On the other hand, the power from the power supply unit 144 at the time of power failure is supplied to the VBB terminal of the main MPU 112, but not to the VBB terminal (not shown) of the payout side MPU 122. That is, the storage holding power from the power supply unit 144 at the time of power failure is supplied to the main RAM 114, but is not supplied to the payout side RAM 124. Therefore, in a situation where the power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off, the main RAM 114 stores and holds the information, but the payout side RAM 124 does not store and hold the information. The VBB terminal of the payout side MPU 122 is grounded or is not connected to any electrical wiring.

As described above, the storage holding power from the power supply unit 144 at the time of power failure is supplied to the main RAM 114, but the capacity of the power supply unit 144 at the time of power failure is reduced by configuring the configuration so that it is not supplied to the payout side RAM 124. Is planned. As a result, the initial cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In addition to the power supply circuit 142, the power supply and launch control board 141 is provided with a launch control circuit 145 that controls the launch of the game ball. The launch control circuit 145 is provided with a transmission circuit 146 that satisfies the conditions, a launch permission receiving circuit 147, and a launch IC 148.

The condition-satisfying transmission circuit 146 has a function of transmitting a condition-satisfying signal of a predetermined signal form to the main MPU 112 when a predetermined launch condition of the game ball is satisfied. Specifically, the launch control circuit 145 has a touch sensor 31a that detects that the annular handle portion of the operation handle 31 is being touched by the player, and the game even in a situation where the handle portion is rotated. A stop switch 31b, which is manually operated by the player to stop the firing of the ball, is electrically connected. Further, the launch control circuit 145 is electrically connected to the payout control board 121, and inputs a signal indicating whether or not the card unit is electrically connected to the ball rental connection terminal board 131.

The transmission circuit 146 for satisfying the condition receives a signal from the touch sensor 31a indicating that the handle portion is being touched by the player, and also receives a signal from the stop switch 31b indicating that the handle is not manually operated by the player. Further, when the signal indicating that the card unit is connected is received from the payout side MPU 122, the HI level condition satisfaction signal (signal corresponding to the condition satisfaction) is transmitted to the main side MPU 112. If any of the above signals is not received, a LOW level condition satisfaction signal (a signal that does not correspond to the condition satisfaction) is transmitted to the main MPU 112. Further, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and the relationship between the LOW level and the HI level may be reversed.

The firing permission receiving circuit 147 is HI-level firing permission transmitted from the main MPU 112, provided that the HI level condition satisfaction signal is transmitted from the condition-satisfying transmission circuit 146 to the main MPU 112. It has a function of receiving a signal (a signal corresponding to a launch permission) and, when receiving the launch permission signal, continuously supplying a signal corresponding to the signal to the launch IC 148. When the main MPU 112 does not receive the HI level condition satisfying signal from the condition satisfying transmission circuit 146, the main MPU 112 transmits a LOW level launch permission signal (a signal that does not correspond to the launch permission), but launches. The relationship between the LOW level signal and the HI level signal of the permission signal may be reversed. Further, the main MPU 112 newly starts transmitting the HI level launch permission signal each time it starts receiving the HI level condition satisfying signal, and when the reception of the HI level condition satisfying signal is completed, the HI level Ends the transmission of the launch permission signal.

When the launch IC 148 receives the HI level launch permission signal or the corresponding signal from the launch permission receiving circuit 147, the launch IC 148 is for each of the launch solenoid 47 and the ball feed device 46 of the game ball launch mechanism 44. It has a function to output a drive signal on a regular basis.
In this case, the launch IC 148 outputs each drive signal as a pulse signal, and the output cycle is 0.6 sec. Further, the output timing of the drive signal is set earlier in the ball feeding device 46 than in the launch solenoid 47 so that the game ball is launched after one game ball is supplied to the launch rail 45.

Further, the operation handle 31 is provided with a variable resistor as an operation amount detection means for detecting the operation amount as described above, and the firing IC 148 is based on the voltage input from the variable resistor. The firing intensity is adjusted by adjusting the voltage of the drive signal supplied to the firing solenoid 47. Therefore, the larger the amount of operation of the operation handle 31, the stronger the firing strength of the game ball by the firing solenoid 47. It is not essential that the adjustment function is provided in the launch IC 148, and an adjustment circuit may be provided in the middle of the signal path between the launch IC 148 and the launch solenoid 47.

Next, the configuration in the electrical connection between the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 will be described with reference to FIG.

The voice lamp control device 92 includes a voice lamp control board 151, the voice lamp control board 151 is equipped with an MPU 152, and the MPU 152 has a ROM 153 and a RAM 154 built-in. In the following, the MPU 152, ROM 153 and RAM 154 provided in the voice lamp control device 92 will be described as the voice side MPU 152, the voice side ROM 153 and the voice side RAM 154.

The audio side ROM 153 is configured to use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory as read-only. The audio side ROM 153 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the audio side MPU 152. For example, various data table storage areas 153a, advance notice response effect operation valid period storage area 153b, and effect unit. It has an operation valid period storage area 153c, various effect unit movable period storage areas 153d, a command information storage area 153e, and the like.

The various data table storage areas 153a are areas in which light emission data, audio output data, a specific unit movable lottery table, and the like are stored. The notice response effect operation valid period storage area 153b is an area in which a period during which a response effect can be generated when a notice effect such as a conversation effect or a character effect is displayed on the display screen 80a is stored.
The effect unit operation valid period storage area 153c is an area in which the period during which the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, the third effect unit 330, and the specific unit 340 can be moved is stored. The various effect unit movable period storage areas 153d are areas in which one movable period (basic movable period) of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 is stored. The command information storage area 153e is an area in which command information referred to when generating various commands output from the voice side MPU 152 is stored.

The audio side RAM 154 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access. When compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the audio side ROM 153. Then, the voice side RAM 154 temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the voice side ROM 153 is executed. The audio side RAM 154 may store, for example, a command storage area 154a, a warning response effect operation valid period timer counter area 154b, an effect unit operation valid period timer counter area 154c, an effect unit movable period timer counter rear 154d, a holding data area 154e, and various flags. It has an area of 154f, various counter areas of 154g, and the like.

The command storage area 154a is an area for storing commands received from the main MPU 112. The advance notice response effect operation valid period timer counter area 154b is an area in which the advance notice response effect operation valid period timer counter in which the advance notice response effect operation valid period is set is stored. The effect unit operation valid period timer counter area 154c is an area in which the effect unit operation valid period timer counter in which the effect unit operation valid period is set is stored. The various effect unit movable period timer counter areas 154d are areas in which the first to third effect unit movable period timer counters in which one movable period of the first to third effect units 310 to 330 is set are stored. .. The retained data area 154e is data that is temporarily used to execute the effect and the notification during the game rotation and the open / close execution mode, and even after the effect and the notification are started, the voice side MPU 152 is used. It is an area for storing and holding data for making it available independently. The various flag storage areas 154f are areas in which the advance notice response effect operation valid period wait flag, the effect unit operation valid period wait flag, and the like are stored. The various counter areas 154g are areas in which a game count counter, a specific unit movable lottery counter, a notice response effect operation valid period standby timer counter, an effect unit operation valid period standby timer counter, and the like are stored.

Then, in the voice side MPU 152, based on various commands received from the main control device 91 (variation command, type command, fixed stop command, opening command, ending command, hold command, etc., which will be described later), the game times and open / close execution mode Determine the content of the production to be executed in the above. Then, the lamp control device 155 is controlled to control the light emission of the illumination unit 33, and the sound output device 156 is controlled to control the sound of the speaker unit 34 so that the operation corresponding to the determined content is performed. conduct.

A first frame button detection sensor 26a for detecting the operation of the first frame button 26 and a second frame button detection sensor 27a for detecting the operation of the second frame button 27 are electrically connected to the input side of the audio side MPU 152. ing. Then, the voice side MPU 152 monitors whether or not the first and second frame buttons 26 and 27 are operated, and when the first and second frame buttons 26 and 27 are operated, the processing corresponding to the operation is executed. do.

Further, the first drive unit 312c, the second drive unit 322c, the third drive unit 332c, and the specific drive unit 342c are electrically connected to the output side of the audio side MPU 152, and the operation of the first frame button 26 is performed. The first drive unit 312c, the second drive unit 322c, the third drive unit 332c, and the specific drive unit 342c are controlled based on the above. That is, based on the operation of the first frame button 26, the movement of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, the third effect unit 330, and the specific unit 340 is controlled.

Further, the voice side MPU 152 identifies whether or not it is necessary to perform notification based on the command received from the main control device 91, and performs light emission control of the lamp control device 155 and voice control of the voice output device 156. Notify.

The various commands output from the main MPU 112 will be described in detail later, but these various commands are output with reference to the command information storage area 113j of the main ROM 113. Further, various commands are configured as information on a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as information on the predetermined number of bytes. The command transmission from the main MPU 112 to the voice MPU 152 is basically performed serially, but may be configured to be performed in parallel.

Further, the audio side MPU 152 is electrically connected to the display control device 93, and transmits various commands including the content of the effect determined based on the command received from the main control device 91 to the display control device 93. For various commands output from the voice side MPU 152, the command information storage area 153e of the voice side ROM 153 is referred to. Further, the display control device 93 of the present embodiment is not configured to receive commands from the main control device 91 without going through the voice lamp control device 92, and the voice lamp control device is related to the main control device 91. It can be said that it exists on the downstream side in the communication direction from 92.

The display control device 93 includes a display control board 161, the display control board 161 has an MPU 162 mounted therein, and the MPU 162 has a program ROM 163 and a work RAM 164 built therein. Further, the display control board 161 contains a VDP (video display processor) 165, a character ROM 166, and a video RAM 167. In the following, the MPU 162 of the display control device 93 will be described as the display side MPU 162.

The program ROM 163 is configured to use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory as read-only. The program ROM 163 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the display side MPU 162. For example, a command information storage area 163a referred to when transmitting a command to the VDP 165, each effect. It has a data table storage area 163b in which processing necessary for displaying an image corresponding to (display) is defined.

The work RAM 164 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access as well as being capable of random access. When compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the program ROM 163. Then, the work RAM 164 temporarily stores various data, flags, and the like when the control program stored in the program ROM 163 is executed. The work RAM 164 has, for example, a command storage area 164a.

Then, the display side MPU 162 analyzes various commands received from the voice lamp control device 92, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 165 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 165). To carry out.

The VDP165 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 80. Since the VDP165 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 165 adjusts the timings of the display side MPU 162, the video RAM 167, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data from the character ROM 166 at a predetermined timing and stores it in the video RAM 167, so that the VDP 165 responds to the image data. The image is displayed on the symbol display device 80.

The character ROM 166 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 80. The character ROM 166 holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. Further, as a part of the above data, the character ROM 166 has image data to be displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Ds, the second reserved symbol display area Dt, and the execution reserved symbol display area Du of the symbol display device 80. The hold image data storage area 166a in which the image data is stored is set.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 166 and share the image data and the like in each character ROM 166. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 163 is stored in the character ROM 166.

The video RAM 167 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 80, and the display content of the symbol display device 80 is changed based on rewriting the content of the video RAM 167.

Further, the video RAM 167 has a reserved symbol display area 167a. Then, the reserved symbol display area 167a corresponds to the first to fourth display areas Ds1 to Ds4 of the first reserved symbol display area Ds in the symbol display device 80 on a one-to-one basis. Areas RE1 to RE4 are set. Further, the reserved symbol display area 167a corresponds to the first to fourth display areas Dt1 to Dt4 of the second reserved symbol display area Dt in the symbol display device 80 on a one-to-one basis. Areas RF1 to RF4 are set. Further, in the reserved symbol display area 167a, an execution unit area RG is set so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with the execution pending symbol display area Du in the symbol display device 80. Then, in each of the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds4, Dt1 to Dt4, and Du, images corresponding to the data written in the respective unit areas RE1 to RE4, RF1 to RF4, and RG in the reserved symbol display area 167a are displayed. NS. If no data is set in each unit area RE1 to RE4, RF1 to RF4, or RG (when data meaning a blank is set), the unit areas RE1 to RE4, RF1 to RF4, or RG are set. In each of the display areas Ds1 to Ds4, Dt1 to Dt4, and Du corresponding to the above, no image is displayed, or the background image on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80 is displayed.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that commands are exchanged between the voice side MPU 152 and the display side MPU 162 by bidirectional communication. Specifically, the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 are electrically connected by using the first signal line group 170, and the first signal line group 170 is used to display from the voice side MPU 152. A command is sent to the side MPU 162. This command transmission is performed by serial communication, and the first signal line group 170 identifies the signal line 171 for serial command data transmission and each unit data (for example, one bit of data) included in the command data. At least a signal line 172 for a clock signal for performing the above and a signal line 173 for a latch signal for recognizing at least one of a transmission start and a transmission end of one command are included. In addition, a signal line for an enable signal for recognizing the start of command transmission may be separately provided.

Further, the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 are electrically connected by using the second signal line group 180, and the display side MPU 162 is connected to the voice side MPU 152 by using the second signal line group 180. The command is sent to. Since this command transmission is performed by serial communication, the second signal line group 180 includes a signal line 181 for serial command data transmission and each unit data (for example, one bit of data) included in the command data. At least a signal line 182 for a clock signal for identification and a signal line 182 for a latch signal for recognizing at least one of a transmission start and a transmission end of one command are included. In addition, a signal line for an enable signal for recognizing the start of command transmission may be separately provided.

The first signal line group 170 and the second signal line group 180 are provided as one connection unit. The connection unit includes a connector in which one end of the first signal line group 170 and the second signal line group 180 is aggregated, and a connector in which the other end is aggregated, and one connector is an audio lamp control device. It is detachably attached to the connector of 92, and the other connector is detachably attached to the connector of the display control device 93.

The communication method between the voice side MPU 152 and the display side MPU 162 is not limited to serial communication, and may be parallel communication. Further, the first signal line group 170 and the second signal line group 180 may be provided as separate connection units.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery on the main MPU 112>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery on the main MPU 112 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning / failing lottery and the like.

At the time of the game, the main MPU 112 uses various counter information to perform a winning lottery, a setting of the display of the main display unit 71, a setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 80, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, the hit random number counter C1 used for the winning lottery, the hit type counter C2 used for determining the winning type, and the reach when the symbol display device 80 disengages and fluctuates. The reach random number counter C3 used for the generation lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, and the variation type counter CS for determining the variation display time in the main display unit 71 and the symbol display device 80. , The electric accessory open random number counter C4 used for lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 63 is in the electric accessory open state, and the random number initial value counter CINI2 used for setting the initial value of the electric accessory open random number counter C4. Is used.
A part of each counter is updated at intervals of 4 msec, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20) described later, and the remaining counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 19) described later. The updated value is sequentially stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a of the main RAM 114. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 54 or the second start port 55, a predetermined numerical value stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a is sequentially stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b in the main RAM 114. , A predetermined numerical value stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 114c in the main RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 57. The counters C1 to C3, CINI1, CS, CINI2, and C4 are provided in various other counter areas 114m of the main RAM 114.

Here, the configuration of the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b and the normal symbol holding ball storage area 114c will be described.

The special symbol holding ball storage area 114b includes the first special symbol holding ball storage area area RA having the first to fourth holding areas RA1 to RA4 and the first special symbol holding number storage area NA, and the first to fourth holding areas. It has a second special symbol holding ball storage area RB having RB1 to RB4 and a second special symbol holding number storage area NB, a total holding number storage area NX, and one execution area RC. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a configuration of a first holding area RA1 in the first special symbol holding ball storage area RA. The configurations of the second to fourth reserved areas RA2 to RA4 in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area RA, the first to fourth reserved areas RB1 to RB4 in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area RB, and the execution area RC are , The same as in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 16, the first to fourth reserved areas RA1 to RA4, RB1 to RB4, and the execution area RC include a hit random number counter storage area 201, a hit type counter storage area 202, a reach random number counter storage area 203, and an execution area RC. It has a winning start opening storage area 204. Then, in the first to fourth reserved areas RA1 to RA4 in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area RA, the winning random number counter C1 and the winning type counter C2 are set according to the winning history of the game ball to the first starting port 54. , And each value of the reach random number counter C3 (each value of the lottery counter buffer 114a) is stored in the hit random number counter storage area 201, the hit type counter storage area 202, and the reach random number counter storage area 203, and the first start port. The winning information for 54 is stored in the winning start opening storage area 204. Then, when the winning of the game ball is continuously generated for the first starting port 54, each of them is in the order of the first holding area RA1 → the second holding area RA2 → the third holding area RA3 → the fourth holding area RA4. Numerical information etc. are stored in chronological order. As described above, since the first special symbol holding ball storage area RA is provided with the four holding areas RA1 to RA4, the winning history of the game balls to the first starting port 54 can be stored up to a maximum of four as a whole. (Hold memory).

Similarly, in the first to fourth holding areas RB1 to RB4 in the second special symbol holding ball storage area RB, the winning random number counter C1 and the hit type counter are set in accordance with the winning history of the game ball to the second starting port 55. Each value of C2 and reach random number counter C3 (each value of the lottery counter buffer 114a) is stored in the hit random number counter storage area 201, the hit type counter storage area 202, and the reach random number counter storage area 203, and the second start is performed. The winning information for the mouth 55 is stored in the winning start opening storage area 204. Then, when the winning of the game ball is continuously generated for the second starting port 55, each of them is in the order of the first holding area RB1 → the second holding area RB2 → the third holding area RB3 → the fourth holding area RB4. Numerical information etc. are stored in chronological order. As described above, since the second special symbol holding ball storage area RB is provided with the four holding areas RB1 to RB4, the winning history of the game balls to the second starting port 55 can be stored up to a maximum of four as a whole. (Hold memory).

That is, in the pachinko machine 10, up to 4 winning histories of the game balls to the 1st starting port 54 and the 2nd starting port 55 are stored, so that up to 8 of them are stored on hold as a whole. In addition, when the number of reserved balls for the winning start port is the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) or more, each counter value or the like is not acquired and the prize balls (3 game balls in this embodiment) are not acquired. ) Is treated as an invalid ball paid out to the player. In the present embodiment, the total number of items that can be stored on hold is set to 8, but the total number of items that can be stored on hold is not limited to 8, and is arbitrary, such as 4, 6, or. There may be other plurals such as 9 or more. Further, the number that can be stored and stored may be different between the first starting port 54 and the second starting port 55.

When the execution area RC starts the variable display of the main display unit 71 (first result display unit 71a or second result display unit 71b), each value stored in the first reserved area RA1 or the first reserved area RB1. This is an area for moving the player, and at the start of one game round, a hit / fail judgment or the like is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area RC.

In addition, the first special symbol holding number storage area NA provided in the first special symbol holding ball storage area RA is the holding number of the first lottery game (holding the variable display triggered by the winning of the first starting port 54). It is an area to store the number). Similarly, the second special symbol holding number storage area NB provided in the second special symbol holding ball storage area RB has a variable display of the number of holdings of the second lottery game (a variation display triggered by winning a prize in the second starting port 55). This is an area for storing the number of held items). The total reserved number storage area NX is a storage area for storing the sum number (total reserved number) of the first special symbol reserved number storage area NA and the second special symbol reserved number storage area NB.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 114c is the value of the electric accessory open random number counter C4 (value stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a) according to the winning (passing) history of the game ball to the normal symbol start gate 57. Is a hold area for storing in chronological order.

As shown in FIG. 15, the normal symbol hold ball storage area 114c is composed of four storage areas of the first to fourth hold areas RD1 to RD4, an execution area RD5, and a hold number storage area NC. Then, up to four winning histories of the game ball to the normal symbol start gate 57 are stored (reserved storage) by the four storage areas of the first to fourth reserved areas RD1 to RD4.

Specifically, when winning a prize to the normal symbol start gate 57 occurs continuously, the electric accessory is opened in the order of the first holding area RD1 → the second holding area RD2 → the third holding area RD3 → the fourth holding area RD4. The value of the random number counter C4 is stored in chronological order. By providing the four areas in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the normal symbol start gate 57 can be stored.

The execution area RD5 is an area for moving the numerical value stored in the first hold area RD1. Then, when the open lottery of the electric accessory 63 is performed, a winning / failing determination or the like is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area RD5.

Even in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 114c, the number that can be held and stored is not limited to 4, but is arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as 2, 3, or 5 or more. It may be singular or singular.

Returning to the explanation of the counter, various counters will be described in detail.

The hit random number counter C1 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. Then, especially when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and counting is started again from the initial value. The random number initial value counter CINI1 is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b of the main RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 54 or the second start port 55.

The value of the random number that wins the winning lottery (winning / failing lottery) is stored as a special symbol winning / failing table (winning / failing information group in the given information) in the special symbol winning / failing table storage area 113a as the winning / failing information group storage means in the main ROM 113. There is. Here, the contents of the special symbol winning / failing table storage area 113a will be described with reference to FIG. 17A and 17B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the special symbol winning / failing table in the present embodiment, FIG. 17A shows a special symbol winning / failing table for the low probability mode, and FIG. 17B shows a special symbol winning / failing table for the high probability mode. Shows the table.

As shown in FIG. 17, the special symbol winning / failing table includes the special symbol winning / failing table (low-probability winning / failing information group) for the low-probability mode of FIG. 17 (a) and the high-probability mode of FIG. 17 (b). The special symbol winning / failing table (high-probability winning / failing information group) is set. That is, in the present embodiment, a low probability mode (low probability corresponding state) and a high probability mode (high probability corresponding state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning lottery.

In the present embodiment, under the gaming state in which the special symbol winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the winning lottery, as shown in FIG. 17A, the value of the random number winning the winning lottery ( That is, the number of winning information) is two. On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the special symbol winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the winning lottery, as shown in FIG. 17B, the value of the random number that wins the winning lottery (that is, winning). Information) is said to be 21 pieces. Further, in the present embodiment, the value group (7, 307) of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the winning lottery in the low probability mode is the winning random number counter that wins the winning lottery in the high probability mode. It is included in the value group of C1. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

The hit type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. The hit type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b of the main RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 54 or the second start port 55.

The distribution destination of the game result with respect to the hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group in the given information) in the distribution table storage area 113b as the distribution information group storage means in the main ROM 113. 18A and 18B are diagrams for explaining a distribution table, in which FIG. 18A is a distribution table for the first result display unit (first distribution information group), and FIG. 18B is for the second result display unit. It is a distribution table (second distribution information group). The distribution table for the first result display unit is a table that is referred to when a distribution lottery is performed for the reserved information acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 54. The distribution table for the second result display unit is a table that is referred to when a distribution lottery is performed for the reserved information acquired based on the winning of the second starting port 55.

In the distribution table for the first result display unit, as shown in FIG. 18 (a), as the distribution destination of the game result, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" Corresponds to the 16R probability variation hit result, "10 to 23" corresponds to the 4R probability variation hit result, and "24 to 29" corresponds to the 16R normal hit result.

On the other hand, in the distribution table for the second result display unit, as shown in FIG. 18B, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0" is used as the distribution destination of the game result. "~ 23" corresponds to the 16R probability variation hit result, and "24 to 29" corresponds to the 16R normal hit result.

Here, the probability variation hit result in the present embodiment is a hit result in which the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the normal winning result is a winning result in which the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the low probability mode (maintained) and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. However, the high-frequency support mode in the normal hit result ends when the number of games reaches the end reference number (100 times in this embodiment) after the transition, and the mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode.

As will be described in detail later, the high-frequency support mode is a mode in which the electric accessory 63 is easy to open, and the low-frequency support mode is a mode in which the electric accessory 63 is difficult to open.

In the control of the variable winning device 56 in the open / close execution mode, a round game is executed up to a predetermined number of times. In addition, the round game is a condition that either a predetermined opening duration (opening duration) elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the large winning opening 56a. It is a game that continues until it is satisfied. For example, the opening duration is set to 30 sec, and the upper limit is set to 10.

In the present embodiment, in the situation where the operation handle 31 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 44 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec. Then, in each round game, the opening duration is set to be longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game balls and the maximum number of winning balls in one round game. Therefore, in each round game, it is expected that the maximum number of prizes in one round game will be awarded to the large winning opening 56a.

Here, to explain the various hit results described with reference to FIG. 18, the “4R probability variation hit result” is a game result in which the large winning opening 56a is opened four times, and the “16R probability variation hit result and 16R normal hit result”. Is the result of the game in which the large winning opening 56a is opened 16 times.

Then, as described above, in the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the game result when the winning lottery is won is the case where the winning lottery is won with the winning of the first starting port 54 as an opportunity. It is different from the case where the lottery is won by winning the prize in the second starting port 55. Specifically, the probability of winning a 16R probability variation when winning the first starting port 54 is lower than the probability of winning a 16R probability variation when winning the second starting port 55. The 16R probability variation hit result can be said to be the most advantageous hit result because the large winning opening 56a is opened 16 times in a long-time mode. That is, the probability that the player can get a large number of balls is higher when the player wins the prize when the second starting port 55 is won.

In addition, the "high probability mode" refers to a state in which the probability of winning a subsequent winning lottery is increased as an added value after the end of winning, that is, during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, open / close execution mode (open / close execution mode). It is a state of the game that is easy to shift to the privilege game). The high-probability mode (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state (high-frequency support mode) in which the winning probability of a normal symbol is also increased and the game ball is likely to win a prize at the second starting port 55. The "low probability mode" refers to a case where the mode is not high probability mode (when the probability change is not in progress), and means a state in which the probability of winning the winning lottery is normal, that is, a state in which the probability of winning the winning lottery is lower than in the case of the probability change. ..

Further, as a support mode in the electric accessory 63, the electric accessory 63 is in an open state per unit time when compared in a situation where the firing of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the game area. A high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support mode or high-frequency guide mode) and a low-frequency support mode (low-frequency support mode or low-frequency guide mode) are set so that the frequency is relatively high or low.

Specifically, the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric accessory open state in the electric accessory open lottery using the electric accessory open random number counter C4, and the high-frequency support is provided. The mode has a higher probability of winning the electric accessory open state than the low frequency support mode. In addition, when the electric accessory open state is won, the electric accessory 63 is opened more often in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode when the electric accessory release state is won. It is set, and one opening time is set longer. In this case, the electric accessory is in the open state in the high frequency support mode, and when the electric accessory 63 is opened a plurality of times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set shorter than the one-time opening time.

Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the game balls are easily won in the second starting port 55, and the game balls are paid out in a predetermined number by winning the game balls in the second starting port 55. In the frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of balls held so much.

The configuration for increasing the frequency with which the high-frequency support mode is opened to the electric accessory per unit time is higher than that of the low-frequency support mode. The probability of winning the electric accessory open state in the lottery may be equalized, and the number of times of opening and the opening time may be appropriately set, and can be changed as appropriate.

The reach random number counter C3 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 238, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b of the main RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 54 or the second start port 55. Then, it is used to determine whether or not to generate reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area 113c of the main ROM 113. However, in the game round that shifts to the open / close execution mode, the main MPU 112 determines the reach generation regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is the same in each game state in the present embodiment, but may be set individually according to the game state. For example, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display may be set to be larger than that in the low-frequency support mode.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, reach display is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 80. The reach display includes a symbol display device 80 capable of variable display (or variable display) of a symbol (picture), and is a stop display result after the variable display in the game times in which the variable winning device 56 is in the open / close execution mode. In a gaming machine in which is a special display result, a variation that tends to be a special display result before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 80 is started. It is a display state for making the player think that it is a display state.

Specifically, the reach display is a hit (open / close execution mode) by stopping and displaying some of the symbols among the plurality of symbols displayed on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. It is a display state in which the combination of the main symbols (reach symbols) that may have a winning symbol combination corresponding to (shift to) is displayed, and in that state, the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. be.

More specifically, as a pre-stage for ending the variable display of the symbol, a combination of hit symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode is established on the preset effective line in the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of main symbols (reach symbols) that may be formed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed by the final stop symbol sequence. ..

More specifically with reference to FIG. 6, in the pachinko machine 10, the pattern variation display is first completed in the upper symbol sequence Z1, and then the symbol variation display is completed in the lower symbol sequence Z3. In, the same number on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, or the main symbol with the number "3" in the upper symbol row Z1 of the effective line L2 and the number "1" in the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and displayed. By doing so, a reach line is formed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variation display of the symbols is performed in the symbol row Z2 (final stop symbol row) in the middle row, so that the reach display is obtained. Then, when the open / close execution mode occurs, the main symbol having the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed. The fluctuation display of is finished.

Further, in the reach display, in the state where the combination of the reach symbols is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol strings are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to reach the reach. Includes those that perform an effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen 80a after reducing or hiding the combination of reach symbols.

The variation type counter CS has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 198, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The variation type counter CS has a variation display time (display duration) in the main display unit 71 (first result display unit 71a or second result display unit 71b) and a symbol variation display time (display duration) in the symbol display device 80. ) Is used to determine in the main MPU 112. The variation type counter CS is periodically updated, and a value is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of the variation display on the main display unit 71 and at the start of the symbol variation by the symbol display device 80. Then, when determining the variable display time, the variable display time table (variable display time information group) stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area 113d as the variable display information group storage means in the main ROM 113 is referred to. ..

The electric accessory open random number counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. Then, when the electric accessory open random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the electric accessory open random number counter C4, and the count is counted again from the initial value. It will be started. The random number initial value counter CINI2 is a loop counter similar to the electric accessory open random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250). The electric accessory open random number counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 114c of the main RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 57.

The value of the random number that wins the normal symbol is stored as the normal symbol win / fail table (win / fail information group) in the normal symbol win / fail table storage area 113f as the win / loss information group storage means in the main ROM 113. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the number of random number values for winning a normal symbol is 24 in the low probability mode, and the range is "5 to 28". Further, in the high probability mode, it is set to 200, and the range is "5 to 204". That is, in the low probability mode, when the value of the acquired electric accessory release random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be a winner, and in the high probability mode, the acquired electric accessory release random number counter. If the value of C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined to be a winner. Then, a predetermined lighting state is indicated on the other display unit 71d of the main display unit 71, and the electric accessory 63 is opened.

<About various processes executed by MPU 112 of the main control board 111>
Next, the main process executed by the main MPU 112 after the power is turned on to the main control device 91 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the main process, which is activated by a reset when the power is turned on.

First, the power-on wait process is executed (S101). In the power-on wait process, the wait process (for example, peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 92, the display control device 93, and the payout control device 100) is waited for the sub-side control devices (voice lamp control device 92, display control device 93, payout control device 100, and the like) to become operable. 1 sec) is executed, and the process waits without proceeding to the next process. Then, after the power-on wait processing period has elapsed, the access of the main RAM 114 is permitted (S102), and the internal function register of the main MPU 112 is set (S103).

After that, when it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 103 provided in the power supply and firing control device 101 is manually operated (S104), and when it is determined that the RAM erasing switch 103 is not manually operated (S104: NO). , It is determined whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 114 (S105). Then, when it is determined that "1" is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 114 (S105: YES), the checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum is executed (S106), and the checksum is used as the power supply. It is determined whether or not the checksum is the same as the checksum saved at the time of blocking, that is, whether or not the stored data is normal (S107).

Then, when it is determined that the checksum is normal (S107: YES), the power-on setting process is executed (S109). In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 114 such as the initialization of the power failure flag is set to the initial value, and the current gaming state (the state before the power-off is normal if the power-off is normal). A command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 92 in order to recognize. In addition, a payout initialization command indicating that the payout side RAM 124 should be initialized is transmitted to the payout side MPU 122. Furthermore, interrupt enable is set to allow the occurrence of timer interrupt processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch is turned on (S104: YES), when it is determined that "1" is not set in the power failure flag (S105: NO), or when it is determined that the checksum is not normal. In the case (S107: NO), after clearing the main RAM 114 as the initialization of the main RAM 114 (S108), the power-on setting process in step 109 is performed.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, at the start of business of the game hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 103. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 103 is pressed, the process proceeds to the process of S108. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when an abnormality of the data stored and retained by the checksum is confirmed, the process proceeds to the above step 108 in the same manner.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch 103 is not pressed, the step 108 is not executed on condition that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. Execute 109. That is, if the power off is normal and the checksum is normal, a command for returning to the gaming state of power off is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 92.

After that, the process proceeds to the following residual processing. That is, the main MPU 112 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20) described later, but a residual time is generated between a certain timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. This residual time will fluctuate according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but the following residual processing is repeatedly executed using this irregular time. That is, it can be said that the following residual processing is irregular processing that is executed irregularly.

In the residual processing, first, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (S110). Subsequently, the random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counters CINI1 and CINI2 is executed (S111), and the variation counter update process for updating the variation type counter CS is executed (S112). In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 114, a process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, the interrupt enable setting for switching from the state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to the state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is permitted is set (S113). Then, when the process of step 113 is executed, the process returns to step 110, and after the timer interrupt process is completed, the process of steps 110 to 113 is executed.

Here, as described above, in the residual processing, only the random number initial value update processing and the fluctuation counter update processing are set so as to be sandwiched between the interrupt prohibition processing and the interrupt enable processing, so that the timer interrupt processing is performed. Is always started immediately before step 110. Then, after the timer interrupt processing is completed, it is always sufficient to start from step 110, and the return address after the timer interrupt processing becomes unique. Therefore, it is not necessary to store the current return address at the start of the timer interrupt processing, and the processing load at the start of the timer interrupt processing is reduced.

Further, since the timer interrupt processing does not occur during the operation of the predetermined data in the main MPU 112, the main data stored in the register of the main MPU 112 at that time is stored at the start of the timer interrupt processing. It is not necessary to execute the save process to the side RAM 114, and similarly, it is not necessary to execute the data return process to the register of the main MPU 112 at the end of the timer interrupt process. Therefore, the processing load at the start of the timer interrupt processing is reduced, and the processing load at the end of the timer interrupt processing is also reduced.

Further, since the timer interrupt processing is not started during the update of the random number initial value counters CINI1 and CINI2 or the update of the variation type counter CS, the timer interrupt processing is performed even though these are being updated. It is possible to prevent the numerical information of the counter from being acquired and further update processing from being executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, a timer interrupt process executed by the main MPU 112 on a regular basis (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec) will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing.

First, a hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing on the main MPU 112 will be described. The main control board 111 is provided with a clock circuit (not shown) as a pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined cycle, and is further present at an intermediate position of a signal path between the clock circuit and the main MPU 112. A frequency dividing circuit (not shown) is provided.

The frequency dividing circuit functions as a frequency changing means for changing the cycle of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for specifying the start timing of the timer interrupt processing by the main MPU 112. .. That is, the pulse signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the main MPU 112 at intervals of 4 msec, which is a specific period. The main MPU 112 executes a process of confirming the occurrence of a specific signal form such as rising or falling of this pulse signal, and activates timer interrupt processing on the condition that the occurrence of a specific signal form is confirmed as at least one condition. And execute.

In this case, if the occurrence of the above specific signal form is confirmed in a situation where the activation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer is changed from the state in which the interrupt is prohibited to the state in which the interrupt is permitted. Interrupt processing is started. That is, depending on the processing execution status of the main MPU 112, the next timer interrupt processing may be started after 4.1 msec has elapsed from the start of the previous timer interrupt processing, and when such an event occurs, the next timer interrupt processing may be started. The next timer interrupt processing will be started after 3.9 msec has elapsed from the start of the immediately preceding timer interrupt processing.

However, since the output of the pulse signal from the frequency divider circuit is performed in a specific cycle such as 4 msec regardless of the progress of the process in the main MPU 112, the timer interrupt process is basically started in the specific cycle. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the main MPU 112 is next to the predetermined timing even if the timer interrupt processing at the predetermined timing is started after a period exceeding a specific cycle has elapsed since the previous timer interrupt processing was started. The timer interrupt processing at the timing of 1 is set so that the portion exceeding the specific cycle is absorbed, and the timer interrupt processing at the next timing is started at the timing when the input of the pulse signal is confirmed. The above is the hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing on the main MPU 112.

The main MPU 112 first executes the power failure information storage process (S201). In this power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board 117, and if the occurrence of a power failure is identified, a predetermined power failure time process is executed.

Next, the lottery random number update process is executed (S202). In the lottery random number update process, the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory open random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information was sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory open random number counter C4, and the read numerical information was added by 1 to each of them. Later, a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively.

After that, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step 111 in the main process (FIG. 19) (S203), and the fluctuation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step 112 in the main process (FIG. 19) (S203). S204). Next, the game stop determination process is executed (S205). In the game stop determination process, it is monitored whether or not the progress of the game should be stopped, and if the situation should stop the progress of the game, the execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped.

Specifically, various sensors (other detection sensors 115 in FIG. 12) such as a magnet detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor, and a vibration detection sensor are provided on the front side of the gaming machine main body 12. Then, the main MPU 112 determines whether or not the act of bringing the magnet closer to the game board 43 is performed based on the detection result of the magnet detection sensor by the fraud detection process (S212) described later, and detects the radio wave. It is determined whether or not an illegal radio wave is output to the pachinko machine 10 based on the detection result of the sensor, and an illegal vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10 based on the detection result of the vibration detection sensor. Judge whether or not there is. If an affirmative determination is made by any of these fraud determinations, it is assumed that a specific event corresponding to the fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 10 has occurred, and the execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped.

After that, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped (S206), and if it is determined that the progress of the game is stopped (S206: YES), the notification command is output. Process is executed (S207). In the output processing of the notification command, the notification command is set as the output target when any specific event has occurred and the notification command has not yet been output in response to the occurrence of the specific event.

Since the notification command includes the content of the specific event that triggered the output, when the voice lamp control device 92 receives the notification command, the execution setting of the notification corresponding to the content of the specific event is performed. In addition, the state in which the progress of the game is stopped and the corresponding notification are restarted when the power is turned on only by stopping the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 112, and the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 112 is supplied. By starting the supply of operating power while manually operating the RAM erasing switch 103 provided in the power supply and the firing control device 101 after stopping, the main RAM 114 is not executed when the initialization of the main RAM 114 is executed. Become.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the progress of the game is not stopped (S206: NO), the port output process is executed (S208). In the port output processing, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt processing, the output processing corresponding to the output information is executed. For example, when the information for switching the large winning opening 56a to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 56d is started, and when the information for switching to the closed state is set, the output is started. The output of the drive signal is stopped. Further, when the information for switching the electric accessory 63 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory drive unit 63a is started, and when the information for switching to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. Further, the command set as the output target in each process is output to the voice lamp control device 92 and the payout control device 100.

Next, the reading process is executed (S209). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

Subsequently, it is received from the winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a that detect the winning of the general winning opening 53, the variable winning device 56, the first starting opening 54, the second starting opening 55, and the normal symbol starting gate 57. The signal is read, and the winning detection process for specifying whether or not the general winning opening 53, the variable winning device 56, the first starting opening 54, the second starting opening 55, and the normal symbol starting gate 57 has been won is executed (S210). ).

After that, a timer update process for updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 114 is executed (S211). In this case, the timer counters whose stored numerical information is subtracted and updated are aggregated and handled, but both the subtraction type timer counter update and the addition type timer counter update are aggregated. It may be configured.

Subsequently, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred is executed (S212). In this fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and if a fraud determination is performed to determine whether or not a predetermined event has occurred and an affirmative determination is made, the game is played in step 205 in the next timer interrupt process. Make settings for stopping. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step 206. As described in step 205, the predetermined event is whether or not the act of bringing the magnet close to the game board 43 is performed, and the illegal radio wave is not output to the pachinko machine 10. Whether or not, whether or not an illegal vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10 and the like.

Next, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed (S213). In the launch control process, one game ball is launched every 0.6 sec, which is a predetermined launch cycle, in a situation where the launch operation is continued with respect to the operation handle 31. Then, based on the information read in the reading process of step 209, input for confirming the disconnection of each of the winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a, confirming the opening of the gaming machine main body 12, the front door frame 14, and the like. A state monitoring process is performed (S214). In this case, in the input state monitoring process, when the disconnection of each of the winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a is confirmed, or when the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 is confirmed, the notification is given in the same manner as in step 207. Executes command output processing. In the output processing of the notification command, a notification command indicating that the winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a are disconnected and a notification command indicating that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state are transmitted. Send. Further, in the input state monitoring process, based on the signal received from the payout control device 100, it is determined whether or not the lower plate 30 is full, and whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the payout device 99. If a positive judgment is made in these judgments, the corresponding notification command is set as the output target.

Next, the special figure special electric control process for performing the execution control of the game times (variable display times) and the execution control of the opening / closing execution mode is executed (S215), and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 63 is performed. The general electric control process is executed (S216). The special figure special electric control process in step 215 and the normal figure general electric control process in step 216 will be specifically described later.

Subsequently, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps 215 and 216, the number of reserved information (first and second special symbol reserved number storage areas NA, NB) for winning the first and second starting ports 55 is increased or decreased. , And display control processing (setting of output information) for reflecting the increase / decrease number of hold information (hold number storage area NC) for winning a prize at the normal symbol start gate 57 on the main display unit 71 (other display unit 71d). (S217). Further, when shifting to the open / close execution mode, the number of times the variable winning device 56 in the open / close execution mode is opened is reflected in the round display unit 71c based on the round setting process (FIG. 29) described later. Display control processing (setting of output information) is performed. Further, when the open / close execution mode ends, display control processing (setting of output information) for erasing (turning off) the display of the round display unit 71c is performed.

Next, in a situation where neither the game times nor the open / close execution mode is executed, the demo display process for making the display content of the symbol display device 80 for the standby display is executed (S218). The demo display process will be described in detail later.

Then, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout side MPU 122 are confirmed, and the payout state reception process for performing the process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed (S219). In addition, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (S220).

Next, in order to switch the state of the signal output to the external output terminal board 104 so as to control the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time. The external information setting process is executed (S221).

After finishing the external processing information setting processing in step 221 or the output processing of the notification command in step 207, the interrupt end declaration setting is executed (S222). In the main MPU 112, once the timer interrupt processing is started, it is stipulated that the interrupt end declaration is set as one of the conditions for starting the next timer interrupt processing, and in step 222, the next Set the interrupt end declaration to enable the execution of timer interrupt processing. Next, the interrupt permission is set (S223). Once the timer interrupt processing is started, the main MPU 112 is set to the interrupt disabled state. Therefore, in step 223, interrupt permission is set in order to enable execution of the next timer interrupt processing. After that, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, the special figure special electric control process of step 215 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20) will be described with reference to FIG. 21. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the special figure special electric control process.

In the special figure special electric control process, a process for acquiring hold information is executed when a prize is generated in the first start port 54 or the second start port 55, and when the hold information is stored. A pass / fail judgment is made for the held information, and a process for performing a game rounding effect is executed with the hit / fail judgment as an opportunity. In addition, based on the result of the hit / fail determination, the process of shifting to the open / close execution mode after the effect for the game round is executed, and the process during the open / close execution mode and at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed.

Specifically, first, the pending information acquisition process is executed (S301). Here, the process of acquiring the pending information will be described with reference to FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring the pending information.

The process of acquiring the hold information determines whether or not the game ball has won the first start port 54 or the second start port 55, and if the game ball has won the first start port 54 or the second start port 55, the game ball has won a prize. This is a process of storing each of the acquired counter values in the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b up to the maximum number of holdings (up to 4 in each of the first starting port 54 and the second starting port 55, and a maximum of 8 in total). Further, when each counter value acquired based on the winning is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b, the winning / failing judgment result, the selected fluctuation pattern, etc. are predicted in advance based on each stored counter value. It is a process to do.

First, whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 54 is determined based on the detection information of the winning detection sensor 54a (S401). Then, when it is determined that the game ball has won the first start opening 54 (there was a start prize) (S401: YES), the value of the hold number Na stored in the first special symbol hold number storage area NA is read out. It is determined whether or not the acquired number of pending Na is less than 4 (S402). That is, it is determined whether the number of holdings for the first starting port 54 is less than 4, which is the upper limit value of the number of holdings (that is, whether the number of holdings is stored up to the upper limit).

Then, when it is determined that the acquired number of reserved numbers Na is less than 4 (S402: YES), the number of reserved numbers Na of the first special symbol reserved number storage area NA is added by 1, and the total number of reserved numbers storage area NX. The total number of reservations Nx is read, and the total number of reservations Nx is added by 1 (S403). On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired number of pending Na is 4 (S402: NO), the acquisition process of the present pending information is terminated as it is.

After the processing of step 403 is completed, each numerical information (special information) of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step 202 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20), the first start. Information that the winning of the mouth 54 is a trigger is stored in the holding area corresponding to the holding number Na added by 1 in step 403 of the first special symbol holding ball storage area RA (S404).

After that, the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 are made to recognize that the first start port 54 has won a prize, and the hold command setting process, which is a process for executing the hold notification, is executed (S405). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not won the first starting port 54 (S401: NO), the winning detection sensor 55a determines whether or not the game ball has won the second starting port 55 (starting winning). Judgment is made based on the detection information of (S406). Then, when it is determined that the game ball has won the second starting port 55 (there was a starting prize) (S406: YES), the same processing as in steps 402 to 405 is performed (S407 to S410). On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not won the second starting port 55 (S406: NO), the acquisition process of the present hold information is terminated as it is.

The processing of steps 407 to 410 differs from the processing of steps 402 to 405 only in the processing for winning the second starting port 55, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. In step 407, the value of the reserved number Nb stored in the second special symbol reserved number storage area NB is read and determined, and in step 408, the reserved number Nb of the second special symbol reserved number storage area NB is added by 1 and totaled. The total number of holds Nx in the hold number storage area NX is added by 1, and in step 409, the numerical information (special information) of each counter C1 to C3 and the information that a prize is given to the second starting port 55 are obtained. , The second special symbol holding ball storage area RB is stored in the holding area corresponding to the holding number Nb added by 1 in step 408.

The above is the process of acquiring the pending information. Returning to the explanation of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 21), after executing the hold information acquisition process in step 301, the special figure special electric counter information is input from the special figure special electric counter area 114d provided in the main RAM 114. The read process is executed (S302). Further, the process of reading the special figure special electric address table from the special figure special electric address table storage area 113g of the main ROM 113 is executed (S303), and the start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special electric counter is acquired from the special figure special electric address table. The process is executed (S304).

As described above, the special figure special electric control process includes the process related to the effect for the game round and the process related to the open / close execution mode. In this case, as the processing related to the effect for the game round, the special figure variation start process (S307), which is the process for starting the effect for the game round, and the process for advancing the effect for the game round. The figure-changing process (S308) and the special figure-determining process (S309), which is a process for ending the effect for the game round, are set. Further, as the processes related to the open / close execution mode, the special electric start process (S310), which is a process for controlling the opening of the open / close execution mode, and the special electric open, which is a process for controlling the open state of the large winning opening 56a, are being performed. Controls the process (S311), the special electric closing process (S312), which is a process for controlling the closed state of the large winning opening 56a, the ending of the open / close execution mode, and the transition of the game state at the end of the open / close execution mode. The special electric power termination process (S313), which is a process for performing the operation, is set.

In such a processing configuration, the special figure special electric counter is a counter for the main MPU 112 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing should be executed. The start address in the program for executing the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing is set corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter.

Explaining the special figure special electric address table with reference to FIG. 23, the special figure special electric counter can set numerical information of "0" to "6", and the special figure special electric address table has the special figure special electric counter. Information on the start address (“SA0” to “SA6”) is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information. In this case, the start address SA0 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure variation start process, the start address SA1 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure variation start process, and the start address SA2 Is the start address of the program for executing the special figure determination processing, the start address SA3 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric start processing, and the start address SA4 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric open processing. The start address SA5 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric closing processing, and the start address SA6 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric end processing. ..

The special figure special electric counter controls the special figure special electric power in the next processing time when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the numerical information currently stored is completed. 1 addition, 1 subtraction, or "0" is cleared (initialized) according to the process executed in the process. Therefore, in the special figure special electric control process at each processing time, it is sufficient to execute the process according to the numerical information set in the special figure special electric counter.

According to the above configuration, it is possible for the main MPU 112 to grasp which process should be executed as the special figure special electric control without checking the presence or absence of various flags. For example, the effect for game times is started when the effects for other game times are not executed and the open / close execution mode is not executed. However, if each state is to be determined by the presence or absence of the flag, the game times In the process related to the effect for the game, before starting the effect for the game, it is confirmed whether or not the flag indicating that the effect for the game is being executed is set, and the open / close execution mode is being executed. It becomes necessary to confirm whether or not the flag indicating that the above is set. In addition, during the execution of the effect for the game round, it is confirmed whether or not the flag indicating that the effect for the game round is being executed is set, and the flag indicating that the confirmation display is being performed is set. It will be necessary to confirm whether or not it is.

Further, the open / close execution mode is started when the effect for the game round is finished and the other open / close execution modes are not executed. However, if each state is to be determined by the presence or absence of the flag, the open / close execution mode is related. In the process, before starting the open / close execution mode, it is confirmed whether or not the flag indicating that the effect for the game round is completed is set, and the flag indicating that the open / close execution mode is being executed is set. It is necessary to confirm whether or not it has been set, and if it is being opened, it is necessary to confirm whether or not a flag indicating that it is being opened is set. In addition, after the opening, it is confirmed whether or not the flag indicating that the open / close execution mode is being executed is set, and whether or not the flag indicating that the large winning opening 56a is being opened is set. It will be necessary to confirm whether or not.
Furthermore, when the ending is in progress, it is necessary to confirm whether or not the flag indicating that the ending is in progress is set.

On the other hand, if the special figure special electric counter is used, it is not necessary to prepare various flags, and information for confirming the execution timing of each process is also collected. Therefore, the processing can be simplified.

Below, using the special figure special electric counter and the special figure special electric address table, the special figure fluctuation start processing (S307), the special figure fluctuation processing (S308), the special figure finalizing processing (S309), and the special electric power start processing (S310). ), The special electric power opening process (S311), the special electric power closing process (S312), and the special electric power ending process (S313) will be described.

First, after acquiring the start address of step 304, the setting process for the zero flag is executed (S305). In the zero flag setting process, the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter (16-bit timer counter) is read from the special figure special electric timer counter area 114e provided in the main RAM 114, and the value of the zero flag is read based on the read numerical information. To set. Specifically, when the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", "1" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0". If it is not "0", "0" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112. For example, when the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is not "0" and the zero flag is "1", the zero flag is changed from "1" to "0". The special figure special electric timer counter is a counter used for specifying the update timing of the special figure special electric counter according to the passage of time by the main MPU 112, and is the timer in step 211 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20). Numerical information is subtracted in the update process.

Subsequently, a process of jumping (migrating) to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step 304 is executed (S306). Specifically, when the acquired start address is SA0, it jumps to the special figure fluctuation start process (S307), and when the acquired start address is SA1, it jumps to the special figure change process (S308). If the acquired start address is SA2, it jumps to the special figure confirmation processing (S309), and if the acquired start address is SA3, it jumps to the special electric start processing (S310), and the acquired start address is If it is SA4, it jumps to the special electric power opening process (S311), if the acquired start address is SA5, it jumps to the special electric power closing process (S312), and if the acquired start address is SA6. Jump to the special electric end processing (S313). Then, when the processes of steps 307 to 313 are executed, the special figure special electric control process is terminated. Hereinafter, each process of steps 307 to 313 will be described individually.

First, the special figure variation start processing in step 307 will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the special figure fluctuation start processing. In the special figure variation start process, various determination processes are executed on condition that the hold information is stored, and the process for starting the game round in which the variation display is performed on the main display unit 71 and the symbol display device 80 is performed. Run.

First, the value of the total number of reservations Nx is read from the total number of reservations storage area NX, and it is determined whether or not the acquired number of reservations Nx is 1 or more (S501). Then, when it is determined that the total number of reserved numbers Nx is 0 (S501: NO), the present special figure fluctuation start processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the total number of pending numbers Nx is 1 or more (S501: YES), the data setting process is executed (S502). Here, the data setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the data setting process. In the present embodiment, as described above, it is more likely that the player will be advantageous if the player wins the prize when the second starting port 55 is won (see FIG. 18). When there is hold information related to the lottery game, priority digestion is performed to preferentially shift the hold information related to the second lottery game to the execution area RC.

Specifically, in this data setting process, first, the value of the hold number Nb is read from the second special symbol hold number storage area NB, and it is determined whether or not the acquired hold number Nb is 1 or more (S601). .. When it is determined that the hold number Nb is 1 or more (S601: YES), the hold number Nb is subtracted by 1 and the total hold number Nx is subtracted by 1 (S602). Next, the data (that is, the hold information) stored in the first hold area RB1 in the second special symbol hold ball storage area RB is shifted to the execution area RC (S603). After that, the data (that is, the holding information) in the second special symbol holding ball storage area RB is shifted (S604). Specifically, the process of step 604 is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reserved areas RB1 to RB4 to the lower area side, and clears the data of the first reserved area RB1. , 2nd hold area RB2 → 1st hold area RB1, 3rd hold area RB3 → 2nd hold area RB2, 4th hold area RB4 → 3rd hold area RB3, and so on.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold number Nb is not 1 or more (S601: NO), that is, when only the hold number Na is 1 or more, the hold number Na is subtracted by 1 and the total hold number Nx is subtracted by 1. S605). Next, the data (that is, the hold information) stored in the first hold area RA1 in the first special symbol hold ball storage area RA is shifted to the execution area RC (S606). After that, the data (that is, the holding information) in the first special symbol holding ball storage area RA is shifted (S607). Specifically, this process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reserved areas RA1 to RA4 to the lower area side, clearing the data of the first reserved area RA1 and the first. 2 Hold area RA2 → 1st hold area RA1, 3rd hold area RA3 → 2nd hold area RA2, 4th hold area RA4 → 3rd hold area RA3, and so on.

After executing the shift process of step 604 or after executing the shift process of step 607, the data of the first to fourth reserved areas RA1 to RA4 have been shifted, or the first to fourth reserved areas have been executed. A shift command for causing the voice lamp control device 92 to recognize that the data of RB1 to RB4 has been shifted is set as an output target (S608). The shift command set in step 608 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 92, which is a control device on the sub side, by the port output process (S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20).

Returning to the description of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 24), after executing the data setting process in step 502, the hit / fail determination process (special information determination process) is executed (S503). In the winning / failing determination process, it is first determined whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, by determining whether or not the high-probability mode flag is stored in the high-probability mode flag storage area 114f provided in the main RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the winning / losing lottery mode is the high-probability mode. judge. Then, when it is determined that the mode is in the high probability mode, the special symbol winning / failing table for the high probability mode (FIG. 17B) stored in the special symbol winning / failing table storage area 113a of the main ROM 113 is referred to. Of the information stored in the execution area RC, the information for determining whether or not the result is correct, that is, the numerical information related to the winning random number counter C1 (the numerical information stored in the winning random number counter storage area 201) is the winning numerical information for the high probability mode. Determine if they match. If it is determined that the mode is in the low probability mode, refer to the special symbol winning / failing table for the low probability mode (FIG. 17 (a)) stored in the special symbol winning / failing table storage area 113a of the main ROM 113. Of the information stored in the execution area RC, the information for determining whether or not the result is correct, that is, the numerical information related to the hit random number counter C1 (numerical information stored in the hit random number counter storage area 201) is the hit numerical information for the low probability mode. Determine if they match. The high-probability mode flag is stored at the end of the open / close execution mode due to the probability variation hit result (FIG. 32, S1303), and then erased at the end of the open / close execution mode due to the normal hit result (FIG. 32, S1303). S1304).

Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination process is the winning result (S504). If it is determined that the winning result is (S504: YES), the distribution determination process (special information determination process) is executed (S505). In the distribution determination process, among the information stored in the execution area RC, the information for distribution determination, that is, the numerical information regarding the hit type counter C2 (numerical information stored in the hit type counter storage area 202) and the winning prize. Grasp the information of the starting port. Then, with reference to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 113b of the main ROM 113, the numerical information regarding the hit type counter C2 grasped above (numerical information stored in the hit type counter storage area 202). Identify which hit result corresponds to. Specifically, in the case where a prize is given to the first starting port 54, the 16R probability variation hit result is obtained by referring to the distribution table for the first result display unit (FIG. 18A). It is specified which of the 4R probability variation hit result and the 16R normal hit result corresponds to. In addition, when the prize is won in the second starting port 55, the 16R probability variation hit result or the 16R normal is referred to with reference to the distribution table (FIG. 18B) for the second result display unit. Identify which of the winning results corresponds to the winning result.

After that, the stop result setting process for the hit result is executed (S506). Specifically, the information on the mode of the pattern (lighting state) that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 71 in the game round related to the start of the fluctuation this time is stored in the stop result table storage area 113e of the main ROM 113. It is specified from the stop result table for the hit result, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 114. In the stop result table for the hit result, the information of the mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 71 is set differently for each type of the hit result.

Next, the flag storage process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed (S507). Specifically, the flag is stored in the storage area corresponding to the hit result specified in step 505 in the various hit result flag storage areas 114k of the main RAM 114.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the result is not a winning result (S504: NO), the stop result setting process for the loss result is executed (S508). Specifically, the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 71 in the game round related to the start of this fluctuation is stored in the stop result table storage area 113e of the main ROM 113 for the deviation result. The stop result table is specified, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 114. The information on the mode of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the mode of the pattern selected in the case of the winning result.

After executing any of the processes of step 507 and step 508, the process of grasping the variable display time (display continuation period) is executed (S509). In this process, the numerical information of the variation type counter CS is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the reach display is generated by the symbol display device 80 in the current game round. Specifically, when the game times related to the start of the fluctuation this time are the winning results, it is determined that the reach display occurs. Further, although it is not a hit result, the numerical information regarding the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area RC (numerical information stored in the reach random number counter storage area 203) is the numerical information corresponding to the reach occurrence. In that case, it is determined that the reach display occurs.

When it is determined that the reach display occurs, the variation display time table for the reach generation stored in the variation display time table storage area 113d of the main ROM 113 is referred to, and the numerical information of the variation type counter CS this time is supported. The variable display time information is acquired, and the type of reach (normal reach or super reach) is determined.

The normal reach in the present embodiment is a reach in which the variation display time is short, and after the reach line is formed by the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the interrupted symbol row Z2 is stopped as it is (the interrupted symbol row Z2 is stopped as it is. It is a so-called bitter stop) fluctuation (see FIG. 6 for the symbol sequence). The super reach is a reach that has a longer variable display time than the normal reach, and indicates to the player that there is a high expectation that a winning result will be generated in the game times. For example, it is displayed after the normal reach. NS. In the present embodiment, when the game times this time is a winning result, the probability of selecting the super reach is higher than when it is not a winning result.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the variation display time table for non-reach generation stored in the variation display time table storage area 113d of the main ROM 113 is referred to, and the variation type counter CS of this time is used. Acquires variable display time information corresponding to numerical information.

The variation display time that can be acquired by referring to the variation display time table for non-reach is different from the variation display time that can be acquired by referring to the variation display time table for reach occurrence. Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation display time when the reach does not occur is set so as to become shorter as the total number of pending numbers Nx increases. Furthermore, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the variable display so that a shorter variable display time is selected as compared with the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. The time is set.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display time may not fluctuate according to the total number of holdings Nx or the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when reach occurs. Further, in the case of various hit results, the variable display time table may be set individually for each of the case of the out-reach and the case of the out-of-reach non-occurrence (complete off). In this case, the variable display time is distributed according to each game result.

Next, the information on the fluctuation display time acquired in step 509 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter in the special figure special electric timer counter area 114e (S510). As described above, the update (subtraction) of the numerical information set in the special figure special electric timer counter is executed by the timer update process (S211) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20). Further, as an effect for the game round, the variable display of the pattern on the main display unit 71 and the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 80 are performed, and when each of these variable displays is completed, the game round is performed. In the state where the stop result is displayed (in the symbol display device 80, a state in which a predetermined combination of symbols is waiting on the effective line), the confirmation display (final stop display) is performed over the confirmation time (final stop time).
In this case, the variable display time acquired in step 509 is the total time for one game minus the fixed time. In this respect, the variable display time can be rephrased as the time before the confirmation (the time before the final stop).

Subsequently, the variation command and the type command are set as output targets (S511). The fluctuation command includes information on the fluctuation display time. Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the variation display time acquired by referring to the reach non-occurrence variation display time table is the variation display time acquired by referring to the reach generation variation display time table. The variable display time acquired by normal reach is also different from the variable display time acquired by super reach. Therefore, even if the fluctuation command does not include information on whether or not reach has occurred and information on the type of reach, the voice lamp control device 92, which is the control device on the sub side, generates reach from the information on the fluctuation display time. It is possible to identify the presence or absence of.
In this respect, it can be said that the variable command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred and information on the type of reach. The variable command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred and information that directly indicates the type of reach.

In addition, the type command includes information on the game result. That is, the type command includes information on the 16R probability variation hit result, the 4R probability variation hit result, and the 16R normal hit result as the game result information. The variation command and type command set as output targets in step 511 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 92, which is the control device on the sub side, by the port output process (S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20). Will be done.

Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is stored in the time saving flag storage area 114g (S512), and if it is determined that the time saving flag is stored (S512: YES), it is provided in the main RAM 114. The time reduction counter stored in the time reduction counter area 114h is decremented by 1 (S513). The time reduction counter is set to a specified number of times (100 in this embodiment) after the ending time in the open / close execution mode resulting from the 16R normal hit result has elapsed (FIG. 32, S1305).

After subtracting 1 from the time reduction counter, or when it is determined that the time reduction flag is not stored (S512: NO), the variation display of the pattern on the main display unit 71 is started (S514), and the special figure special electric counter is turned on. 1 is added (S515). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "0" when the special figure fluctuation start processing is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "1" when the processing of step 515 is executed. ". After that, the special figure fluctuation start processing is completed.

Next, the process during the change of the special figure in step 308 in the special figure special electric control process will be described with reference to FIG. 26. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the processing during the change of the special figure. The special figure change processing is a process after the special figure change start process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "1".

First, by confirming whether or not "1" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112, it is determined whether or not the variation display time in the production for this game round has elapsed ( S701). That is, in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 21), in step 305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", and if it is "0", it is set to the zero flag. Since "1" is set, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "1" and the zero flag is set to "1" means that the variable display time in the production for this game round is set. It means that it has passed.

When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (S701: NO), the main display unit 71 repeats a constant light emission pattern at a constant cycle, so that the update timing of the main display unit 71 (update of the light emission pattern) It is determined whether or not it is (timing) (S702). Then, when it is determined that it is not the update timing (S702: NO), the processing during the change of the special figure is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the update timing is reached (S702: YES), the update content reading process is executed (S703). For this update content, the update content corresponding to the update timing is read from the update data table storage area 113i of the main ROM 113.

Next, an update process is executed in which the update content read in step 703 is set for the update of the main display unit 71 (S704). The process for actually updating the display content of the main display unit 71 is executed by the display control process (S217) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20). After that, the processing during the change of this special figure is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable display time has elapsed (S701: YES), the fixed stop command (final stop display command) is set as the output target (S705). The confirmation stop command is a command for causing the voice lamp control device 92, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that it is the timing to start the confirmation display for the effect for the current game round.

Then, the process of reading the stop result is executed (S706). In the read-out process, at the start of the game round this time, information on the mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed, which is set in the main RAM 114 in step 506 or step 508 of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 24), is read out. After that, an update process is executed in which the information on the mode of the read pattern is set for updating the main display unit 71 (S707).

Subsequently, the information of the fixed time (for example, 0.5 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read out, and the information of the fixed time is set in the special figure special electric timer counter (S708). Next, the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (S709). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "1" when the special figure changing processing is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "2" when the processing of step 709 is executed. ". After that, the processing during the change of this special figure is terminated.

Next, the process during the determination of the special figure in step 309 in the special figure special electric control process will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the processing during the determination of the special figure. The special figure finalizing process is a process after the special figure changing process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "2".

First, by confirming whether or not "1" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112, it is determined whether or not the fixed time in the production for this game round has elapsed (S801). ). That is, in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 21), in step 305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", and if it is "0", it is set to the zero flag. Since "1" is set, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "2" and the zero flag is set to "1" means that the fixed time has passed in the production for this game. It means that you did. If it is determined that the confirmation time has not elapsed (S801: NO), the processing during the determination of this special figure is terminated as it is.

When it is determined that the fixed time has elapsed (S801: YES), the winning / failing determination that triggered the game round this time is determined by determining the flags stored in the various hit result flag storage areas 114k in the main RAM 114. It is determined whether or not the result of is a hit result (that is, a result that triggers a transition to the open / close execution mode) (S802). In the various hit result flag storage areas 114k, the flags corresponding to the hit results are stored in the flag storage process of step 507 in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 24).

When it is determined that the result is a hit (S802: YES), the opening command is set as the output target (S803). The opening command is a command for causing the voice lamp control device 92, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that it is the timing to start the effect for the open / close execution mode. The opening command also includes information on the type of hit result (16R probability variation hit result, 4R probability variation hit result, 16R normal hit result) that triggered the open / close execution mode.

Next, the information of the opening time (for example, 4 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read out, and the information of the opening time is set in the special figure special electric timer counter (S804). Then, the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (S805). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "2" when the special figure finalizing process is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "3" when the process of step 805 is executed. ". After that, the processing during the determination of this special figure is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a hit result (S802: NO), that is, when the result of the hit / fail judgment that triggered the game round this time is a wrong result (that is, a result that does not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode). Is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is 1 or more (S806). Then, when it is determined that the time reduction counter is 0 (S806: NO), the time reduction flag is deleted if the time reduction flag is stored in the time reduction flag storage area 114g (S807). After clearing the time saving flag, or when it is determined that the value of the time saving number counter is 1 or more (S806: YES), the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (S808). After that, the processing during the determination of this special figure is completed.

Next, the special electric start processing of step 310 in the special figure special electric control process will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the special electric power start processing. The special electric power start process is a process after the special figure finalizing process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is "3".

First, by confirming whether or not "1" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112, it is determined whether or not the opening time in the current open / close execution mode has elapsed (S901). That is, in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 21), in step 305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", and if it is "0", it is set to the zero flag. In order to set "1", the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "3" and the zero flag is set to "1" means that the opening time in the opening / closing execution mode has passed. Means. If it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed (S901: NO), the special electric train start process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the opening time has elapsed (S901: YES), a round setting for setting the number of rounds corresponding to various hit results in the round counters provided in the other various counter areas 114 m of the main RAM 114. Process (S902). The round counter is a counter for specifying the number of round games to be executed within the range of one open / close execution mode by the main MPU 112, and one round is consumed in the open / close execution mode of the round number specified mode. "1" is subtracted each time.

Here, the setting process for the round of step 902 will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the round.

First, "10" is set as the upper limit number, which is one end condition of the round game, in the winning counters provided in the other various counter areas 114m of the main RAM 114 (S1001). The winning counter is a counter in which "1" is subtracted each time a game ball is won in the large winning opening 56a.

Next, by determining the flags stored in the various hit result flag storage areas 114k in the main RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the transition to the special electric start processing is the 16R probability variation hit result. (S1002). Then, when it is determined that the result is not the 16R probability variation hit result (S1002: NO), it is determined whether or not the result is the 16R normal hit result (S1003).

When it is determined that the result is a 16R probability variation hit (S1002: YES), and when it is determined that the result is a 16R normal hit result (S1003: YES), after setting "16" in the round counter (S1004), this End the setting process for the round. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 16R normal hit result is not (S1003: NO), the flags stored in the various hit result flag storage areas 114k indicate the 4R probability variation hit result, so that the round counter is set to "4". After setting (S1005), the setting process for this round ends.

Returning to the explanation of the special electric start processing (FIG. 28), after completing the setting processing for the round in step 902, the first opening 56a according to the winning result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is opened. Read the duration information (S903). In the present embodiment, the initial opening duration is all set to a long time mode. Then, the read open duration is set in the special figure special electric timer counter (S904).

Next, the opening setting process for opening the large winning opening 56a is executed (S905).
In this open setting process, "1" is set in the register related to the large winning opening 56a in the main MPU 112. As a result, in the port output process of step 208 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 20), the output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 56d is started in order to switch the large winning port 56a to the open state.

Subsequently, the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (S906). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "3" when the special electric start process is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "4" when the process of step 906 is executed. Become. After that, the special electric train start process is completed.

Next, the process during opening of the special electric power in step 311 in the special figure special electric power control process will be described with reference to FIG. 30. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the processing during opening of the special electric power. The processing during opening of the special electric power is the processing after the special electric power start processing, and the numerical information of the special electric power counter is "4".

First, by confirming whether or not "1" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112, it is determined whether or not the opening duration in the current round game has elapsed (S1101). That is, in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 21), in step 305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", and if it is "0", it is set to the zero flag. In order to set "1", the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "4" and the zero flag is set to "1" means that the open duration in the current round game has passed. Means.

When it is determined that the opening duration has elapsed (S1101: YES), the round counter is decremented by 1 (S1102). Subsequently, the closing time information stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read out, and the closing time information is set in the special figure special electric timer counter to perform the closing time setting process (S1103). Then, a closing setting process for closing the large winning opening 56a is executed (S1104). In the closing setting process, "0" is set in the register related to the large winning opening 56a in the main MPU 112. As a result, in the port output process of step 208 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 20), the output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 56d is stopped in order to switch the large winning port 56a to the closed state.

Next, the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (S1105). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter when the processing during opening of the special electric power is executed is "4", the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter when the processing of step 1105 is executed is "5". Become. After that, the processing during the opening of this special electric train is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the opening duration has not elapsed (S1101: NO), it is determined whether or not there is a prize in the large winning opening 56a based on the detection information from the winning detection sensor 56c (S1106). ), If it is determined that there is no winning in the large winning opening 56a (S1106: NO), the processing during the opening of the special electric train is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a prize in the large prize opening 56a (S1106: YES), the prize counter is decremented by 1 (S1107). After that, it is determined whether or not the winning counter is "0" (S1108), and if it is determined to be "0" (S1108: YES), the present is performed after the processing of steps 1102 to 1105 is executed. Ends processing while the special electric power is open. On the other hand, if it is not "0" (S1108: NO), the processing during the opening of the special electric power is terminated as it is.

Next, the processing during closing of the special electric power in step 312 in the special drawing special electric power control processing will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the processing during closing of the special electric train. The special electric power closing process is a process after the special electric power opening process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is "5".

First, it is determined whether or not the round counter is "0" (S1201). If the round counter is not "0" (S1201: NO), whether the closing time has elapsed by checking whether "1" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112. Whether or not it is determined (S1202). That is, in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 21), in step 305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", and if it is "0", it is set to the zero flag. Since "1" is set, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "5" and the zero flag is set to "1" means that the closing time has passed. If it is determined that the closing time has not elapsed (S1202: NO), the processing during closing of this special electric train is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing time has elapsed (S1202: YES), "10" is set in the winning counter (S1203). Subsequently, the read processing of the open duration is executed (S1204). Specifically, by determining the flag stored in the various hit result flag storage area 114k, the result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is specified, and the value of the round counter is read out and based on these. The information on the duration for opening the large winning opening 56a is read out. In the pachinko machine 10, the opening duration is set to correspond to a long time mode in all rounds in each hit result. Then, the read open duration information is set in the special figure special electric timer counter (S1205).

Subsequently, the open setting process is executed (S1206). The processing content of the opening setting process is the same as the opening setting process of step 905 in the special electric start processing (FIG. 28). Next, the special figure special electric counter is subtracted by 1 (S1207). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "5" when the special electric power closing process is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "4" when the process of step 1207 is executed. It becomes. After that, the processing during the closure of this special train is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the round counter is "0" (S1201: YES), the ending command is set as the output target (S1208). The ending command is a command for causing the voice lamp control device 92, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that it is the timing to start the effect for ending. The ending command also includes information on the type of hit result that triggered the open / close execution mode.

Next, the information of the ending time (for example, 6 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read out, and the information of the ending time is set in the special figure special electric timer counter (S1209). Subsequently, the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (S1210). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "5" when the special figure closing process is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "6" when the process of step 1210 is executed. ". After that, the processing during the closure of this special train is completed.

Next, the special electric power termination process of step 313 in the special figure special electric power control process will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the special electric power termination process. The special electric power termination process is a process after the special electric power closing process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is "6".

First, it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed by confirming whether or not "1" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112 (S1301). That is, in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 21), in step 305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", and if it is "0", the zero flag is set. Since "1" is set, the situation where "1" is set in the zero flag in the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "6" means that the ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (S1301: NO), the special train termination process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the ending time has elapsed (S1301: YES), the type of the hit result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode that has ended this time is set to the various hit result flag storage areas 114k of the main RAM 114. With reference to the flag stored in, it is determined whether or not the result is a probability variation hit (S1302). Then, when it is determined that the probability variation hit result (16R probability variation hit result or 4R probability variation hit result) (S1302: YES), the high probability mode flag is set in the high probability mode flag storage area 114f of the main RAM 114. If it is not stored, the high probability mode flag is stored (S1303). On the other hand, if it is determined that the hit result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode that ended this time is not a probability variation hit result (16R normal hit result) (S1302: NO), the high probability mode flag is stored. If so, after erasing the high probability mode flag (S1304), the time saving flag is stored in the time saving flag storage area 114g of the main RAM 114 (if the time saving flag is already stored, the time saving flag is maintained as it is) and the time saving is performed. “100” is set in the time saving number counter in the number counter area 114h (S1305). In the process of step 1303 or step 1305, the flags indicating the information corresponding to the types of hit results are also deleted from the various hit result flag storage areas 114k. After executing the process of step 1303 or step 1305, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (S1306), and the special electric end process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure special electric control process is executed by using the special figure special electric counter, the special figure special electric address table, and the special figure special electric timer counter.
For this reason, when the main MPU 112 specifies which situation is in the flow of a series of games composed of the effect for game rotation and the opening / closing execution mode, the special figure special electric counter may be referred to. It is not necessary to check multiple flags at each processing timing as in. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

Further, in each of the processes of steps 307 to 313, when the situation corresponding to the process ends, the process of updating the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter to the one corresponding to the subsequent situation is executed. As a result, it is not necessary to separately provide a dedicated process for ending a certain situation and performing a transition to the next situation, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

Further, "0", which is the initial value of the special figure special electric counter, corresponds to the first situation in a series of game situations including the effect for game times and the opening / closing execution mode. As a result, it is possible to set the first situation in the above series of gaming situations without specially setting the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter after the initialization of the main RAM 114 or the like.

Further, when updating the special figure special electric counter, any one of 1 subtraction, 1 addition, and "0" clearing may be performed, so that the processing related to the update can be simplified.

Further, the process for acquiring the hold information that may occur in any of the above series of game situations is set separately from each process of steps 307 to 313, and refer to the special figure special electric counter. It is not included in each process executed. As a result, it is not necessary to follow the situation in which the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is set at the same time, and the processing configuration using the numerical information can be simplified.

Further, among the processes of steps 307 to 313, in the process in which the period is measured in order to determine the end condition of the corresponding situation, the period is measured by using a common period measuring means called a special figure special electric timer counter. Measurements are made. As a result, the storage capacity of the main RAM 114 can be reduced. In addition, since the situations corresponding to each process using the special figure special electric timer counter do not occur at the same time, even if the special figure special electric timer counter is used in common, the timer counter is referred to at the same time in a plurality of situations. There is no such thing, and the processing configuration for using the special figure special electric timer counter is not complicated.

Further, the process of updating the special figure special electric timer counter is executed in the timer update process in step 211 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20) set as a process different from steps 307 to 313. As a result, the processing configuration can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the processing for updating the special figure special electric timer counter is individually set for each processing in steps 307 to 313.

Further, the confirmation of whether or not the special figure special electric timer counter is "0" is collectively performed in step 305 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 21), and in each process of step 308 to step 313, it is performed. The passage of each time is determined by checking the zero flag of the main MPU 112.
As a result, as compared with the case where the numerical information is read from the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 114 and it is determined whether or not the numerical information is "0" in each process of steps 308 to 313. The processing configuration can be simplified.

Here, the special electric special figure counter is referred to in order to confirm which situation is in a series of games including the effect for game rotation and the open / close execution mode even in the processes other than the special figure special electric figure control process. NS. For example, the special electric special figure counter is also referred to in the demo display process executed in step 218 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20), and the demo display process will be described later.

Next, the general-purpose electric control processing executed in step 216 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 20) will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the Fuzu Fuden control process.

In the normal symbol control process, when a prize is generated in the normal symbol start gate 57, a process for acquiring the hold information of the normal symbol is executed, and the hold information of the normal symbol is stored. In addition, the release determination of the electric accessory 63 is performed for the hold information, and further, the release determination is used as an opportunity to execute a process for performing an effect for a normal symbol. Further, based on the result of the opening determination, the process of opening and closing the electric accessory 63 is executed.

Specifically, first, the process of acquiring the hold information of the ordinary symbol is executed (S1401). In the acquisition process, the numerical information of the electric accessory open random number counter C4 (that is, the hold information of the normal symbol) is stored in the normal symbol hold ball storage area 114c on condition that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol start gate 57. Execute the process to be performed. It should be noted that the acquisition of the hold information of the ordinary symbol is performed within the range of the upper limit value of hold (4 in this embodiment).

Next, a process of reading the information of the Fuzu Fuden counter from the Fuzu Fuden counter area 114i of the main RAM 114 is executed (S1402), and the Fuzu Fuden address table storage area 113h of the main ROM 113 is used to read the Fuzu Fuden counter information. The process of reading the information in the address table is executed (S1403). Then, the process of acquiring the start address corresponding to the information of the Fuzu Fuden counter from the Fuzu Fuden address table is executed (S1404).

Explaining the processing contents of steps 1402 to 1404, as described above, the fuzu-fuden control process includes a process related to the effect for the fuzu and a process related to the opening / closing of the electric accessory 63. In this case, as the processing related to the effect for the normal map, the normal map fluctuation start process, the normal map change process, and the normal map finalization process are set. Further, as the processing related to the opening and closing of the electric accessory 63, a processing during the opening of the general electric power and a processing during the closing of the general electric power are set.

In such a processing configuration, the Fuzu Fuden counter is a counter for the main MPU 112 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing should be executed, and is stored in the Fuzu Fuden address table. Is set to the start address in the program for executing the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing in correspondence with the numerical information of the Fuzu Fuden counter.

Explaining the Fuzu Fuden address table with reference to FIG. 34, the Fuzu Tokuden counter can set numerical information from "0" to "4", and the Fuzu Fuden address table can be set to Fuzu Fuden. Information on the start address (“NSA0” to “NSA4”) is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information of the electric counter. In this case, the start address NSA0 is the start address of the program for executing the normal map variation start process, and the start address NSA1 is the start address of the program for executing the normal map variation start process, and the start address NSA2. Is the start address of the program for executing the process during confirmation of the normal figure, the start address NSA3 is the start address of the program for executing the process during the opening of the normal power, and the start address NSA4 is the closed state of the normal power. The start address of the program to execute the process.

The Fuzu Fuden counter will be used in the next processing round when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the currently stored numerical information is completed. 1 addition, 1 subtraction, or "0" is cleared corresponding to the process executed in the electric control process. Therefore, in the Fuzu Fuden control process at each processing time, it is sufficient to execute the process according to the numerical information set in the Fuzu Fuden counter.

According to the above configuration, as in the case of the special figure special electric control, the main MPU 112 can determine which process should be executed as the normal figure normal electric control without checking the presence or absence of various flags. It becomes possible to grasp. Therefore, the processing can be simplified.

Below, using the Fuzu Fuden counter and the Fuzu Fuden address table, the Fuzu fluctuation start processing, the Fuzu fluctuation processing, the Fuzu confirmation processing, the Fuden opening processing, and the Fuden closing processing are performed. The processing configuration for execution will be described.

After executing the process of step 1404, the process of setting the zero flag of the normal symbol is executed (S1405). In the process of setting the zero flag of the normal symbol, the numerical information of the normal-sized timer counter (16-bit timer counter TC2) is read from the normal-sized normal-sized timer counter area 114j, and the numerical information of the normal-sized normal-sized timer counter is set to "0". , The process of setting "1" to the zero flag of the normal symbol provided in the register of the main MPU 112 is executed.
In other words, if the numerical information of the normal symbol timer counter is not "0", the process of setting "0" to the zero flag of the normal symbol provided in the register of the main MPU 112 (erasing "1") is performed. Run. The normal-figure special electric timer counter is a counter used by the main MPU 112 to specify the update timing of the normal-figure special electric counter according to the passage of time, and is the timer in step 211 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20). Numerical information is subtracted in the update process.

Next, a process of jumping (migrating) to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step 1404 is executed (S1406). Specifically, when the acquired start address is NSA0, it jumps to the normal map fluctuation start process (S1407), and when the acquired start address is NSA1, it jumps to the normal map fluctuation process (S1408). If the acquired start address is NSA2, it jumps to the normal drawing confirmation processing (S1409), and if the acquired start address is NSA3, it jumps to the normal electric opening processing (S1410) and the acquired start. If the address is NSA4, it jumps to the process during closing of the general electric train (S1411).

In the normal symbol fluctuation start process (S1407), on the condition that the hold information of the normal symbol is stored, the release determination of the electric accessory 63 is performed using the hold information of the normal symbol, and the main display unit 71 In the other display unit 71d of the above, the process of starting the variable display (blinking display) of the pattern is executed. In this case, when the information of the variable display time for fluctuating the pattern to be displayed on the other display unit 71d is set in the Fuzuden timer counter and the fluctuating display of the pattern is started on the other display unit 71d, the Fuzu is used. The electric counter is updated from "0" to "1".

In the normal map fluctuation processing (S1408), other processes for updating the display on the display unit 71d are executed. In this case, on condition that the passage of the variable display time is confirmed, the information of the fixed time is set in the Fuzu Fuden timer counter, and the Fuzu Fuden counter is updated from "1" to "2".

In the normal figure confirmation processing (S1409), a process for displaying the result of the opening determination this time on the other display unit 71d for the confirmation time of the normal symbol is executed, and the result of the opening determination is the winning result. The process for opening the electric accessory 63 and the process for setting the number of times of opening the electric accessory 63 when the electric accessory 63 is opened are executed with the winning result of this time as an opportunity. In this case, on the condition that the passage of the fixed time of the normal symbol has been confirmed and the result of the opening judgment is the winning result, the information of the opening duration of this time in the electric accessory 63 is input to the Fuzu Fuden timer counter. At the same time, the electric accessory 63 is opened, and the normal power counter is updated from "2" to "3". On the other hand, if the result of the opening judgment is not the winning result even though the lapse of the confirmation time of the normal symbol is confirmed, the electric accessory 63 is not set to be in the open state, and the normal figure general electric counter is set to ". 0 ”The process of clearing is executed.

In the processing during the opening of the normal electric power (S1410), the processing for maintaining the open state of the electric accessory 63 and closing the electric accessory 63 when the closing timing is reached is executed. In this case, on condition that the elapse of the opening duration of the electric accessory 63 is confirmed, the information on the closing duration of the electric accessory 63 is set in the normal electric timer counter, and the electric accessory 63 is closed. The state is set, and the Fuzu Fuden counter is updated from "3" to "4".

In the process during closing of the electric motor (S1411), when it is necessary to maintain the closed state of the electric accessory 63 and to open the electric accessory 63 again, the process for opening the electric accessory 63. To execute. In this case, on condition that it is confirmed that the closing duration of the electric accessory 63 has elapsed and that it is necessary to reopen the electric accessory 63, the information on the current opening duration of the electric accessory 63 is provided. It is set in the Fuzu Fuden timer counter, the electric accessory 63 is opened, and the Fuzu Fuden counter is updated from "4" to "3". On the other hand, if it is not necessary to open the electric accessory 63 again even though the elapse of the closing duration of the electric accessory 63 has been confirmed, the electric accessory 63 is not set to be in the open state and is usually used. Figure Executes the process of clearing the general electric counter to "0".

When any of the processes of steps 1407 to 1411 is executed, the present power control process is terminated.

As described above, by using the Fuzu Fuden counter, the Fuzu Fuden address table, and the Fuzu Fuden timer counter to execute the Fuzu Fuden control process, the production and electric role for the Fuzu When the main MPU 112 specifies which situation is in the flow of a series of games consisting of the opening and closing of the object 63, it is sufficient to refer to the Fuzu Fuden counter, and a plurality of flags are set as in the conventional case. It is not necessary to check each processing timing. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

Further, when updating the Fuzu Fuden counter, any one of 1 subtraction, 1 addition, and "0" clearing may be performed, so that the processing related to the update can be simplified. Further, since the zero flag of the normal symbol is used as in the case of the zero flag in the case of the special figure special electric control processing, the processing configuration can be simplified.

Next, the demo display process executed in step 218 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20) will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a demo display process.

First, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric counter is "0" (S1501). When the special figure special electric counter is "0", it means that the effect for the game round is not executed and the open / close execution mode is not executed.

Here, in the configuration in which it is confirmed by the presence / absence of the flag that the effect for the game round is being executed as in the conventional case, and the presence / absence of the flag is confirmed that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, first of all, one of them. It is necessary to read the information of the flag of 1 from the main RAM 114 and confirm the information, and then read the information of the other flag from the main RAM 114 and confirm the information. Then, it is necessary to specify the address to the main RAM 114 at least twice, and to set the data in the register when the data is transferred to the address at least twice. On the other hand, by using the special figure special electric counter, the address can be specified once to the main RAM 114, and the data can be set to the register once when the data is transferred to it. .. Therefore, the processing can be simplified.

If it is determined that the special figure special electric counter is not "0" (S1501: NO), the process for displaying this demo is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that the special figure special electric counter is "0" (S1501). : YES), it is determined whether or not it is in the demo display state (S1502).

The demo display state means that the symbol display device 80 has already performed the demo display (that is, the standby display), and the demo display flag is stored in the other various flag storage areas 114n of the main RAM 114. It is a state of being. In addition, the demo display is a predetermined demo display waiting time (for example, after the confirmation time elapses after displaying the stop result of the previous game round or after the ending of the previous open / close execution mode is completed. , 0.1 sec), the image of the start waiting effect is displayed in the upper display area Dm of the symbol display device 80, and the illumination unit 33 and the speaker unit 34 perform the effect accordingly. To say.

In the demo display on the symbol display device 80, an image in which the symbol displayed on the effective line performs a predetermined operation is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the symbol is a predetermined one. After or instead of displaying the operating image, a moving image with a manufacturer name, a model name, or a predetermined character may be displayed.

If it is determined that the demo display state is present (S1502: YES), the demo display process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that the demo display state is not present (S1502: NO), the demo display wait state is set. Whether or not it is determined (S1503). The demo display waiting state means that the measurement of the demo display waiting time has already started, and the demo display waiting flag is stored in the other various flag storage areas 114n of the main RAM 114. be.

When it is determined that the demo display waiting state is not set (S1503: N0), the demo display waiting time information stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read out, and the demo display waiting time information is used as the special figure special electric timer counter. (S1504). Subsequently, the demo display waiting state is set by storing the demo display waiting flag in the other various flag storage areas 114n of the main RAM 114 (S1505). After that, the process for displaying this demo is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the demo display is waiting state (S1503: YES), it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric timer counter is "0" (S1506). If it is determined that the special figure special electric timer counter is not "0" (S1506: NO), the demo display process is terminated as it is.

When the special figure special electric timer counter is determined to be "0" (S1506: YES), the demo display state is set by storing the demo display flag in the other various flag storage areas 114n of the main RAM 114 (S1507). ). In the process of step 1507, the demo display waiting flag is cleared to release the demo display waiting state. In addition, the demo display state is canceled by clearing the demo display flag when the effect for the game round is newly started. Next, the demo start command is set as the output target (S1508). After that, the process for displaying this demo is terminated.

<Execution control of production and notification>
Next, the execution control of the effect and the notification using various output devices executed by the audio side MPU 152 and the display side MPU 162 will be described.

First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the voice MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. 36. Note that this timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed in, for example, 4 msec.

In the timer interrupt processing, first, the main command storage process is executed (S1601), and the display side command storage process is executed (S1602). The main command storage process in step 1601 is a process for storing the command in the command storage area 154a of the audio side RAM 154 when a command is received from the main MPU 112, and the display side command storage process in step 1602 is the display side. When a command is received from the MPU 162, this is a process for storing the command in the command storage area 154a of the audio side RAM 154. This command storage area 154a is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored command, and even if a plurality of commands are received at the same time, they are used. The processing corresponding to each command can be executed well.

Next, the main command correspondence process for performing the processing corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 112 is executed (S1603), and the display side command correspondence for performing the processing corresponding to the command received from the display MPU 162 is executed. The process is executed (S1604). The main command correspondence process in step 1603 and the display side command correspondence process in step 1604 will be specifically described later. Subsequently, the process corresponding to the second frame button is executed (S1605).
In this second frame button correspondence process, when the second frame button 27 is operated by the player on the condition that the demo start command is received from the main MPU 112 (not in the game times or open / close execution mode). , Set the volume and light intensity corresponding to the operation for updating. Whether or not the second frame button 27 has been operated is determined by a signal from the second frame button detection sensor 27a that monitors the operation of the second frame button 27.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the advance notice response effect operation valid period standby flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 154f of the voice side RAM 154 (S1606). Then, when it is determined that the advance notice response effect operation valid period wait flag is stored (S1606: YES), it is determined whether or not the advance notice response effect operation valid period wait timer counter is 0 (S1607). Notice response effect effect valid period When it is determined that the standby timer counter is 0 (S1607: YES), the notice response effect operation valid period of the voice side RAM 154 is stored in the timer counter area 154b. The operation valid period is set in the timer counter (S1608), and the advance notice response effect operation valid period standby flag is cleared (S1609).

The notice response effect operation valid period wait flag is stored in the display side command correspondence process (FIG. 45) described later, and the notice response effect operation valid period wait timer counter is stored in the display side command correspondence process (FIG. 45) described later. The waiting period is set in. Further, in the set processing of the operation valid period in step 1608, the corresponding advance notice effect is based on the type of effect pattern in the main command correspondence process (FIG. 37) described later and the effect pattern memorized in the stop symbol storage process (S1706). The notice response effect operation valid period of (conversation effect and character effect) is read from the notice response effect operation valid period storage area 153b of the voice side ROM 153, and the read notice response effect operation valid period is set in the timer counter. do. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a common advance notice response effect operation valid period may be set in the advance notice response effect operation valid period timer counter for each advance notice effect. Further, the update (subtraction) of the numerical value of the advance notice response effect operation valid period timer counter set in step 1608 is executed in the timer update process (S1616) described later.

When the standby flag erasing process in step 1609 is executed, when it is determined in step 1606 that the notice response effect effect operation valid period wait flag is not stored (S1606: NO), or in step 1607, the notice response effect effect operation valid period wait timer When it is determined that the counter is not 0 (S1607: NO), it is determined whether or not the effect unit operation valid period standby flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 154f of the audio side RAM 154 (S1610). Then, when it is determined that the effect unit operation valid period standby flag is stored (S1610: YES), it is determined whether or not the effect unit operation valid period timer counter is 0 (S1611), and the effect unit operation is performed. When it is determined that the valid period timer counter is 0 (S1611: YES), the operation valid period is set in the effect unit operation valid period timer counter stored in the effect unit operation valid period timer counter area 154c of the audio side RAM 154. It is set (S1612), and the effect unit operation valid period standby flag is cleared (S1613).

The effect unit operation valid period wait flag is stored in the display side command corresponding process (FIG. 45) described later, and the effect unit operation valid period standby timer counter waits in the display side command corresponding process (FIG. 45) described later. The period is set. Then, in the set process of step 1612, the corresponding effect unit operation valid period is set based on the effect pattern type in the main command correspondence process (FIG. 37) described later and the effect pattern stored in the stop symbol storage process (S1706). Read from the effect unit operation valid period storage area 153c of the audio side ROM 153, and set the read effect unit operation valid period in the effect unit operation valid period timer counter. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a common effect unit operation valid period for each effect may be set in the effect unit operation valid period timer counter. Further, the update (subtraction) of the numerical value of the effect unit operation validity period timer counter set in step 1612 is executed in the timer update process (S1616) described later.

When the standby flag erasing process in step 1613 is executed, when it is determined in step 1610 that the effect unit operation valid period wait flag is not stored (S1610: NO), or in step 1611, the effect unit operation valid period wait timer counter is set. When it is determined that the value is not 0 (S1611: NO), a light emission control process for controlling light emission of various light emitting units including the illumination unit 33 is executed (S1614), and voice control of the speaker unit 34 is performed. (S1615). The light emission control process and the voice control process are information for updating in the second frame button correspondence process in step 1605, the main command correspondence process (FIG. 38) described later, or the display side command correspondence process (FIG. 45) described later. If is set, it is executed based on the information. Further, in the light emission control process and the voice control process, when the process of step 1609 or the process of step 1613 is performed (the advance notice response effect operation valid period is started, or the effect unit operation valid period is started), the effect unit operation valid period is started. Light emission data and audio output data corresponding to the effect displayed on the display screen 80a are read from various data table storage areas 153a, and the data is executed based on the read data. As a result, light emission control and voice control corresponding to the effect displayed on the display screen 80a are executed. Subsequently, a timer update process for collectively updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the audio side RAM 154 is executed (S1616).

Next, it is determined whether or not the first frame button 26 has been operated (S1617). Whether or not the first frame button 26 has been operated is determined by a signal from the first frame button detection sensor 26a that monitors the operation of the first frame button 26. Then, when it is determined that the first frame button 26 has been operated (S1617: YES), the timer interrupt process is terminated as it is after the first frame button corresponding process is executed (S1618). The process corresponding to the first frame button will be described in detail later, but the audio side MPU 152 performs various processes according to the time of operation, and during a predetermined period, the first effect unit 310 and the second effect unit 320. , And a process of moving a movable object in the third effect unit 330. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first frame button 26 has not been operated (S1617: NO), the timer interrupt process is terminated as it is.

Next, the main command correspondence process in step 1603 in the timer interrupt process of the voice MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. 37 and 38 are flowcharts showing main command correspondence processing.

First, it is determined whether or not a change command and a type command are received from the main MPU 112 (S1701), and if it is determined that these commands are received (S1701: YES), the game result is stored. Is executed (S1702). Specifically, the variation display time determined by the main MPU 112 at the start of this game round is specified from the variation command, the presence or absence of reach occurs from the variation display time, and the normal reach when reach occurs. Alternatively, which of the super reach is specified, and the process of writing the specified information to the retained data area 154e provided in the voice side RAM 154 is executed. In addition, from the information included in the type command, information on which is the result of the winning / failing lottery and the distribution lottery determined by the main MPU 112 at the start of the current game round, that is, the game of the current game round. Information on whether or not the result is a winning result, and if it is a winning result (winning in the winning or losing lottery), information on which winning result is specified, and the specified information is stored in the retained data area provided in the audio side RAM 154. The process of writing to 154e is executed. As described above, the retained data area 154e is data that is temporarily used to execute the effects during the game rotation and the open / close execution mode, and the notification, and after these effects and notifications are started. Is also an area for storing and holding data to be independently used by the voice side MPU 152.

Next, the advance notice lottery process is executed (S1703). In the advance notice lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to display the advance notice on the symbol display device 80 in this game round. As this notice display, as described above, in a situation where the symbol is variablely displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 after the symbol display device 80 starts the variable display of the symbol, or a part of the notice display. In a situation where the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a plurality of symbol rows, the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the background screen is the previous mode. It also includes those having different predetermined modes and those in which the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have different predetermined modes from the previous modes. The notice display can occur in both the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the case where the reach display is performed is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability. Further, in the advance notice lottery process, the advance notice display is more likely to occur in the game times corresponding to any of the winning results than in the game times corresponding to the missed results, and the advance notice display having a lower appearance rate is more likely to occur. A notice lottery will be held.

Next, the stop symbol determination process is executed (S1704). In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of this game round is a 16R probability variation hit result and a 4R probability variation hit result, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same symbol combination is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is displayed. It will be decided as the information of the result of this stop. In this case, the same symbol type and effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

Subsequently, a process for determining the effect pattern of the current game times is executed (S1705). In this process, the information on the variation display time of the game times is specified from the contents of the variation command and the type command received this time, the information on the variation display time, the information on the game result specified in step 1702 above, and the information on the game result specified in step 1702 above. An effect pattern corresponding to the combination of the lottery result information of the advance notice lottery process in step 1703 is selected.

Next, a process of writing the type of the stop symbol determined in step 1704 and the type of effect pattern selected in step 1705 to the holding data area 154e of the voice side RAM 154 is executed (S1706). Since the effect pattern includes information on the variable display time of the game times this time, by writing the information on the effect pattern in the holding data area 154e, not only the information on the effect pattern but also the information on the variable display time can be obtained. However, the audio side MPU 152 can be read again. Further, the voice side MPU 152 can grasp again whether or not the current game round is a winning result from the type of the stop symbol.

Subsequently, a stop result command corresponding to the processing result of step 1704 and a pattern command corresponding to the processing result of step 1705 are transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S1707). The processing content of the display side MPU 162 due to the reception of this command will be described later.

Next, the update process of the number of games is executed (S1708). In this update process, a process for updating the game count counter is executed so that the number of digested games measured by the game counters provided in the various counter areas 154 g of the voice side RAM 154 is added by 1. The number of digested games is the number of games that have been digested after the end of the open / close execution mode without shifting to the open / close execution mode again. In the voice side MPU 152, the information on the number of digested games can be used when determining the content of the effect. Execute the processing that becomes.

If it is determined that the change command and the type command have not been received (S1701: NO), or after the game count update process has been executed, it is determined whether or not the fixed stop (final stop display) command has been received. (S1709). Then, when it is determined that the confirmation stop command has been received (S1709: YES), the symbol stop command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S1710). The symbol stop command is a command for instructing the display side MPU 162 to make the stop symbol corresponding to the current game round stand by on the effective lines L1 to L5 and maintain the state for the fixed stop time.

If it is determined that the fixed stop command has not been received (S1709: NO), or after the process of transmitting the symbol stop command has been executed, as shown in FIG. 38, whether or not the opening command has been received is determined. Judgment (S1801). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S1801: YES), the update process for the number of hits is executed (S1802). In the update process, a process for updating the hit count counter is executed so that the number of hits measured by the hit count counters provided in various counter areas 154 g of the voice side RAM 154 is added by 1. The number of hits in the pachinko machine 10 is the number of hit results (so-called continuous hits) that occur after shifting to the high-frequency support mode without shifting to the low-frequency support mode. In the audio side MPU 152, the information on the number of hits can be used when determining the content of the effect. For example, if the number of hits is a predetermined number or more, a corresponding effect such as a predetermined live-action image in the open / close execution mode can be produced. To be executed.

Next, the opening correspondence process is executed (S1803). In the opening correspondence process, the type of the hit result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode included in the opening command received this time is specified, and the effect content in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the type of the hit result is determined. Execute the processing for. For example, the hit result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode this time is the 16R probability variation hit result, and in the game round immediately before that, the symbol display device 80 does not use the same odd-numbered symbol combination, but the same even-numbered symbol. When the final stop display of the combination is displayed, an effect including a content for making the player recognize that it is a 16R probability variation hit result is determined as an effect during the opening / closing execution mode this time. That is, in the production of the game times, the hit result with low game value is confirmed and displayed, but in the subsequent hit production, the hit promotion effect indicating that the hit is a hit with high game value is determined as the effect in the open / close execution mode. do.

As already described here, in the holding data area 154e of the audio side RAM 154, information on the game result and information on the type of the stop symbol of the game times in the symbol display device 80 are stored with respect to the effect for the game times. , When the open / close execution mode is entered following the execution of the game times, the game result information and the stop symbol type information stored in the retained data area 154e are cleared when the open / close execution mode ends. .. Therefore, even if the opening command does not include the information of the display content of the symbol display device 80 in the immediately preceding game round, it is possible to execute the effect including the promotion content in the open / close execution mode as described above. ..

Further, in the opening corresponding process of step 1803, the number of hits after the update in step 1802 is specified, and the effect according to the specified number of hits is set as the effect in the opening / closing execution mode this time.

Next, an opening command corresponding to the processing result of step 1803 is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S1804). The processing content of the display side MPU 162 due to the reception of the command will be described later.

When it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S1801: NO), or after the process of transmitting the opening command has been executed, it is determined whether or not the release command has been received (S1805). When it is determined that the release command has been received (S1805: YES), the display side MPU 162 is notified that the variable winning device 56 has been newly started to open, that is, one round game has been newly started. A release command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 for recognition (S1806). The processing content of the display side MPU 162 due to the reception of the release command will be described later.

When it is determined that the release command has not been received (S1805: NO), or after the process of transmitting the release command is executed, it is determined whether or not the close command has been received (S1807). When it is determined that the closing command has been received (S1807: YES), the display is displayed so that the display side MPU 162 recognizes that the variable winning device 56 has been closed, that is, that one round game has been completed. A closure command is sent to the side MPU 162 (S1808). The processing content of the display side MPU 162 due to the reception of the command will be described later.

When it is determined that the closing command has not been received (S1807: NO), or after the process of transmitting the closing command has been executed, it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S1809). If it is determined that the ending command has been received (S1809: YES), the ending correspondence process is executed (S1810). In the ending correspondence process, the content of the winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode included in the ending command received this time is specified, and the processing for determining the content of the ending effect corresponding to the type of the winning / losing lottery mode is executed. do. In the present embodiment, since the high-probability mode is always set after the opening / closing execution mode, the effect including the content for making the player recognize that the high-probability mode is set is determined as the ending effect of this time.

Subsequently, an ending command corresponding to the processing result of step 1810 is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S1811). The processing content of the display side MPU 162 due to the reception of the command will be described later.

When it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S1809: NO), or after the process of transmitting the ending command has been executed, it is determined whether or not the notification command has been received (S1812). When it is determined that the notification command is being received (S1812: YES), it means that an event to be notified such as some abnormality or a state change of the pachinko machine 10 has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. In order to perform the notification, the light emission data is read out from the various data table storage areas 153a (S1813), and the audio output data is read out (S1814). As a result, in the light emission control process (S1614) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36), the light emission control of the illumination unit 33 is performed so that light emission is performed according to the light emission data, and the sound output of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36) is performed. In the control process (S1615), the voice output control of the speaker unit 34 is performed so that the sound is output according to the voice output data. After that, the notification command corresponding to the content of the notification command received this time is transmitted to the display control device 93 (S1815). When the display control device 93 receives the command, the display control device 93 displays and controls the symbol display device 80 so that the notification corresponding to the notification command is performed.

When it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S1812: NO), or after the process of transmitting the notification command has been executed, it is determined whether or not the release command has been received (S1816). The release command is transmitted from the main MPU 112 when the event that triggered the transmission of the notification command is resolved. Therefore, when it is determined that the release command has been received (S1816: YES), it means that the event to be notified such as the abnormality that has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 has been canceled. In order to cancel the notification, the release setting process is executed (S1817). After that, the release command corresponding to the content of the release command received this time is transmitted to the display control device 93 (S1818). When the display control device 93 receives the command, the display control device 93 controls the display of the symbol display device 80 so as to end the execution of the notification corresponding to the release command.

When it is determined that the release command has not been received (S1816: NO), or after the release command has been transmitted and other corresponding processing is executed (S1819), the main command correspondence process is terminated. In other corresponding processing, for example, when the hold command is received, the hold command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162, and when the shift time command is received, the shift time command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162. .. As a result, in the first and second reserved symbol display areas Dt, Ds and the execution reserved symbol display area Du in the symbol display device 80, the reserved area in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 114b of the main RAM 114 is stored. A predetermined reserved symbol is displayed in the corresponding display area. Further, it is determined whether or not the demo start command is received, and if the demo start command is received, the demo start command is transmitted to the display control device 93. As a result, the demo display is started on the symbol display device 80.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the display side MPU 162 will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the display side MPU 162, and this V interrupt processing is repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle, specifically, a 20 msec cycle.

When the VDP165 of the display control device 93 outputs the image signal for one frame to the symbol display device 80, the VDP165 starts to output the image signal from the dot in the upper left corner of the front view of the display screen 80a, and the dot is the dot. The image signals are sequentially output to the dots lined up on the horizontal line including one end, and the image signals are output to the dots from left to right in order from the top for each horizontal line, and the front view right of the display screen 80a. Finally, the image signal is output for the dots in the lower corner. In this case, the VDP 165 outputs a V interrupt signal to the display side MPU 162 at the timing when the image signal is output for the last dot, and causes the display side MPU 162 to recognize that the update of the image of one frame is completed. The output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec. In this respect, the V interrupt process can be regarded as being activated in synchronization with the reception of the V interrupt signal.

However, even if the V interrupt signal is not received, if 20 msec has elapsed since the previous V interrupt process was started, the V interrupt process is newly started. Further, as described above, when no data is set in each unit area RE1 to RE4, RF1 to RF4, and RG of the reserved symbol display area 167a (data meaning a blank is set), the reserved symbol is displayed. No image is displayed in the reserved symbol display areas Ds, Dt, and Du of the display screen 80a corresponding to the unit areas RE1 to RE4, RF1 to RF4, and RG of the use area 167a, or on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. The background image is displayed.

In the V interrupt process, first, the content of the command stored in the command storage area 164a of the work RAM 164 is analyzed (S1901). In the command storage area 164a, commands are sequentially stored by a command storage process that is activated when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 92. This command storage area 164a is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored command, and even if a plurality of commands are received at the same time, they are used. The processing corresponding to each command can be executed well.

Subsequently, based on the analysis result of step 1901, it is determined whether or not a new command is being received (S1902), and if it is determined that a new command is being received (S1902: YES), the command correspondence process is performed. Execute (S1903).

Here, the command correspondence process of step 1903 in the V interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing command correspondence processing.

In the command correspondence process, first, it is determined whether or not the stop result command and the pattern command are received (S2001). When it is determined that the stop result command and the pattern command have been received (S2001: YES), the pattern data table corresponding to the combination of the stop result command and the pattern command is read from the data table storage area 163b of the program ROM 163. After executing the data table setting process for the pattern to be written to the work RAM 164 (S2002), the process corresponding to this command is terminated.

The pattern data table is necessary to display an image for one frame at each update timing of the image when the moving image corresponding to the effect for the game round is displayed on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. It is a group of information for which various processes are defined. That is, in the pattern data table, information groups corresponding to each frame (frame update cycle is 20 msec) from the start timing to the end timing in the production for this game round are defined.

Here, the pattern data table will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 41. Note that FIG. 41 is a display (FIG. 41) that prompts the player to operate (press) the first frame button 26 in order to move the specific movable portion 341 (specific unit 340) on the display screen 80a after the super reach is reached (FIG. 41). It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the pattern data table in which (see 51) is performed.

As shown in FIG. 41, pointer information for the number of frames corresponding to the variable display time of the target game times is set in the pattern data table, and the content of the task is set according to each pointer information. Information, information on the presence / absence of command output, and information on additional data are set.

The task content information is information that is set to display the video corresponding to this game time, and unless information that does not reflect the task content information at all is set as additional data, each An image corresponding to the task content information is displayed in the frame.
In the information of the content of the task, information of parameters necessary for giving a drawing instruction to the VDP 165 in order to display an image for one frame at the corresponding update timing is set.

Regarding the pattern data table shown in FIG. 41, specifically, the data at the start of fluctuation is set in the pointer information of "0", and the pointer information of "200" is set as a notice effect (for example, a conversation effect or a character effect). ) The data at the start is set, the data at the end of the notice effect is set in the pointer information of "300", the data at the start of normal reach is set in the pointer information of "400", and "700". The data at the start of super reach is set in the pointer information of "850", and various production units 310 to 330 can be moved in response to the operation of the first frame button 26 in the pointer information of "850" at the start of the operation validity period of the production unit. The data at the end of the effect period is set in the pointer information of "950", and the data at the end of the fluctuation is set in the pointer information of "1000". Each of these pointer information corresponds to a delimiter timing such as the start of the effect, the switching of the effect, and the end of the effect. Further, in the pointer information other than these, data for enabling the moving image display between the break timings is set.

The information on the presence / absence of command output is information indicating the presence / absence of command output from the display side MPU 162 to the voice side MPU 152 and the type of the command. In this way, by outputting a command from the display side MPU 162 to the audio side MPU 152 at a predetermined timing according to the content of the moving image, various light emitting units including the illumination unit 33 produce light according to the content of the image. At the same time, the speaker unit 34 can execute the effect of audio output according to the content of the image.

Specifically, regarding the pattern data table shown in FIG. 41, command data is set for the pointer information of "0" in which the data at the start of fluctuation is set in the content of the task. Therefore, at the start of the fluctuation of the game times, light emission control, voice control, and the like are started in the voice side MPU 152 based on the command transmission from the display side MPU 162 to the voice side MPU 152 (FIGS. 36, S1614, S1615). In addition, in the content of the task, the data at the start of the advance notice effect, the data at the start of the normal reach, the data at the start of the super reach, the data at the start of the effect period of the effect unit operation, and the data at the end of the fluctuation are set respectively. Pointer information at the timing of the number of frames (pointers) for advance transmission before the pointer information, specifically, "198", "398", "698", "848", "948", "998" Command data is set for each pointer information of. Therefore, commands are transmitted from the display side MPU 162 to the voice side MPU 152 in advance for the break timing other than the start of the fluctuation of the game times, and the display contents of the display screen 80a and the light emission control and the voice output control are performed at these break timings. It is possible to completely synchronize with the contents of.

The information of the additional data is set as blank as the initial setting of the pattern data table, and when the notification command is received, the advance notice response effect command described later is received, and the specific unit movable effect command described later is received. In such a case, the process of writing to the additional data is executed. When writing to the additional data is performed, the information written in the additional data has priority over the information originally set in the content of the task.

Returning to the explanation of the command correspondence process (FIG. 40), if it is determined that the stop result command and the pattern command have not been received (S2001: NO), it is determined whether or not the fixed stop command has been received (S2003). ). If it is determined that the fixed stop command has been received (S2003: YES), the fixed stop setting process is executed (S2004), and then the command corresponding process is terminated. In the setting process for fixed stop, the data table for statically displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the current game round until the period during the fixed stop display elapses is read from the data table storage area 163b of the program ROM 163, and the work RAM 164 Executes the process of writing to.

When it is determined that the confirmation stop command has not been received (S2003: NO), it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S2005). When it is determined that the opening command has been received (S2005: YES), the setting process of reading the opening data table corresponding to the opening command from the program ROM 163 and writing it to the work RAM 164 is executed (S2006). Terminate command handling processing.

The opening data table is used to display an image for one frame at each update timing of the image when displaying a moving image corresponding to the effect for the opening / closing execution mode on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. This is a group of information that defines the processing required for.
The data structure of the opening data table is basically the same as that of the pattern data table.

In the data table for the opening, the contents of the production are defined during each round game and during the interval period between the round games from the start of the opening effect. In this case, the data during the round game is set to retain the image of the loop or the last update timing until the end of the corresponding round game, and similarly, the data during the interval ends the corresponding interval. It is set to retain the image of the loop or the last update timing until. Then, the range of information to be referred to in the opening data table is switched according to the reception of the open command or the close command.

When it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2005: NO), it is determined whether or not any of the open command and the close command has been received (S2007). If it is determined that any of the commands has been received (S2007: YES), the processing corresponding to this command is terminated after the setting processing at the time of opening / closing is executed (S2008). In the setting process at the time of opening and closing, the range of information to be referred to in the opening data table is switched according to the content of the received command.

When it is determined that the open command and the close command have not been received (S2007: NO), it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S2009). When it is determined that the ending command has been received (S2009: YES), after executing the setting process of reading the ending data table corresponding to the ending command from the program ROM 163 and writing it to the work RAM 164 (S2010), this Terminate command handling processing.

The data table for the ending is necessary to display one frame of the image at each update timing of the image when the moving image corresponding to the effect for the ending this time is displayed on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. It is a group of information for which various processes are defined. The data structure of the ending data table is basically the same as that of the pattern data table.

If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S2009: NO), another corresponding process (S2011) is executed, and then this command corresponding process is terminated.

Next, another corresponding process will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing another corresponding process.

In the separate handling process, first, it is determined whether or not the notification command is received (S2101). If it is determined that the notification command has been received (S2101: YES), the notification data setting process is executed (S2102), and then the corresponding processing for each is terminated. In the notification data setting process, the notification data corresponding to the content of the notification included in the current notification command is written to the work RAM 164 as additional data of the currently set data table.
As a result, when the image is updated next time, the content of the notification data is reflected, and for example, a character image corresponding to the type of the notification target event is added to the effect image for the game round and the effect image for the open / close execution mode.

When it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S2101: NO), it is determined whether or not the release command has been received (S2103). If it is determined that the release command has been received (S2103: YES), the notification data clearing process is executed (S2104), and then the corresponding processing is terminated. In the notification data clearing process, among the notification data currently set in the additional data in the data table, the notification corresponding to the type of notification target event set as the notification release target in the release command received this time Execute the process to clear the data. As a result, when the image is updated next time, the notification of the type to be released is canceled.

When it is determined that the release command has not been received (S2103: NO), it is determined whether or not the advance notice response effect command has been received (S2105), and it is determined that the advance notice response effect command has been received. (S2105: YES), the setting process of the advance notice response effect data is executed (S2106), and the corresponding processing for each of the present is terminated. In this advance notice response effect data setting process, response effect data corresponding to the content of the present advance notice effect (operation effect) is written as additional data (see FIG. 41) of the currently set data table. As a result, after the next image update timing, the response effect to the advance notice effect is started. For example, as a notice effect, two (two) character symbols are displayed, and an effect calling from one character symbol toward the other character symbol is displayed, and the first frame is displayed in the vicinity of the other character symbol. It is assumed that the symbol corresponding to the button 26 is displayed. When the advance notice response effect command is received in this state, the response effect (effect corresponding to the call) from the other character symbol to one character symbol is displayed.

The notice response effect command is a command transmitted from the voice side MPU 152 when the first frame button 26 is operated during the notice response effect operation valid period in the first frame button correspondence process (FIG. 46) described later. be. Further, in the data table of the game times, as the content of the first task, the data of the content when the advance notice response effect command is not received is set.
Therefore, when the advance notice response effect command is not received, the display control is performed according to the content of the task as it is, so that the effect when the advance notice response effect command is not received is displayed. In addition, the content of the advance notice response effect can be changed arbitrarily, and the conversation effect has been described above as an example. However, for example, a new character pattern, a moving image, or the like is displayed by receiving the advance notice response effect command. You may do so.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the advance notice response effect command has not been received (S2105: NO), it is determined whether or not the specific unit movable effect command has been received (S2107). If it is determined that the specific unit movable effect command has been received (S2107: YES), the specific unit movable effect data setting process is executed (S2108), and then the corresponding processing for each is terminated. In the setting process of the specific unit movable effect data, the specific unit movable effect data corresponding to the movable effect of the specific unit 340 (specific movable unit 341) is written. As a result, after the next image update timing, the effect (display) corresponding to the movement of the specific unit 340 is started.

The specific unit movable effect command may be transmitted from the audio side MPU 152 when the first frame button 26 is operated during the effect unit operation valid period in the first frame button corresponding process (FIG. 46) described later. It is a command with. Further, in the data table of the game times, as the content of the first task, the data of the content when the specific unit movable effect command is not received (the specific unit 340 does not move) is set. Therefore, when the specific unit movable effect command is not received, the display control is performed according to the content of the task as it is, so that the effect when the specific unit movable effect command is not received is displayed. Further, the content when the specific unit movable effect command is received can be arbitrarily changed. For example, when the specific movable portion 341 moves to the substantially central portion (fourth position) of the display screen 80a, the player specifies the specific unit. A background image that makes it easier to pay attention to the movable portion 341, an outline along the outer shape of the specific movable portion 341, and the like are displayed.

If it is determined that the specific unit movable effect command has not been received (S2107: NO), the other corresponding processing is executed (S2109), and then the corresponding processing is terminated. In the other corresponding processing, for example, it is determined whether or not the hold command is received, and when it is determined that the hold command is received, the display of the hold information on the symbol display device 80 corresponds to the increase in the number of holds. The process of writing the information to be changed to the work RAM 164 is executed. Since the hold command includes hold information for winning a prize at any of the starting ports 54 and 55, the display of the number of holds on the winning side is increased on the display screen 80a.

Further, it is determined whether or not the shift command is received, and if it is determined that the shift command is received, the shift setting process is performed. In the setting process at the time of shift, the information for shifting the reserved symbol information set in each unit area RE1 to RE4 and RF1 to RF4 of the reserved symbol display area 167a to the lower area side or the execution unit area RG is transmitted to the work RAM 164. Write. Specifically, since the shift command includes information on which reserved symbol information is to be shifted, when shifting the reserved symbol information in the first reserved symbol display area RE, the first Unit area RE1 → Execution unit area RG is written with information to shift the reserved symbol information, 2nd unit area RE2 → 1st unit area RE1, 3rd unit area RE3 → 2nd unit area RE2, 4th unit area RE4 → Specifically, information for shifting the reserved symbol information in each unit area, such as the third unit area RE3, is written. Similarly, when shifting the second reserved symbol display area RF, the information for shifting the reserved symbol information is written in the first unit area RF1 → the execution unit area RG, and the second unit area RF2 → the first unit area RF1. , 3rd unit area RF3 → 2nd unit area RF2, 4th unit area RF4 → 3rd unit area RF3, etc. Specifically, information for shifting the reserved symbol information in each unit area is written. As a result, the reserved symbols in the lower display area Dn are shifted one by one to the reserved symbol display area having a smaller number.

Further, it is determined whether or not the demo start command is received, and if the demo start command is received, the data table for displaying the demo is read from the data table storage area 163b of the program ROM 163, and the work RAM 164 Executes the process of writing to. Further, it is determined whether or not the stage change command is received, and if the stage change command is received, a data table corresponding to the display mode of the symbol display device 80 is obtained from the data table storage area 163b of the program ROM 163. The process of reading and writing to the work RAM 164 is executed. As a result, for example, when the variable display of the game times is not displayed, the background stage is changed to another background stage and displayed. It should be noted that this stage change command is a command that may be transmitted from the voice side MPU 152 in the first frame button correspondence process (FIG. 46) described later.

Returning to the description of the V interrupt process (FIG. 39), when it is determined that there is no new command (S1902: NO), or when the command corresponding process in step 1903 is executed, the pointer update process is executed (S1904). In the pointer update process, the pointer information set in the data table is updated so as to advance by one frame. As a result, it becomes possible for the display side MPU 162 to grasp the processing necessary for displaying the image for one frame corresponding to the update timing this time.

Next, the task process is executed (S1905). Here, the task processing will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a task process executed by the display side MPU 162.

In the task processing, first, it is determined whether or not additional data exists in the area corresponding to the information of the pointer this time in the data table (S2201), and when it is determined that the additional data does not exist (S2201). : NO), the task data of the pointer this time is read from the data table (S2202). Then, after executing the parameter derivation process for calculating the parameters necessary for giving the drawing instruction to the VDP 165 in order to display the image for one frame corresponding to the update timing this time based on the read task data (S2203). ), End this task processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the data table that additional data exists in the area corresponding to the pointer information this time (S2201: YES), whether or not the additional data is additional data to the image of the task data. Is determined (S2204). When it is determined that the data is additional data (S2204: YES), the task data and additional data of the pointer this time are read from the data table (S2205). Then, in order to display the image for one frame corresponding to the update timing this time based on the read task data and the additional data, after performing the calculation of the parameters necessary for giving the drawing instruction to the VDP 165 (S2206). , End this task processing. In addition, the case where the processing of step 2205 and step 2206 is executed includes the case where the character image of the notification is added.

When it is determined that the additional data is not the additional data (S2204: NO), the additional data of the pointer this time is read from the data table (S2207). Then, after executing the parameter derivation process for calculating the parameters necessary for giving the drawing instruction to the VDP 165 in order to display the image for one frame corresponding to the update timing this time based on the read additional data ( S2208), this task processing is terminated. When the processes of steps 2207 and 2208 are executed, there are cases where a response effect to the advance notice effect is displayed (FIG. 42, S2106), a case where a specific unit movable effect is displayed (FIG. 42, S2108), and the like. Can be mentioned.

Returning to the explanation of the V interrupt process (FIG. 39), after executing the task process of step 1905, whether or not the command data exists in the area of the data table where there is no command output corresponding to the information of the pointer this time. Is determined to determine whether or not the command output timing is reached (see S1906, FIG. 41). If the command data exists, it is determined that it is the command output timing (S1906: YES), and the command setting process is executed (S1907).

Here, the command setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a command setting process.

In the command setting process, first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the advance notice response effect operation valid period (S2301). That is, it is determined whether or not the pointer is "198" (see FIG. 41). Then, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the notice response effect operation valid period (S2301: YES), after the notice response effect operation valid period start command is transmitted to the voice side MPI 52 (S2302), this command setting process ends. do.

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the advance notice response effect effect period (S2301: NO), it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the effect unit operation valid period (S2303). That is, it is determined whether or not the pointer is "948". If it is determined that it is the effect unit operation valid period start timing (S2303: YES), the effect unit operation valid period start command is transmitted to the audio side MPU 152 (S2304), and then this command setting process is terminated.

The warning response effect operation valid period start command in step 2302 and the effect unit operation valid period start command in step 2304 contain information indicating how many frames after the output timing of the command, each effect should be started. include.
As a result, even if the advance notice response effect effect operation valid period start command and the effect unit operation valid period start command are transmitted at a timing earlier than the actual start timing, the voice side MPU 152 starts each effect on the symbol display device 80. It is possible to start the target effect on the light emitting unit including the illumination unit 33 and the speaker unit 34 in synchronization with the above.

If it is determined that it is not the start timing of the operation valid period of the effect unit (S2303: NO), the command setting process is terminated after the other command setting process is executed (S2305). In other command setting processes, a command indicating that the production of the game times should be started, a command indicating that the normal reach should be started, a command indicating that the super reach should be started, a command indicating that the fluctuation should be ended, and so on. A command indicating that the effect of the open / close execution mode should be started, a command indicating that the effect of the round game should be started, a command indicating that the effect of the interval between the round games should be started, and the effect of the ending should be started. A command indicating that, a command indicating that the demo display should be started, and the like are transmitted to the audio side MPU 152 according to the respective timings.

In this case, a command indicating that normal reach should be started, a command indicating that super reach should be started, a command indicating that the opening / closing execution mode production should be started, and a command indicating that the round game production should be started. , The command indicating that the effect of the interval between round games should be started, and the command indicating that the effect of the ending should be started include the contents of the type of the effect.

In addition, the command indicating that the normal reach should be started, the command indicating that the super reach should be started, the command indicating that the fluctuation should be ended, and the command indicating that the production of the round game should be started are applicable. It contains information indicating how many frames after the command output timing the target production should start. As a result, even if these commands are transmitted at a timing before the start timing of the target effect of each command, the voice side MPU 152 synchronizes with the start of the target effect on the symbol display device 80 and transmits electricity. It is possible to start the target effect on the light emitting unit including the decoration unit 33 and the speaker unit 34.

Returning to the explanation of the V interrupt process (FIG. 39), when it is determined that the command output timing is not reached (S1906: NO), or when the command setting process of step 1907 is executed, after the drawing list output process is executed (S1908). ), Ends this V interrupt process. In the drawing list output processing, a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of this processing time is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to VDP165.
In this case, in the drawing list, the image grasped in the immediately preceding task process is the drawing target, and the parameter information updated in the task process is also set. The VDP 165 creates drawing data in the frame area of the video RAM 167 according to this drawing list, and outputs a signal to the symbol display device 80 according to the drawing data created in the frame area. As a result, the image of one frame is displayed on the symbol display device 80.

In the present embodiment, when the image corresponding to the pointer information of "850" is displayed on the display screen 80a (when the effect period is valid for the production unit to be described later), "the button is repeatedly pressed to drop the specific movable portion. The characters "Let's do it !!", the design indicating the first frame button 26, and the indicator M are also displayed (see FIG. 51).

Next, the display side command correspondence process in step 1604 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36) of the voice side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the display side command correspondence process.

In the display-side command correspondence process, first, it is determined whether or not the advance notice response effect effect operation valid period start command is received (S2401). Then, when it is determined that the advance notice response effect operation valid period start command has been received (S2401: YES), the advance notice response effect operation valid period standby flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 154f of the voice side RAM 154 (S2401: YES). S2402), a process of setting a waiting period in the warning response effect effect valid period waiting timer counter stored in various counter areas 154g of the voice side RAM 154 is executed (S2403). That is, as described above, the advance notice response effect operation valid period start command is transmitted before the display side MPU 162 starts displaying the advance notice effect, but the advance notice response effect operation valid period start command outputs the command. Information indicating how many frames after the timing (reception timing) the advance notice response effect operation valid period starts is included. Therefore, the waiting period from the reception of the advance notice response effect operation valid period start command to the actual start of the advance notice response effect operation valid period is set. By setting the standby period in step 2403 in this way, if an affirmative determination is made in step 1607 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36), the light emission control process and step 1614 in step 1614 are performed at the timing corresponding to the display content of the display screen 80a. 1615 voice control processing is executed. The numerical value of the advance notice response effect operation valid period standby timer counter set in step 2403 is updated (subtracted) by the timer update process in step 1616 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36).

When the standby period setting process of step 2403 is executed, or when it is determined in step 2401 that the advance notice response effect operation valid period start command has not been received (S2401: NO), the effect unit operation valid period start command is issued. It is determined whether or not the command is received (S2404). Then, when it is determined that the effect unit operation valid period start command is received (S2404: YES), the effect unit operation valid period standby flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 154f of the audio side RAM 154 (S2405). , The process of setting the standby period in the effect unit operation valid period standby timer counter stored in the various counter areas 154 g of the audio side RAM 154 is executed (S2406). That is, as described above, the effect unit operation valid period start command is transmitted before the display side MPU 162 starts displaying the instruction to operate the first frame button 26, but the effect unit operation valid period start command is sent. , Information indicating how many frames after the output timing (reception timing) of the command is started for the effect unit operation valid period is included. Therefore, the waiting period from the reception of the effect unit operation valid period start command to the actual start of the effect unit operation valid period is set. By setting the standby period in step 2406 in this way, if an affirmative determination is made in step 1611 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36), the light emission control process and step 1614 in step 1614 are performed at a timing corresponding to the display content of the display screen 80a. 1615 voice control processing is executed. The numerical value of the effect unit operation valid period standby timer counter set in step 2406 is updated (subtracted) by the timer update process in step 1616 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36).

When the set processing of the waiting period in step 2406 is executed, or when it is determined in step 2404 that the effect unit operation valid period start command has not been received (S2404: NO), after executing other corresponding processing (S2407). ), Ends the processing corresponding to this display side command. In other corresponding processes, a command indicating that normal reach should be started, a command indicating that super reach should be started, a command indicating that fluctuation should be ended, a command indicating that the production of a round game should be started, etc. Is received or not. Then, when it is determined that any of these commands has been received, how many frames should the received command start the target effect after the output timing (reception timing) of the command? Since the information indicating the above is included, the standby period is set in various timer counters provided in the various counter areas 154 g.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the voice side MPU 152 exists on the upstream side of the communication with respect to the display side MPU 162 when the main side MPU 112 is used as a reference, but the voice side MPU 152 has a command transmitted from the display side MPU 162. Control of the production is also performed based on. Therefore, between the light emitting effect and the sound effect executed by the audio side MPU 152, the first to third effect unit movable effects described later, and the specific unit movable effect described later, and the display effect executed by the display side MPU 162. Misalignment is less likely to occur, and it is possible to preferably perform an effect using each effect means. The update (subtraction) of the numerical values of the various timer counters is executed in the timer update process of step 1616 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36).

Next, the process corresponding to the first frame button in step 1618 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36) of the audio side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. 46. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the processing corresponding to the first frame button.

In the first frame button correspondence process, first, the value of the advance notice response effect operation valid period timer counter provided in the voice side RAM 154 is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the advance notice response effect operation valid period timer counter is 0 ( S2501). That is, in step 1608 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36), since the operation valid period corresponding to the notice effect is set in the advance notice response effect operation valid period timer counter, is the advance notice response effect operation valid period timer counter 0? By determining whether or not it is, it is determined whether or not the operation of the first frame button 26 for the advance notice effect is valid.

Notice response effect operation valid period When it is determined that the timer counter is not 0 (S2501: NO), since the operation of the first frame button 26 for the notice effect is valid, the notice response effect command is sent to the display side MPU 162. Is transmitted (S2502). As a result, the display-side MPU 162 sets the response effect data for the advance notice effect in the advance notice response effect data setting process in step 2106 in the separate correspondence process (FIG. 42). Next, the advance notice response effect operation valid period timer counter is cleared to 0 (S2503). As a result, even if the advance notice response effect operation valid period set in the timer counter has not elapsed, the response effect for the advance notice effect is displayed on the display screen 80a (the advance notice response effect command is transmitted). After that), an affirmative judgment is made in step 2501. After that, the process corresponding to the first frame button is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the advance notice response effect operation valid period timer counter is 0 (S2501: YES), the value of the effect unit operation valid period timer counter provided in the audio side RAM 154 is acquired, and the effect unit operation valid period timer is acquired. It is determined whether or not the counter is 0 (S2504). Then, when it is determined that the effect period unit operation validity period timer counter is not 0 (S2504: NO), that is, the characters "Press the button repeatedly to drop the specific movable part !!" on the display screen 80a, the first frame button. When the symbol indicating 26 and the indicator M are displayed (see FIG. 51 (a)), the specific unit movable lottery process for determining whether or not to move the specific unit 340 is executed (S2505). In the present embodiment, as described above, the specific unit 340 (specific movable unit 341) is movable so that the player can detect (notify) that the game is a hit during the game. Is.
Here, the specific unit movable lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a specific unit movable lottery process.

In the specific unit movable lottery process, it is determined from the information stored in the retained data area 154e in step 1706 in the main command correspondence process (FIG. 37) whether or not this game is a winning result (S2601), and if it is not a winning result. If it is determined (S2601: NO), the process corresponding to the first frame button is terminated as it is. That is, if the game round this time is not a winning result, the specific unit movement process described later is not performed. In other words, when the specific unit movement process described later is executed (when the specific movable portion 341 moves (falls)), the player can detect that the current game round is the winning result.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game times this time is a winning result (S2601: YES), the value of the effect unit operation validity period timer counter acquired in step 2504 of the first frame button correspondence process (FIG. 46) is set. It is determined whether or not it is ½ or more of the value of the operation valid period set in step 1612 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36) (S2602). When it is determined that the acquired value is smaller than 1/2 of the set operation validity period value (S2602: NO), it is determined whether or not the acquired value is 1/4 or more of the set operation validity period value. (S2603). Then, when it is determined that the acquired value is ½ or more of the set operation valid period value (S2602: YES), the specific unit first movable lottery process is executed (S2604), and the acquired value is When it is determined that the value is smaller than 1/2 and 1/4 or more of the set operation valid period value (S2603: YES), the specific unit second movable lottery process is executed (S2605), and the acquired value is obtained. If it is determined that the value is smaller than 1/4 of the set operation valid period value (S2603: NO), the specific unit third movable lottery process is executed (S2606), and the specific unit movable lottery process is terminated.

In the specific unit first movable lottery process of step 2604, the specific unit second movable lottery process of step 2605, and the specific unit third movable lottery process of step 2606, first, the specific unit is specified from the various counter areas 154 g provided in the voice side RAM 154. Read the value of the movable lottery counter. Here, the specific unit movable lottery counter is configured to be able to store a counter value of "0 to 99", and is configured to add 1 in a predetermined cycle such as a 2 msec cycle and reach the maximum value. After that, it is initialized to 0.
Then, the specific unit movable lottery table stored in the various data table storage areas 153a of the voice side ROM 153 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the value of the read specific unit movable lottery counter is won.

More specifically, in the specific unit first movable lottery process, the specific unit movable lottery table that wins at 1/50 is referred to, and in the specific unit second movable lottery process, the specific unit movable that wins at 1/25. The lottery table is referred to, and in the specific unit third movable lottery process, the specific unit movable lottery table that wins at 1/10 is referred to. That is, when the game times are a winning result, it is difficult to win at the beginning of the operation validity period, and it becomes easier to win as the operation validity period elapses.

Returning to the explanation of the first frame button correspondence process (FIG. 46), it is determined whether or not the specific unit movable lottery process has been won (S2506), and if it is determined that the specific unit has been won (S2506: YES), the specific drive unit A specific unit movement process for moving the specific unit 340 by transmitting a drive signal to the 342c is executed (S2507). As a result, the specific movable portion 341 is movable (falling), and the entire specific movable portion 341 is arranged on the display screen 80a (see FIG. 51 (f)). Detect that there is.

Next, the specific unit movable effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S2508). As a result, the display side MPU 162 executes the setting process of the specific unit movable data in step 2108 of the separate corresponding process (FIG. 42), and displays the corresponding movement of the specific unit 340. Specifically, the characters "press the button repeatedly to drop the specific movable part !!" displayed on the display screen 80a, the symbol indicating the first frame button 26, and the indicator M are deleted, and the game is played. A background image that makes it easier for a person to pay attention to the specific movable portion 341, an outline along the outer shape of the specific movable portion 341, and the like are displayed.

Then, the value of the specific unit operation valid period timer counter is cleared to 0 (S2509). As a result, even if the effect unit operation valid period set in the effect unit operation valid period timer counter has not actually elapsed, an affirmative determination is made in step 2504 after the specific unit movable process is executed.

After clearing the value of the specific unit operation valid period timer counter in step 2509 to 0, or when it is determined in step 2506 that the specific unit movable lottery process was not won (S2506: NO), the effect unit movable process is executed (S2510). ). Here, the effect unit movable processing will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the effect unit movable processing.

In the effect unit movable process, first, the values of the first to third effect unit movable period timer counters stored in the various effect unit movable period timer counter areas 154d of the audio side RAM 154 are acquired (S2701). Next, it is determined whether or not the first effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2702). Then, when it is determined that the first effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2702: YES), that is, when it is determined that the first effect unit 310 is immovable (not movable), the first drive is performed. The first effect unit movement process for moving the first effect unit 310 by transmitting a drive signal to the unit 312c is executed (S2703).

Next, a process of acquiring the movable period of the first effect unit 310 from the various effect unit movable period storage areas 153d of the audio side ROM 153 and setting the movable period in the first effect unit movable period timer counter is executed (S2704). .. As a result, if the first frame button 26 is operated by the player when the first effect unit 310 is movable, a negative determination is made in step 2702.

When the set processing of the movable period of the first effect unit 310 in step 2704 is executed, or when it is determined in step 2702 that the value of the first effect unit movable period timer counter is not 0 (S2702: NO), the second It is determined whether or not the effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2705). Then, when it is determined that the second effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2705: YES), that is, when it is determined that the second effect unit 320 is not movable, a drive signal is sent to the second drive unit 322c. The second effect unit movable process of transmitting and moving the second effect unit 320 is executed (S2706).

Next, a process of acquiring the movable period of the second effect unit 320 from the various effect unit movable period storage areas 153d of the audio side ROM 153 and setting the movable period in the second effect unit movable period timer counter is executed (S2707). .. As a result, if the first frame button 26 is operated by the player when the second effect unit 320 is movable, a negative determination is made in step 2705.

When the set processing of the movable period of the second effect unit 320 in step 2707 is executed, or when it is determined that the value of the second effect unit movable period timer counter in step 2705 is not 0 (S2705: NO), the third It is determined whether or not the effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2708). Then, when it is determined that the third effect unit movable period timer counter is not 0 (S2708: YES), that is, when it is determined that the third effect unit 330 is not movable, a drive signal is transmitted to the third drive unit 332c. Then, the third effect unit movable process for moving the third effect unit 330 is executed (S2709).

Next, a process of acquiring the movable period of the third effect unit 330 from the various effect unit movable period storage areas 153d of the audio side ROM 153 and setting the movable period in the third effect unit movable period timer counter is executed (S2710). .. As a result, if the first frame button 26 is operated by the player when the third effect unit 330 is movable, a negative determination is made in step 2708. After executing the set process of step 2710, or when it is determined in step 2708 that the third effect unit movable period timer counter is not 0 (S2708: NO), the present effect unit movable process is terminated as it is.

In this way, in the present effect unit movable process, it is determined whether or not the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are movable, and they are not movable (not movable). ) Is individually moved.

Returning to the explanation of the first frame button correspondence process (FIG. 46), when it is determined that the effect unit operation validity period timer counter is 0 (S2504: YES), after executing the normal correspondence process (S2511), this The process corresponding to the first frame button is terminated. In this normal handling process, if the demo start command is received from the main MPU 112 (not in the game times and open / close execution mode), or if one unit of game times is processed, the game times fluctuate. The stage change command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 on condition that the display is stopped before the predetermined period (for example, before the predetermined period when the reach display is displayed). As a result, the display side MPU 162 changes and displays the background stage displayed on the display screen 80a in the order of "underwater stage"-> "beach stage"-> "city stage"-> "underwater stage".

The above is the control of the effect and the notification in the present embodiment. Next, with respect to the display mode of the special symbol when the effect unit operation valid period (first frame button operation valid period) is set in the game round, the effect unit operation valid period, and the display mode of the symbol display device 80, FIG. 49 Will be explained with reference to. FIG. 49 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the display mode of the special symbol, the effective period of operation of the effect unit, and the display mode of the symbol display device 80. Note that T2, T3, T4, and T6 in the display mode of the symbol display device 80 correspond to each time point in the operation valid period. Further, in the present embodiment, the effect period for operating the effect unit is set after developing into super reach as described above.

First, at the timing of the time point T1, when the game round in which the effect unit operation valid period is set is started, the normal fluctuation of each symbol sequence that has been stopped and displayed is started. Then, the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed, and then the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and displayed at the time point T2 (see FIG. 6). At this time, the same main symbol is stopped and displayed on any of the above effective lines L1 to L5 to form a reach line, resulting in normal reach (in FIG. 49, three symbols are stopped and displayed on the effective line L2). .. Then, after the symbol string Z2 in the middle row is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period, the super reach is started at the time point T3. The super reach is, for example, an effect mode in which the display of the shell symbol shown in FIG. 7 (j) is deleted and the symbol row Z2 in the middle row is enlarged and displayed in a variable manner.

Then, at the time point T4, when the effect unit operation valid period is reached, the characters "Press the button repeatedly to drop the specific movable part !!", the pattern indicating the first frame button 26, and the operation valid period are displayed on the display screen 80a. An indicator M (hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as a button operation instruction) is displayed. In the present embodiment, the indicator M is configured so that the display color of the indicator M changes based on the decrease in the operation validity period (see FIG. 51). Specifically, the indicator M is displayed so that the remaining period of the operation valid period is displayed in white, and when the remaining period decreases, the portion changes to black (the portion displayed in white decreases). Then, the period during which this indicator M is displayed is the period during which the effect unit operation valid period timer counter is not 0 (FIG. 46, S2504: NO), and when the player operates (presses) the first frame button 26, the first The processes after step 2505 of the frame button corresponding process (FIG. 46) are executed in order. The movable modes of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, the third effect unit 330, and the specific unit 340 when the player operates the first frame button 26 during this operation valid period will be specifically described later. ..

After that, when the operation valid period ends at the time point T5, the symbol string Z2 in the middle row is stopped and displayed at the time point T6, and the result in the current game round is clearly shown. Specifically, when the current game round is a winning result, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning result (the main symbol with the number 3 in FIG. 49) is stopped and displayed, and the current game round is displayed. In the case of a deviation result, a combination of symbols corresponding to the deviation result (main symbol with the number 4 in FIG. 49) is displayed.

As described in the first frame button correspondence process (FIG. 46), when it is determined that the specific unit movable lottery process has been won in step 2506 in the first frame button correspondence process (S2506: YES), the step The specific unit movable effect command is transmitted in 2508, and the effect unit operation valid period timer counter is cleared to 0 in step 2509. Then, the button operation instruction is not displayed due to the data setting process of step 2108 of another corresponding process (FIG. 42) executed by the display side MPU 162. That is, the time point T5 is the time when the operation valid period set in step 1612 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36) has elapsed, or the affirmative determination is made in step 2506 of the first frame button correspondence process (FIG. 46). It will be one of the time points when it is done.

Subsequently, when the player operates the first frame button 26 during the effect unit operation valid period, the first effect unit 310 (first movable unit 311), the second effect unit 320 (second movable unit 321), and the second 3 The movable mode of the effect unit 330 (third movable portion 331) and the specific unit 340 (specific movable portion 341) will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51. FIG. 50 is a timing chart showing the effect period, the state of the first frame button 26, the state of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, the third effect unit 330, and the state of the specific unit 340. 51 is a schematic view showing a movable mode of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, the third effect unit 330, and the specific unit 340 corresponding to each time point in FIG. 50, and FIG. 51 (a) is a schematic view showing the movable mode of the specific unit 340. 1st effect unit 310 (1st movable part 311), 2nd effect unit 320 (2nd movable part 321), 3rd effect unit 330 (3rd movable part 331), and specific unit 340 (specific movable part 341). (B) shows the first effect unit 310 (first movable unit 311), the second effect unit 320 (second movable unit 321), and the third effect unit 330 (third movable unit 331) at the time point T41b. ), And the movable mode of the specific unit 340 (specific movable portion 341), in which (c) shows the first effect unit 310 (first movable unit 311) and the second effect unit 320 (second movable unit 321) at the time point T41d. , The third effect unit 330 (third movable part 331), and the specific unit 340 (specific movable part 341) are shown, and (d) is the first effect unit 310 (first movable part 311) at the time point T41f. The movable modes of the second effect unit 320 (second movable unit 321), the third effect unit 330 (third movable unit 331), and the specific unit 340 (specific movable unit 341) are shown, and (e) shows the movable mode at the time point T41h. 1 Movable effect unit 310 (1st movable part 311), 2nd effect unit 320 (2nd movable part 321), 3rd effect unit 330 (3rd movable part 331), and specific unit 340 (specific movable part 341) Aspects are shown, in which (f) shows the first effect unit 310 (first movable unit 311), the second effect unit 320 (second movable unit 321), and the third effect unit 330 (third movable unit 331) at the time point T41j. And the movable mode of the specific unit 340 (specific movable portion 341) is shown.
The dotted line in each figure of FIG. 51 indicates each movable portion 31 to 31 arranged at the first position and the specific movable portion 341 arranged at the third position.

When the operation valid period is started at the time point T4, the button operation instruction is displayed on the display screen 80a as described above (FIG. 51a). Then, when the player operates the first frame button 26 at the time point T41a, the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are all immovable at the time point T41a (FIG. FIG. 48, S2702: YES, S2705: YES, S2708: YES), the audio side MPU 152 executes the first effect unit movable process, the second effect unit movable process, and the third effect unit movable process (FIGS. 48, S2703, S2706). , S2709). As a result, at the time point T41b, the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are all moving (moving) as the first frame button 26 is operated by the player at the time point T41a. (Medium, displacement) (FIG. 51 (b)).

Next, when the player operates the first frame button 26 at the time point T41c, the first effect unit 310 and the second effect unit 320 are immovable at the time point T41c (FIGS. 48, S2702: YES, S2705: YES), since the third effect unit 330 is moving (FIG. 48, S2708: NO), the audio side MPU 152 executes the first effect unit movable process and the second effect unit movable process (FIG. 48, S2703, S2706). ). As a result, at the time point T41d, the first effect unit 310 and the second effect unit 320 are in motion as the first frame button 26 is operated by the player at the time point T41c (FIG. 51 (c)).

Subsequently, when the player operates the first frame button 26 at the time point T41e, the first effect unit 310 and the third effect unit 330 are immovable at the time point T41e (FIGS. 48, S2702: YES, S2708: YES), since the second effect unit 320 is moving (FIG. 48, S2705: NO), the audio side MPU 152 executes the first effect unit movable process and the third effect unit movable process (FIG. 48, S2703, S2709). ). As a result, at the time point T41f, the first effect unit 310 and the third effect unit 330 are in motion as the first frame button 26 is operated by the player at the time point T41e (FIG. 51 (d)).

After that, when the player operates the first frame button 26 at the time point T41g, the second effect unit 320 and the third effect unit 330 are immovable at the time point T41g (FIGS. 48, S2705: YES, S2708: YES). ), Since the first effect unit 310 is moving (FIG. 48, S2702: NO), the audio side MPU 152 executes the second effect unit movable process and the third effect unit movable process (FIG. 48, S2706, S2709). .. As a result, at the time point T41h, the second effect unit 320 and the third effect unit 330 are in motion as the first frame button 26 is operated by the player at the time point T41g (FIG. 51 (e)).

Then, when the game round this time is a winning result, when the player wins the specific unit movable lottery process when the player operates the first frame button 26 at the time point T41i (FIG. 46, S2506: YES), the voice side MPU152 Executes the specific unit movable process (FIG. 46, S2507). As a result, at the time point T41j, the specific movable portion 341 is in motion (in a dropped state), and the player is made to detect that this game time is a hit result.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10, when the button operation instruction is displayed on the display screen 80a, the player is allowed to operate the first frame button 26 while expecting the specific movable portion 341 to move, thereby playing the player. It is configured to participate in. Further, before the specific movable portion 341 falls, the player operates the first frame button 26 to move the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330. As a result, the player's interest in the game (expectation and excitement) is improved.

In the present embodiment, even if the first movable portion 311 and the second movable portion 321 and the third movable portion 331 move to the second position and the specific movable portion 341 moves to the fourth position at the same time, these are It is configured so that it does not collide (contact) (see FIG. 10). Therefore, in the present embodiment, even when the specific unit movable process is executed, the effect unit movable process is executed (FIGS. 46, S2510). Therefore, at the time point T41i, the first effect unit 310 and the second effect unit 320 are immovable (FIG. 48, S2702: YES, S2705: YES), but the third effect unit 330 is in motion (FIG. 48). , S2708: NO), the audio side MPU 152 also executes the first effect unit movable process and the second effect unit movable process (FIGS. 48, S2703, S2706). As a result, at the time point T41i, the first effect unit 310 and the second effect unit 320 are in a movable state together with the specific unit 340.

According to the present embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

First, in the present embodiment, when the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 having different movable periods are provided and the player operates the first frame button 26 within the effect unit operation valid period. , The movable processing of the effect unit that is immovable (not movable) is executed (FIG. 48). Therefore, when the player operates the first frame button 26 as compared with the case where all the effect units are moved at the same time (when the effect unit movable process is executed only when all the effect units are not movable). The probability that the production unit will move will increase. That is, the responsiveness of the effect unit when the player operates the first frame button 26 can be enhanced. Therefore, the player can easily feel that the effect unit moves in response to the operation of the first frame button 26, and the player can actively operate the first frame button 26. It is possible to raise the interest of the person in the game.

Further, when the game number is a winning result, the specific unit 340 may not move even if the player operates the first frame button 26 (FIG. 46: S2506).
That is, even if the player operates the first frame button 26 and the specific unit 340 does not move, a hit result may be obtained. Therefore, even if the specific unit 340 does not move, the player can pay attention to the production until the end of the game.

Further, even when the game number is a winning result, if the player does not operate the first frame button 26, the specific unit movable process is not performed (FIG. 36, S1617: NO). Therefore, it is possible to let the player select whether to operate the first frame button 26 while expecting the specific unit 340 to move, or to enjoy the production to the end without operating the first frame button 26. can. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the game and prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

(Modified example of the first embodiment)
A modified example of the first embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the timing and function of the button operation instruction displayed on the display screen 80a may be changed as appropriate.

For example, in the initial stage when the super reach effect is displayed, a button operation instruction may be displayed on the display screen 80a so that the chance is increased when the specific unit 340 is moved. In this case, in the specific unit movable lottery process (FIG. 47, S2506) in the first frame button correspondence process (FIG. 46), even if the game number is missed, the specific unit movable lottery process is won and the game is played. When the number of times is off, it is preferable to allow the specific unit 340 to move with a lower probability than when the result is a hit.

In such a configuration, even if the specific unit 340 moves, the hit result is not always obtained, but the probability that the specific unit 340 moves is higher in the case of the hit result than in the case of the off result. Therefore, the first frame button 26 can be operated while expecting the player to move the specific unit 340, and the player's interest in the game can be improved. Further, since the specific unit 340 may move even if the result is off, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming monotonous in the production of the game, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, in the latter stage when the effect of normal reach is displayed, a button operation instruction may be displayed on the display screen 80a so that when the specific unit 340 moves, it develops into super reach.

As described above, the timing and function of the button operation instruction displayed on the display screen 80a can be appropriately changed in each of the following embodiments as well.

Further, in the first embodiment, in the first frame button correspondence process (FIG. 46), when the specific unit movable lottery process is won (S2506: YES), the effect unit movable process (S2510) is not executed. good. In other words, the effect unit movable process may be executed only when the specific unit movable lottery process is not won (S2506: NO).

Then, in the first embodiment, when the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are in motion, a predetermined effect can be displayed on the display screen 80a, or the speaker unit 34 can display the predetermined effect. A predetermined sound may be output.

Further, in the first embodiment, the comparison value of step 2602 and step 2603 in the specific unit movable lottery process (FIG. 47) can be changed as appropriate. For example, in step 2602, the value of the effect unit operation valid period timer counter is produced. It may be determined whether or not it is 1/3 or less of the value set in the unit operation validity period timer counter.

Further, in the first embodiment, in the effect unit movable process (FIG. 48), when it is determined that the plurality of effect unit movable period timer counters are 0, one effect is produced in one effect unit movable process by lottery or the like. Only the unit movable process may be executed. Further, when it is determined that all the effect unit movable period timer counters are 0, only two effect unit movable processes may be executed by lottery or the like. According to this, it is possible to further increase the probability that any of the effect units will move when the player operates the first frame button 26. When it is determined that the timer counters for a plurality of effect unit movable periods are 0, an example in which only one effect unit movable process is executed in one effect unit movable process is specifically described in the second embodiment below. explain.

(Second Embodiment)
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, the effect unit movable process (S2510) executed by the audio side MPU 152 is changed with respect to the first embodiment so that the effect units are moved one by one. Others are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here.

The effect unit movable process (S2510) executed by the audio side MPU 152 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the effect unit movable processing. This process is basically the same as the effect unit movable process described in FIG. 48, but can be moved in one effect unit movable process with respect to the effect unit movable process described in FIG. 48. This is a process in which only one effect unit is moved when there are a plurality of effect units.

Specifically, after acquiring the value of the first to third effect unit movable period timer counters (S2701), when it is determined that the first effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2702: YES), While executing the first effect unit movable process (S2703), the movable period of the first effect unit 310 is set in the first effect unit movable period timer counter (S2704), and the present effect unit movable process is terminated as it is. That is, when the first effect unit movable process of step 2703 is executed, the present effect unit movable process is terminated as it is without executing the second effect unit movable process and the third effect unit movable process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first effect unit movable period timer counter is not 0 (S2702: NO), it is determined whether or not the second effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2705). Then, when it is determined that the second effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2705: YES), the second effect unit movable process is executed (S2706), and the second effect unit movable period timer counter is transferred to the second effect unit movable period timer counter. 2 The movable period of the effect unit 320 is set (S2707), and the present effect unit movable process is terminated as it is. That is, when the second effect unit movable process of step 2705 is executed, the present effect unit movable process is terminated as it is without executing the third effect unit movable process.

When it is determined that the second effect unit movable period timer counter is not 0 (S2705: NO), it is determined whether or not the third effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2708). Then, when the third effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2708: YES), the third effect unit movable process is executed (S2709), and the third effect unit is transferred to the third effect unit movable period timer counter. The movable period of 330 is set (S2710), and the movable processing of the present effect unit is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the third effect unit movable period timer counter is not 0 (S2708: NO), the present effect unit movable process is terminated as it is.

That is, in the effect unit movable process of the present embodiment, when the first effect unit movable process is executed, the second effect unit movable process and the third effect unit movable process are not performed, and the second effect unit movable process is executed. In this case, the movement processing of the third effect unit is not performed.

Next, when the player operates the first frame button 26 during the effect period during which the effect unit is operated, the first effect unit 310 (first movable unit 311) and the second effect unit 320 (second movable unit 321) , The movable mode of the third effect unit 330 (third movable portion 331) will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 shows the effect period, the state of the first frame button 26, the first effect unit 310 (first movable unit 311), the second effect unit 320 (second movable unit 321), and the third effect unit 330 ( It is a timing chart which shows the state of the 3rd movable part 331).

When the operation valid period is started at the time point T4, the button operation instruction is displayed on the display screen 80a as described above (see FIG. 51). Then, when the player operates the first frame button 26 at the time point T42a, the first effect unit 310 is immovable at the time point T42a (FIG. 52, S2702: YES), so that the audio side MPU 152 performs the first effect. The unit movable process is executed (FIG. 52, S2703), and the effect unit movable process is terminated as it is. That is, the second effect unit 320 and the third effect unit 330 are not subjected to the movable process even if they are not movable.

Next, when the player operates the first frame button 26 at the time point T42b, the first effect unit 310 is movable at the time point T42b, but the second effect unit 320 is immovable (FIG. 52, FIG. S2705: YES), the audio side MPU 152 executes the second effect unit movable process (FIG. 52, S2706), and ends the effect unit movable process as it is. That is, the movable process is not executed even if the third effect unit 330 is not movable.

Then, when the player operates the first frame button 26 at the time point T42c, the first effect unit 310 and the second effect unit 320 are moving at the time point T42c, but the third effect unit 330 is not moving. Therefore (FIG. 53, S2708: YES), the audio side MPU 152 executes the third effect unit movable process (FIG. 52, S2709).

According to the present embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the player operates the first frame button 26, when the first effect unit movable process is executed, the second effect unit movable process and the third effect unit movable process are not executed. When the second effect unit movable process is executed, the third effect unit movable process is not executed, and the third effect unit movable process is executed only when the first effect unit movable process and the second effect unit movable process are not executed. I try to do something (Fig. 52). Therefore, there is a high probability that any of the effect units will move when the player operates the first frame button 26, and the responsiveness of the effect unit when the player operates the first frame button 26 is further increased. It is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.

(Modified example of the second embodiment)
A modified example of the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, in the effect unit movable process (FIG. 52), the effect unit having a long movable period may be preferentially moved. That is, in the second embodiment, since the movable period of one time becomes longer in the order of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330, the third effect unit 330 is preferentially moved. It may be. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an effect unit movable process executed by the audio side MPU 152 in the modified example of the second embodiment.

Specifically, after acquiring the values of the first to third effect unit movable period timer counters (S2701), first, it is determined whether or not the third effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2708). When it is determined that the third effect unit movable period timer counter is not 0 (S2708: NO), it is determined whether or not the second effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2705). Next, when it is determined that the second effect unit movable period timer counter is not 0 (S2705: NO), it is determined whether or not the first effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2702), and the first effect. When it is determined that the unit movable period timer counter is not 0 (S2702: NO), the effect unit movable process is terminated as it is. Then, when it is determined that the third effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2708: YES), when it is determined that the second effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2705: YES), and the first effect. When it is determined that the unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2702: YES), each effect unit movable process is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 52.

By performing the effect unit movable process in this way, the movable process of the third effect unit 330 having a long movable period is executed with the highest priority, and the first effect unit 310 having the shortest movable period of one time is the second effect unit. When the 320 and the third effect unit 330 are in motion, the movement process is performed. Therefore, the probability that a plurality of production units can be moved at the same time is higher than that of the second embodiment, and the player can fully enjoy the combination of movement of the production units by operating the first frame button 26. .. In addition, since the probability that a plurality of production units can be moved at the same time is high, the player can fully experience the power of the production unit, and the player's first when the button operation instruction is displayed on the display screen 80a. It is possible to increase the interest in the one-frame button operation and further increase the player's attention to the game.

Further, in the second embodiment, in the effect unit movable process (FIG. 52), although not particularly shown, the order of performing the determination process of step 2702, the determination process of step 2705, and the determination process of step 2708 is determined by lottery or the like. , The order in which the various production units 310 to 330 start to move may be random.

Further, in the second embodiment, although not particularly shown, in the effect unit movable process (FIG. 52), when it is determined that all the effect unit movable period timer counters are 0, one effect unit is movable by lottery or the like. The process, the two effect unit movable processes, or the three effect unit movable processes may be executed.

Further, in the second embodiment, the movable periods of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 may be equal. Even with such a configuration, by executing the effect unit movement process (FIG. 52), when the player operates the first frame button 26, the probability that one of the effect units will move increases, and the player Can increase the responsiveness when the first frame button 26 is operated.

(Third Embodiment)
A third embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, the effect unit movable process (S2510) executed by the audio side MPU 152 is changed with respect to the second embodiment so that the same effect unit is difficult to move continuously. Others are the same as those in the second embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here.

First, the configuration of the audio side RAM 154 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 55.
FIG. 55 is a diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93.

As shown in FIG. 55, the audio side RAM 154 is provided with various effect unit movable flag storage areas (movable history storage means) 154h in addition to the various areas 154a to 154g. The various effect unit movable flag storage area 154h is an area in which the sound side MPU 152 stores the effect unit movable flag in the effect unit movable process (FIG. 56) described later.

Next, the effect unit movable process (S2510) executed by the audio side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the effect unit movable processing. This process is basically the same as the effect unit movable process described in FIG. 52, but can be moved in one effect unit movable process with respect to the effect unit movable process described in FIG. 52. When there are a plurality of production units, this is a process in which a production unit different from the production unit that was moved last time is moved.

Specifically, after acquiring the value of the first to third effect unit movable period timer counters (S2701), whether or not there is one in which the acquired first to third effect unit movable period timer counters are 0. (S2711), and if it is determined that there is one in which the first to third effect unit movable period timer counters are 0 (S2711: YES), there is only one effect unit in which the movable period timer counter is 0. It is determined whether or not it is (S2712).
That is, it is determined whether or not there are a plurality of non-movable effect units. Then, when it is determined that only one effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2712: YES), the effect unit movable process corresponding to the effect unit movable period timer counter that is 0 is executed (S2713). ). For example, in step 2713, if it is determined in step 2712 that only the first effect unit movable period timer counter is 0, the first effect unit movable process is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there are a plurality of effect unit movable period timer counters having 0 (S2712: NO), the effect unit movable flags stored in the various effect unit movable flag storage areas 154h provided in the audio side RAM 154. (S2714). In the effect unit movable flag storage area 154h, the effect unit movable flag corresponding to the effect unit that has undergone the movable process is stored by the flag update process (S2717) of the effect unit movable flag storage area 154h described later.

Next, based on the effect unit movable flag acquired in step 2714, since there are a plurality of effect unit movable period timer counters of 0, the effect unit movable process different from the effect unit corresponding to the effect unit movable flag (non-production). (Continuous effect unit movable processing) is executed (S2715). For example, when it is determined in step 2712 that the first effect unit movable period timer counter and the second effect unit movable period timer counter are 0 and the first effect unit movable flag is acquired in step 2714, the second effect unit movable process is performed. To execute. Further, when it is determined in step 2712 that the second effect unit movable period timer counter and the third effect unit movable period timer counter are 0 and the first effect unit movable flag is acquired in step 2714, it is determined by lottery or the like. Executes the production unit movable processing of.

After executing the movable process of step 2713 or the movable process of step 2715, the set process of the movable period in the corresponding effect unit movable period timer counter is executed (S2716). That is, the movable period of the effect unit that has executed the movable process is set in the corresponding effect unit movable period timer counter.

Then, after executing the flag update process of the various effect unit movable flag storage area 154h of the audio side RAM 154 (S2717), the present effect unit movable process is terminated. In this flag update process, when the effect unit movable flag is stored in the various effect unit movable flag storage area 154h, the effect unit movable flag is deleted, and the movable process in step 2713 or the movable process in step 2715 is performed. Stores the effect unit movable flag corresponding to the executed effect unit. As a result, in step 2715 in the next effect unit movement process, an effect unit different from the effect unit that was moved this time is moved.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no timer counter for which the first to third effect unit movable period timer counters are 0 (S2711: NO), the first to third effect unit movable processes are terminated as they are.

In the effect unit movable process in the present embodiment, the effect unit movable flag stored in the effect unit movable flag storage area 154h is not particularly erased in the first frame button corresponding process (FIG. 46). Therefore, the effect unit movable flag stored at the end of the effect unit operation valid period is referred to across the game times. That is, when the game round ends with the first effect unit movable flag stored in the effect unit movable flag storage area 154h in a certain game round, in the first effect unit movable process (FIG. 56) in the next game round. , The first effect unit movable flag is acquired in step 2714, and the second effect unit movable process or the third effect unit movable process is executed in step 2715. Further, in the first effect unit movable process after RAM erasing or the like, the effect unit movable flag is not stored in the effect unit movable flag storage area 154h, so in step 2715, one effect unit movable determined by lottery or the like is movable. The process is executed.

According to the present embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

That is, in the present embodiment, after executing the movable processing of the effect unit, the corresponding effect unit movable flag is stored in the various effect unit movable flag storage areas 154h (FIGS. 56 and S2717), and the effect unit movable period timer counter is 0. When there are a plurality of effects (when there are a plurality of non-movable effect units, FIG. 56, S2712: NO), the effect corresponding to the effect unit movable flag stored in the various effect unit movable flag storage areas 154h. The movable processing of the effect unit different from the unit is executed (FIG. 56, S2715). Therefore, when the player operates the first frame button 26, only the same effect unit becomes difficult to move continuously, and the player is given the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330. You can fully enjoy all the movements of. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the first frame button operation when the button operation instruction is displayed on the display screen 80a, and further improve the player's attention to the game. Further, by making it difficult for only the same effect unit to move continuously, it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort that only a specific effect unit can move, and it is possible to suppress giving the player discomfort.

(Modified example of the third embodiment)
A modified example of the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, when the effect unit movable flag for two times (previous and two times before) is stored in the effect unit movable flag storage area 154h and all the effect unit movable period timer counters are determined to be 0. (FIG. 56, S2712: NO) may make the effect unit different from the effect unit corresponding to the effect unit movable flag for two times movable. That is, it is possible to move a production unit different from the production unit that was moved last time and two times before.

(Fourth Embodiment)
A fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, the effect unit movable process (S2510) executed by the voice side MPU 152 is changed with respect to the third embodiment so that the effect unit movable process is executed based on the game result of the game times. be. Others are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here.

The effect unit movable process (S2510) executed by the audio side MPU 152 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the effect unit movable processing. This process is basically the same as the effect unit movable process described in FIG. 56, but is movable based on the game result of the game times with respect to the effect unit movable process described in FIG. 57. This is a process that selects a production unit. In this embodiment, the sound side RAM 154 is not provided with the effect unit movable flag storage area 154h. That is, the configuration of the audio side RAM 154 is the configuration described with reference to FIG.

In the effect unit movable process, when it is determined that there are a plurality of effect unit movable period timer counters having 0 (S2712: NO), the effect unit is stored in the retained data area 154e in step 1706 in the main command correspondence process (FIG. 37). From the information, it is determined whether or not the game result of this game time is a winning result (S2718). Then, when it is determined that the current game round is a hit result (S2718: YES), the movable process per effect unit is executed (S2719), and when it is determined that the current game round is not a hit result (S2718: YES). S2718: NO), the effect unit detachment movable process is executed (S2720).

In the movable processing per effect unit, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the second effect unit movable period timer counter is included in the one determined that the effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 in step 2712. do. Then, when the second effect unit movable period timer counter is included, the second effect unit movable process executes a lottery process in which the second effect unit movable process is won with a higher probability than the other effect unit movable processes, and the winning effect unit movable process is executed. To execute. For example, in the lottery process, when it is determined that the first effect unit movable period timer counter, the second effect unit movable period timer counter, and the third effect unit movable period timer counter are 0, that is, the first effect unit 310, the first effect unit 310, When the 2 effect unit 320 and the 3rd effect unit 330 are all non-movable, the 2nd effect unit movable process is executed with a probability of 4/5, and the 1st effect unit movable process and the 2nd effect unit movable process are performed. The lottery that is executed with a probability of 1/10 each is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the game times are the winning results, the second unit movable process is easily executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the current game round is not a winning result (S2718: NO), the effect unit detachment movable process is executed (S2720). In the effect unit detachment movable process, the effect unit movable period timer counter is 0, and the effect unit movable process is evenly executed by the lottery process.

Then, when the movable processing for each effect unit in step 2719 is executed, when the movable process for removing the effect unit in step 2720 is executed, or when the corresponding effect unit movable process in step 2713 is executed, the movable period in step 2716 is executed. After executing the set processing of (S2716), the processing corresponding to this effect unit is terminated.

According to the present embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game round is a hit result, and if it is a hit result, it is easy to execute the second effect unit movable process (S2719). Therefore, in the process of operating (continuously hitting) the first frame button 26, the player confirms whether or not the second effect unit 320 is moving more than the other effect units, so that the game times are won. It can be inferred whether or not it is. That is, by operating (continuously hitting) the first frame button 26, it is possible to give the player the game property of guessing whether or not the game times are the winning results even before the specific unit 340 moves. By diversifying the games, the player's attention to the games can be improved.

(Modified example of the fourth embodiment)
A modified example of the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the fourth embodiment, in the effect unit movable process (S2719), the first effect unit movable process may be easily executed, or the third effect unit movable process may be easily executed. That is, in the movable processing per production unit, any production unit may be easily moved as long as a specific production unit can be easily moved.

Further, when it is determined that the timer counters of the first to third effect unit movable periods are all 0 (S2712: NO), three effects are produced in the effect unit movable process (S2719) and the effect unit detachment movable process (S2720). The unit movable process may be executed at the same time. In this case, for example, in the movable processing per effect unit (S2719), it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability that the three effect unit movable processes are executed at the same time is higher than that of the effect unit detached movable process (S2720).

Similarly, when it is determined that all the 1st to 3rd effect unit movable period timer counters are 0 (S2712: NO), there are two in the effect unit movable process (S2719) and the effect unit detachment movable process (S2720). The effect unit movable process may be executed at the same time. Further, when it is determined that the two effect unit movable period timer counters are 0 (S2712: NO), the two effect unit movable processes may be executed at the same time. In this case, for example, in the movable processing per effect unit (S2719), it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability that the two effect unit movable processes are executed at the same time is higher than that of the effect unit detached movable process (S2720).

(Fifth Embodiment)
A fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, the effect unit movable process (S2510) executed by the audio side MPU 152 is changed with respect to the first embodiment, and the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are not included. The specific unit movement process is executed when the unit is moving. Others are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here.

First, the configuration of the audio side RAM 154 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93.

As shown in FIG. 58, the audio side RAM 154 is provided with a specific unit standby flag storage area 154i in addition to the various areas 154a to 154g. The specific unit standby flag storage area 154i is an area in which the voice side MPU 152 stores the specific unit standby flag in the first frame button correspondence process (FIG. 60) described later.

Next, the timer interrupt processing executed by the voice MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. This process is basically the same as the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 36, and is a process in which a process (S1619) for determining whether or not the specific unit flag standby flag is stored is added.

Specifically, in this timer interrupt process, after executing the timer update process in step 1616, it is determined whether or not the specific unit standby flag is stored in the specific unit standby flag storage area 154i of the voice side RAM 154 (S1619). ). Then, when it is determined that the specific unit standby flag is not stored (S1619: NO), it is determined whether or not the first frame button 26 is operated (S1617), and the specific unit standby flag is stored. If it is determined to be present (S1619: YES), a process of acquiring the value of the first to third effect unit movable period timer counters of the first frame button correspondence process (FIG. 60), which will be described later, is executed (S2512). The specific unit standby flag is stored in the first frame button correspondence process (FIG. 60), which will be described later.

Subsequently, the process corresponding to the first frame button executed by the voice-side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a process corresponding to the first frame button. This process is basically the same as the process corresponding to the first frame button described in FIG. 46, and the specific unit movable lottery process is won against the process corresponding to the first frame button described in FIG. 46. Processing that adds a process (S2513) for determining whether or not the first effect unit movable period timer counter, the second effect unit movable period timer counter, and the third effect unit movable period timer counter are 0 when it is determined that the operation has been performed. Is.

Specifically, when it is determined in step 2506 that the specific unit movable lottery process has not been won (S2506: NO), after executing the effect unit movable process of step 2510 described in the first embodiment, after executing the effect unit movable process. The process corresponding to the first frame button is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step 2506 that the specific unit movable lottery process has been won (S2506: YES), or when it is determined in step 1619 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 59) that the specific unit standby flag is stored. (S1619: YES), the values of the first to third effect unit movable period timer counters are acquired (S2512), and it is determined whether or not all the first to third effect unit movable period timer counters are 0. (S2513). That is, it is determined whether or not the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are in motion.

Then, when it is determined that the first to third production unit movable period timer counters are not 0 (S2513: NO), the specific unit standby flag is stored in the specific unit standby flag storage area 154i provided in the audio side RAM 154 (S2514). ), The process corresponding to the first frame button is terminated as it is. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step 1619 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 59). That is, when it is determined that the specific unit movable lottery process has been won (S2506: YES), and when any of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 is in motion, it is specified. By storing the unit standby flag (S2514), the processes after step 2512 in the first frame button correspondence process (FIG. 60) are executed regardless of whether or not the first frame button 26 is operated. In other words, after the specific unit standby flag is stored, even if the first frame button 26 is operated by the player, the effect unit movement process in step 2510 is not executed. In step 2514, when the specific unit standby flag is already stored, the specific unit standby flag is maintained as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the 1st to 3rd effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2513: YES), that is, the 1st effect unit 310, the 2nd effect unit 320, and the 3rd effect unit 330 are all non-movable. If it is determined that the value is inside, the same steps of step 2507, step 2508, and step 2509 as described above are executed, and then the specific unit standby flag is deleted from the specific unit standby flag storage area 154i (S2515). The process corresponding to the first frame button is terminated. In step 2515, when the specific unit standby flag is not stored, that is, in the same process in which it is determined that the specific unit movable lottery process has been won, the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect If it is determined that the unit 330 is immovable (S2513: YES), the first frame button correspondence process is terminated as it is.

Next, when the player operates the first frame button 26 during the effect period during which the effect unit is operated, the first effect unit 310 (first movable unit 311), the second effect unit 320 (second movable unit 321), and the second 3 The movable mode of the effect unit 330 (third movable portion 331) and the specific unit 340 (specific movable portion 341) will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a timing chart showing the effect period, the state of the first frame button 26, the state of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, the third effect unit 330, and the state of the specific unit 340.

As described above, when the operation valid period is started, the button operation instruction is displayed on the display screen 80a (see FIG. 51). Then, when the player operates the first frame button 26, if the specific unit movable lottery process is not won (FIG. 60, S2506: NO), the effect unit movable process is executed (FIG. 60, S2510). .. Then, when it is determined that the voice side MPU 152 has won the specific unit movable lottery process when the player operates the first frame button 26 at the time point T43a (FIG. 60, S2506: YES), the voice side MPU 152 is the first. It is determined whether or not the effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are in motion (FIGS. 60, S2513). In the example of FIG. 61, since the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are moving at the time point T43a (FIG. 60, S2513: NO), the specific unit movement process is not performed. , The specific unit standby flag is stored (FIG. 60, S2514). Then, when all of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 become immovable at the time point T43b (FIG. 60, S2513: YES), the specific unit movable process is executed and the specific unit is executed. 340 is movable (FIG. 60, S2507).

According to the present embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

First, in the present embodiment, when the specific unit movable lottery process is won (FIG. 60, S2506: YES), the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are non-movable. When the determination is made (FIG. 60, S2513: YES), the specific unit movable process is executed (FIG. 60, S2507). Therefore, the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, the third effect unit 330, and the specific unit 340 do not move at the same time, and the unit that the player should pay attention to can be clearly distinguished, and the player can clearly distinguish the unit. You can prevent confusion.

Further, when the specific unit movable lottery process is won (FIG. 60, S2506: YES), the specific unit standby flag is used when the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are in motion. (FIG. 60, S2514), even if the player operates the first frame button 26, until all of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 become immovable. stand by. That is, for example, when the first effect unit 310 is non-movable and the second effect unit 320 and the third effect unit 330 are in a movable state, when the first frame button 26 is operated, the specific unit is movable. If the lottery process is not won, the first effect unit 310 is moved, but if the specific unit movable lottery process is won, the first effect unit 310 is not moved. ) Can be produced. For this reason, it is possible to give the player the playability of searching for the effect (state) that the effect unit that should be movable does not move in the process of operating (continuously hitting) the first frame button 26, and the player can play the game. It is possible to prevent getting bored early.

(Modified example of the fifth embodiment)
A modified example of the fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, in the first frame button correspondence process (FIG. 60), in step 2513, the first to third effect unit movable period timer counters are not determined to be all 0 or not, but are specified. It may be determined whether or not the two effect unit movable period timer counters of the above are 0. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to give the player the playability of searching for an effect (state) in which the effect unit that should be movable does not move in the process of operating (continuously hitting) the first frame button 26. It is possible to prevent a person from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the size of the specific unit 340 (specific movable portion 341) may be changed. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a state when the first movable portion 311 and the second movable portion 321 and the third movable portion 331 are movable to the second position and the specific movable portion 341 is moved to the fourth position. ..

As shown in FIG. 62, for example, when the first movable portion 311 and the second movable portion 321 and the third movable portion 331 move to the second position and the specific movable portion 341 moves to the fourth position at the same time. , The diameter of the specific movable portion 341 and the like may be appropriately changed so that the second movable portion 321 and the third movable portion 331 and the specific movable portion 341 come into contact (collision). In other words, by executing the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 59) and the first frame button corresponding processing (FIG. 60) as in the fifth embodiment, the first to third movable units 31 to 31 can be specifically moved. Since the unit 341 and the unit 341 do not move at the same time, the configuration shown in FIG. 62 can also be adopted. That is, the degree of freedom in designing the specific movable portion 341 (specific unit 340) can be improved, the specific movable portion 341 can be made into a novel shape for the player, and the size of the specific movable portion 341 can be made larger. Therefore, the power (exhilaration) of the specific unit 340 can be impressed on the player, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In FIG. 62, the first movable portion 311 is movable to the second position, and even if the specific movable portion 341 is moved to the fourth position, they do not come into contact with each other, but the first movable portion 311 is the second. It may be configured to move to a position and to come into contact with each other when the specific movable portion 341 moves to the fourth position. Further, when the first movable portion 311 and the second movable portion 321 and the third movable portion 331 are movable to the second position and the specific movable portion 341 is simultaneously moved to the fourth position, the first movable portion 311 and the second movable portion 311 are movable. One or a combination of one or two of the portion 321 and the third movable portion 331 may be configured to come into contact with the specific movable portion 341. Further, the shapes and sizes of the first movable portion 311 and the second movable portion 321 and the third movable portion 331 can be appropriately changed together with the specific movable portion 341, and the first movable portion 311 and the second movable portion 321 and the first movable portion 331 can be changed as appropriate. 3 The movable portion 331 can also have a novel shape for the player.

(Sixth Embodiment)
A sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, the specific unit movable process is executed at a predetermined timing with respect to the first embodiment, and the effect unit movable process immediately before the timing is changed. Others are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here.

First, the configurations of the audio side ROM 153 and the audio side RAM 154 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93.

As shown in FIG. 63, the audio side ROM 153 is provided with a specific unit movable timing lottery table storage area 153f in addition to the various areas 153a to 153e. The specific unit movable timing lottery table storage area 153f is an area in which the lottery table referred to at the time of the specific unit preprocessing (FIG. 65) described later is stored.

In addition to the various areas 154a to 154g, the audio side RAM 154 is provided with a specific unit movable flag storage area 154j, a specific unit movable timing timer counter area 154k, and a normal processing period timer counter area 154m. The specific unit movable flag storage area 154j is an area in which the specific unit movable flag is stored in the specific unit preprocessing (FIG. 65) described later. The specific unit movable timing timer counter area 154k is a specific unit movable timing in which the period from the start of the effect unit operation effective period to the movement of the specific unit 340 is set in the specific unit preprocessing (FIG. 65) described later. Timer This is the area where the counter is stored. The normal processing period timer counter area 154m is an area in which the normal processing period timer counter in which the normal processing period is set in the specific unit pre-processing (FIG. 65) described later is stored.

Here, the normal processing period of the present embodiment will be described. The normal processing period in the present embodiment is one period within the effect unit operation valid period set when the period until the specific unit movable process is set, and is the period until the specific unit movable process (effect unit operation valid). The period from the start of the period to the specific timing) minus the longest movable period of the first production unit 310, the second production unit 320, and the third production unit 330. be. That is, in the present embodiment, since the movable period of the third effect unit 330 is the longest, it is a value obtained by subtracting the movable period of the third effect unit 330 from the period until the specific unit movable process (see FIG. 68). .. Further, in the following, when the period until the specific unit movable processing is set, the period obtained by subtracting the normal processing period from the period until the specific unit movable processing will be described as a special processing period (see FIG. 68). Since the special processing period is a period obtained by subtracting the normal processing period from the period until the specific unit movable processing, it is the same period as one movable period of the third effect unit 330 in the present embodiment.

Next, the timer interrupt processing executed by the voice MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. This process is basically the same as the timer interrupt process described in FIG. 36, and is a process in which the specific unit pre-process (S1620) is added to the timer interrupt process described in FIG. 36. ..

Specifically, in the timer interrupt process, after clearing the effect unit operation valid period wait flag in step 1613, the specific unit preprocess is executed (S1620). That is, when the button operation instruction on the display screen 80a is displayed, the specific unit preprocessing is executed. Here, the specific unit preprocessing will be described with reference to FIG. 65. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the specific unit preprocessing.

In the specific unit pre-processing, first, it is determined from the information stored in the retained data area 154e in step 1706 in the main command correspondence process (FIG. 37) whether or not the game result of the current game is a winning result (S2801). ). Then, when it is determined that the result is a hit (S2801: YES), the specific unit movable lottery process is executed (S2802).
In this specific unit movable lottery process, basically the same process as the specific unit first lottery process and the like (FIGS. 47, S2604 to S2606) described in the first embodiment is executed. Briefly, first, the value of the specific unit movable lottery counter stored in the various counter areas 154 g of the voice side RAM 154 is acquired. Then, the specific unit movable lottery table stored in the various data table storage areas 153a of the voice side ROM 153 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the acquired value of the specific unit movable lottery counter is won.
In this embodiment, a specific unit movable lottery table is set so that the winner will be won on 4/5.

Then, it is determined whether or not the specific unit movable lottery process has been won (S2803), and if it is determined that the specific unit has been won (S2803: YES), it is specified in the specific unit movable flag storage area 154j provided in the voice side RAM 154. The unit movable flag is stored (S2804).

Next, a specific unit movable timing lottery process is performed (S2805). That is, a lottery process is performed to determine when to move the specific unit 340. Specifically, the value of the specific unit movable timing lottery counter is acquired from various counter areas 154 g provided in the voice side RAM 154. Here, the specific unit movable timing lottery counter is configured to be able to store a counter value of "0 to 99", and is configured to be incremented by 1 in a predetermined cycle such as a 2 msec cycle, and is set to the maximum value. After reaching 0, it is initialized to 0. Then, the specific unit movable timing lottery table stored in the specific unit movable timing lottery table storage area 153f provided in the voice side ROM 153 is referred to, and the specific unit movable timing lottery counter is specified based on the read-out value of the specific unit movable timing lottery counter. Determine the unit movable timing.

In the present embodiment, when the period of 1/2 of the valid period of the operation has elapsed since the start of the valid period of the operation unit, the player is elected at 1/4, and the period of 2/3 of the valid period of the operation has elapsed. The specific unit movable timing lottery table is set so that the player wins at 1/4 of the time and wins at 1/2 when the period of 3/4 of the operation valid period elapses.

Next, the period from the start of the effect unit operation valid period to the time when the specific unit movable timing timer counter stored in the specific unit movable timing timer counter area 154k of the audio side RAM 154 is drawn in step 2805 (specific unit). The period until the movable process) is set (S2806). The numerical value of the specific unit movable timing timer counter set in step 2806 is updated (subtracted) by the timer update process in step 1616 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 64).

Subsequently, the normal processing period calculation process is executed (S2807). As described above, the normal processing period is a value obtained by subtracting one movable period of the third effect unit 330 from the period until the specific unit movable processing in the present embodiment. Then, the normal processing period calculated in step 2807 is set in the normal processing period timer counter stored in the normal processing period timer counter area 154m of the voice side RAM 154 (S2808). The update (subtraction) of the numerical value of the normal processing period timer counter set in step 2808 is executed in the timer update process of step 1616 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 64).

When the set process of step 2808 is executed, when it is determined in step 2801 that the current game round is not a winning result (S2801: NO), or when it is determined in step 2803 that the specific unit movable lottery process has not been won. (S2803: NO), the preprocessing of this specific unit is terminated as it is.

Returning to the explanation of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 64), after executing the specific unit preprocessing, after executing the processing of steps 1613 to 1618 described above, it is determined whether or not the specific unit movable flag is stored. Then (S1621), when it is determined that the specific unit movable flag is stored (S1621: YES), it is determined whether or not the effect unit operation validity period timer counter is 0 (S1622). Then, when it is determined that the effect unit operation valid period timer counter is 0 (S1622: YES), after clearing the specific unit movable flag (S1623), this timer interrupt process is terminated. In addition, when the specific unit movable flag is erased in step 1623, the specific unit movable lottery process was won (FIG. 65, S2803: YES), but during the effect period during which the normal processing period has elapsed, the effect unit operation is valid. This is the case where the first frame button 26 is not operated by the player.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step 1621 that the specific unit movable flag is not stored (S1621: NO), or when it is determined that the effect unit operation validity period timer counter is not 0 (S1622: NO), this timer is used as it is. End interrupt processing.

Subsequently, the process corresponding to the first frame button executed by the voice-side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a process corresponding to the first frame button. This process is basically the same as the process corresponding to the first frame button described with reference to FIG. 46, and whether or not it is a normal processing period with respect to the process corresponding to the first frame button described with reference to FIG. 46. It is a process in which the way of moving the effect unit is changed by determining whether or not (S2510, S2517, S2519).

Specifically, when it is determined in step 2504 that the effect period timer counter is not 0 (S2504: NO), that is, when the button operation instruction is displayed on the display screen 80a, the specific unit movable flag storage area 154j It is determined whether or not the specific unit movable flag is stored in (S2516). Then, when it is determined that the specific unit movable flag is stored (S2516: YES), it is determined whether or not the normal processing period timer counter is 0 (S2517). When it is determined that the normal processing period timer counter is 0 (S2517: YES), it is determined whether or not the specific unit movable timing timer counter is 0 (S2518), and the specific unit movable timing timer counter is not 0. If it is determined (S2518: NO), the effect unit special movable process is executed (S2519).

The effect unit operation valid period timer counter is not 0 (S2504: NO), the specific unit movable flag is stored (S2516: YES), and the normal processing period timer counter is 0 (S2517: YES). Is the state after the effect unit operation valid period (button operation instruction is displayed on the display screen 80a), the game round this time is the winning result, and the normal processing period has elapsed. .. The state in which the specific unit movable timing timer counter is determined not to be 0 in step 2518 is the state of the special processing period in the effect unit operation valid period, and the specific unit movable timing timer counter is determined to be 0 in step 2518. The state is after the period until the specific unit movable timing has elapsed (see FIG. 68).

Here, the effect unit special movable processing will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the special movable processing of the effect unit. This process is basically the same as the effect unit movable process described with reference to FIG. 48, and is prior to (simultaneously) with respect to the effect unit movable process described with reference to FIG. 48. This is a process of executing the effect unit movement process so that the movement of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 is completed.

Specifically, in the effect unit special movable process, first, the value of the first to third effect unit movable period timer counters is acquired (S2901). Next, it is determined whether or not the first effect unit 310 is in motion by determining whether or not the first effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2902). Then, when it is determined that the first effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2902: YES), the movable period of the first effect unit 310 is acquired from the various effect unit movable period storage areas 153d of the audio side ROM 153, and the first effect unit 310 is obtained. It is determined whether or not the movable period of the 1 effect unit 310 is equal to or less than the value of the specific unit movable timing timer counter acquired in step 2518 in the first frame button correspondence process (FIG. 66) (S2903). That is, when the movement process of the first effect unit 310 is executed, it is determined whether or not the movement of the first effect unit 310 is completed before (simultaneously) the movement timing of the specific unit.

Then, when it is determined that the movable period of the first effect unit 310 is equal to or less than the value of the specific unit movable timing timer counter (S2903: YES), the processes of steps 2703 and 2704 in the effect unit movable process described with reference to FIG. 48 above. Similarly to the above, the first effect unit movable process is executed (S2904), and the set process of the movable period of the first effect unit 310 on the first effect unit movable period timer counter is executed (S2905).

When the set processing of the movable period of the first effect unit 310 in step 2905 is executed, or when it is determined in step 2902 that the timer counter of the movable period of the first effect unit is not 0 (S2902: NO), the second effect unit By determining whether or not the movable period timer counter is 0, it is determined whether or not the second effect unit 320 is in motion (S2906). Then, when it is determined that the second effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2906: YES), the movable period of the second effect unit 320 is acquired from the various effect unit movable period storage areas 153d of the audio side ROM 153, and the second effect unit 320 is obtained. 2 It is determined whether or not the movable period of the effect unit 320 is equal to or less than the value of the specific unit movable timing timer counter acquired in step 2518 in the first frame button correspondence process (FIG. 66) (S2907). That is, when the movement process of the second effect unit 320 is executed, it is determined whether or not the movement of the second effect unit 320 ends before (simultaneously) the movement timing of the specific unit.

Then, when it is determined that the movable period of the second effect unit 320 is equal to or less than the value of the specific unit movable timing timer counter (S2907: YES), the processes of steps 2706 and 2707 in the effect unit movable process described with reference to FIG. 48 above. Similarly, the second effect unit movable process is executed (S2908), and the second effect unit 320 movable period set process is executed on the second effect unit movable period timer counter (S2909).

When the set processing of the movable period of the second effect unit 320 in step 2909 is executed, or when it is determined in step 2906 that the timer counter of the movable period of the second effect unit is not 0 (S2906: NO), the third effect unit By determining whether or not the movable period timer counter is 0, it is determined whether or not the third effect unit 330 is in motion (S2910). Then, when it is determined that the third effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2910: YES), the movable period of the third effect unit 330 is acquired from the various effect unit movable period storage areas 153d of the audio side ROM 153, and the third effect unit 330 is acquired. 3 It is determined whether or not the movable period of the effect unit 330 is equal to or less than the specific unit movable timing timer counter acquired in step 2518 in the first frame button correspondence process (FIG. 66) (S2911).
That is, when the movement process of the third effect unit 330 is executed, it is determined whether or not the movement of the third effect unit 330 is completed before (simultaneously) the movement timing of the specific unit.

Then, when it is determined that the movable period of the third effect unit 330 is equal to or less than the specific unit movable timing timer counter (S2911: YES), the same as the processes of steps 2709 and 2710 in the effect unit movable process described with reference to FIG. 48. In addition to executing the third effect unit movable process (S2912), after executing the set process of the third effect unit 330's movable period on the third effect unit movable period timer counter (S2913), the present effect unit is special as it is. End the movable process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step 2903 that the movable period of the first effect unit 310 is larger than the value of the specific unit movable timing timer counter (S2903: NO), the movable period of the second effect unit 320 is the specific unit movable timing in step 22907. When it is determined that the value is larger than the value of the timer counter (S2907: NO), when it is determined in step 2910 that the third effect unit movable period timer counter is not 0 (S2910: NO), or in step 2911, the third effect unit 330 If it is determined that the movable period of the specific unit is larger than the value of the specific unit movable timing timer counter (S2911: NO), the present effect unit special movable process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step 2903 that the movable period of the first effect unit 310 is larger than the value of the specific unit movable timing timer counter (S2903: NO), the processes related to the second effect unit 320 and the third effect unit 330 are not performed. This is because, in the present embodiment, the movable period is lengthened in the order of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330, so that the movable period of the first effect unit 310 is the specific unit movable timing timer. This is because when it is larger than the value of the counter, the movable period of the second effect unit and the third effect unit 330 is always larger than the value of the movable timing timer counter of the specific unit 340. Similarly, when it is determined in step 2907 that the movable period of the second effect unit 320 is larger than the value of the specific unit movable timing timer counter (S2907: NO), it is the second that the process related to the third effect unit 330 is not performed. This is because when the movable period of the effect unit 320 is larger than the value of the movable timing timer counter of the specific unit, the movable period of the third effect unit 330 is always larger than the value of the movable timing timer counter of the specific unit 340.

Returning to the explanation of the first frame button correspondence process (FIG. 66), when it is determined that the specific unit movable flag is not stored (S2516: NO), and when it is determined that the normal processing period timer counter is not 0 ( S2517: NO), after executing the normal movable processing of the effect unit (S2510), the processing corresponding to the first frame button is terminated as it is. In the effect unit normal movable process in step 2510, the same process as the effect unit movable process described with reference to FIG. 48 is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step 2518 that the specific unit movable timing timer counter is 0 (S2518: YES), the specific unit movable process in step 2507 and the specific unit movable effect command transmission in step 2508 described in FIG. The process and the effect unit operation validity period timer counter 0 clear process in step 2509 are executed.
Then, after erasing the specific unit movable flag from the specific unit movable flag storage area 154j (S2520), the process corresponding to the first frame button is terminated. If the first frame button 26 is not operated by the player after the specific unit movable timing timer counter becomes 0, the specific unit movable flag is set in step 1623 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 64) as described above. Is erased.

Next, when the player operates the first frame button 26 during the effect period during which the effect unit is operated, the first effect unit 310 (first movable unit 311), the second effect unit 320 (second movable unit 321), and the second 3 The movable mode of the effect unit 330 (third movable portion 331) and the specific unit 340 (specific movable portion 341) will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a timing chart showing the effect period, the state of the first frame button 26, the state of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, the third effect unit 330, and the state of the specific unit 340. Note that FIG. 68 describes an example in which the game times are the winning results, the button operation instruction (see FIG. 51) is displayed on the display screen 80a, and the specific unit movable lottery process is won.

First, in FIG. 68, the final time point of the effect unit operation valid period set in step 1612 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 64) is set to the time point T44e, and is set in step 2806 of the specific unit preprocessing (FIG. 65). The final time point (specific unit movable timing) of the period until the specific unit movable process is set to T44c. In this case, the normal processing period is the period up to the time point T44a after subtracting the movable period of the third effect unit 330 from the period up to the time point T44c. Further, the special processing period is a period from the time point T44a to the time point T44c, which is a period obtained by subtracting the normal processing period from the period until the specific unit movable processing.

Then, before the time point T44a, when the player operates the first frame button 26, it is within the normal processing period (FIG. 66, S2517: NO), so regardless of whether or not the specific unit movable flag is stored. The movable modes of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are the same as those in FIG. 50. That is, when the player operates the first frame button 26, the movement process of the effect unit that is not moving is executed.

On the other hand, when the player operates the first frame button 26 at the time point T44b within the special processing period after the time point T44a, in the example of FIG. 67, the movable period of the first effect unit 310 is up to the specific knit movable process. Although shorter than the period (FIG. 67, S2903: YES), the movable period of the second effect unit 320 and the movable period of the third effect unit 330 are longer than the period until the specific unit movable process (FIG. 67, S2907: NO). Therefore, the audio side MPU 152 executes only the first effect unit movable processing. That is, when the player operates the first frame button 26 within the special processing period, only the effect unit whose movement ends within the special processing period is moved.

Then, when the player operates the first frame button 26 at the time point T44d after the period until the specific unit movable process at the time point T44c has elapsed, the period until the specific unit movable process has elapsed (FIGS. 66, S2518). : YES), the voice side MPU 152 moves the specific unit 340 by executing the specific unit movement process.

According to the present embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

First, the specific unit movable timing (time point) is determined, and the first production unit is set so that the first production unit 310, the second production unit 320, and the third production unit 330 are non-movable at the specific unit movement timing. It controls 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330. Therefore, when the specific unit 340 (specific movable portion 341) is movable, the player's attention to the specific unit 340 can be improved. In other words, the unit that the player should pay attention to can be clarified.

Further, since the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are set to be non-movable at the specific unit movable timing, the first effect described in the modified example of the fifth embodiment is described above. The effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 can be moved to the second position, and the specific unit 340 can be contacted when they are simultaneously moved to the fourth position (see FIG. 62). ), The degree of freedom in designing the shapes of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, the third effect unit 330, and the specific unit 340 can be improved. In this way, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the shapes of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, the third effect unit 330, and the specific unit 340 by applying the modified example of the fifth embodiment. The same applies to the following seventh to tenth embodiments.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are immovable when the player operates the first frame button 26 during the special processing period. Even if there is an effect unit, if the movement is not completed within the special end period, the movement process for the effect unit is not executed. That is, during the special processing period, it is possible to create a difference in production (so-called breaking of the law) that the movement of the production unit is not started even though the player operates the first frame button 26. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a new effect that the various effect units 310 to 330 that should be movable may not move in the process of operating (continuously hitting) the first frame button 26. In addition, the player who noticed that the various production units 310 to 330 that should be movable cannot move, only understood that the specific unit 340 would move when the first frame button 26 was subsequently operated. Since the first frame button 26 can be operated in the state, the player's attention to various production units 310 to 330 can be further improved.

(Modified example of the sixth embodiment)
A modified example of the sixth embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, when the player operates the first frame button 26, the voice side MPU 152 determines that it is the specific unit movable timing (FIG. 66, S2518: YES), so that the specific unit movable process is executed. However, the specific unit movement process may be performed when the player determines that the specific unit movement timing is reached without operating the first frame button 26. When the specific unit movable process is executed in this way, as shown in FIG. 69, the determination process of the specific unit movable timing timer counter in step 2518 is performed with respect to the process corresponding to the first frame button described with reference to FIG. The specific unit movable process in step 2507, the specific unit movable effect command transmission process in step 2508, the effect unit operation valid period timer counter 0 clear process in step 2509, and the specific unit movable flag erase process in step 2520 are not executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 70, after executing the specific unit preprocessing of step 1620 for the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 64, the specific unit movable flag determination process of step 2516 described with reference to FIG. S1621), specific unit movable timing timer counter determination process in step 2518 (S1624), specific unit movable process in step 2507 (S1625), specific unit movable effect command transmission process in step 2508 (S1626), effect unit operation valid in step 2509. The period timer counter 0 clearing process (S1627) and the specific unit movable flag erasing process (S1628) in step 2520 may be appropriately executed.

With such a configuration, the specific unit 340 will move at the specific unit movable timing. Therefore, the probability that the specific unit 340 will move immediately before the end of the movement of the effect unit increases, and it is possible to provide a more powerful (exhilarating) effect for the player.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the normal processing period can be changed as appropriate. For example, the normal processing period may be twice the movable period of the third effect unit 330, may be three times the movable period, or may be the movable period of the second effect unit 320. good.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the table referred to in the specific unit movable lottery process in step 2802 and the specific unit movable timing lottery process in step 2805 can be changed as appropriate. For example, in step 2805, the time point at which the effect unit operation valid period ends may be determined as the specific unit movable timing.

(7th Embodiment)
A seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described. In this embodiment, with respect to the sixth embodiment, when the player operates the first frame button 26, the specific unit movable process is executed. Others are the same as those in the sixth embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here.

In the sixth embodiment, when the player operates the first frame button 26, the voice side MPU 152 determines that the specific unit movable timing timer counter is 0 (FIG. 66, S2518: YES), and the specific unit is movable. The process (FIG. 66, S2507) is executed. That is, in the sixth embodiment, when the specific unit movable flag is stored and the period until the specific unit movable process is set in the specific unit movable timing timer counter, a predetermined period elapses from the start of the effect unit operation valid period. Then (when the specific unit movable timing timer counter becomes 0), the specific unit 340 moves when the player operates the first frame button 26 regardless of the operation status of the first frame button 26 before that. That is, even if the player operates the first frame button 26 only once in a situation where it is assumed that a predetermined period has elapsed since the effective period for operating the effect unit was started, the specific unit 340 can move. Therefore, the player is made to operate the first frame button 26 to move the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330, and the player is allowed to operate the first effect unit 310 and the second effect unit 320. , And while enjoying the movement of the third production unit 330, there is a possibility that the purpose of improving the expectation until the specific unit 340 moves may be diminished.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the specific unit movable lottery process is executed by operating the first frame button 26. That is, when the game times are the winning results, the probability that the specific unit 340 will move increases as the player operates the first frame button 26.

First, the specific unit pre-processing of step 1620 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 64) executed by the voice-side MPU 152 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the specific unit preprocessing. This process is basically the same as the specific unit pre-process described in FIG. 65, but the specific unit movable lottery process (S2802) is executed for the specific unit pre-process described in FIG. 65. This is a process that was prevented.

Specifically, in the specific unit pre-processing, when it is determined in step 2801 that the game result of the current game is a winning result (S2801: YES), the specific unit movable lottery process is not performed and step 2805 is specified. Unit movable timing Lottery processing is executed.
That is, in the specific unit pre-processing of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the game result of this game is a winning result, the specific unit movable timing lottery process is always executed to determine the specific unit movable timing. In the unit pre-processing, the lottery process for whether or not to actually move the specific unit 340 is not executed, and the specific unit movement flag is not stored.

Next, the first frame button correspondence process (S1618) executed by the voice side MPU 152 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 72. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing a process corresponding to the first frame button. This process is basically the same as the process corresponding to the first frame button described with reference to FIG. 66, and is a specific unit movable lottery process (S2505) with respect to the process corresponding to the first frame button described with reference to FIG. 66. ) Is added.

Specifically, when it is determined in step 2504 that the effect period timer counter is not 0 (S2504: NO), it is determined whether or not the specific unit movable flag is stored in the specific unit movable flag storage area 154j. (S2516). In the present embodiment, the specific unit movable flag is stored by the specific unit flag storage process (S2521) described later during the process corresponding to the first frame button.

When it is determined that the specific unit movable flag is not stored (S2516: NO), the specific unit movable lottery process (S2505) is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, the lottery for whether or not to move the specific unit 340 is executed when the player operates the first frame button 26. Here, the specific unit movable lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a specific unit movable lottery process.

In the process during operation of the specific unit, first, it is determined whether or not the normal processing period timer counter set in step 2808 in the specific unit preprocessing (FIG. 71) is 0 (S2607). Then, when it is determined that the normal processing period timer counter is 0 (S2607: YES), the present specific unit movable lottery process is terminated as it is. In the present embodiment, when the normal processing period timer counter is 0, the normal processing period is not set by determining that the current game number is not a winning result in the specific unit preprocessing (FIG. 71). (S2801: NO), or when it is determined that the current game number is a winning result and the normal processing period is set, but the normal processing period has elapsed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal processing period timer counter is not 0 (S2607: NO), that is, when the game times this time are the winning results and the normal processing period has not elapsed, the normal processing acquired in step 2607 It is determined whether or not the value of the period timer counter is ½ or more of the value of the normal processing period set in the specific unit preprocessing (FIG. 71) (S2608). When it is determined that the acquired value is smaller than 1/2 of the set normal processing period value (S2608: NO), it is determined whether or not the acquired value is 1/4 or more of the set normal processing period value. (S2609). Then, when it is determined that the acquired value is ½ or more of the set normal processing period value (S2608: YES), the specific unit first movable lottery process is executed (S2604), and the acquired value is When it is determined that the value is smaller than 1/2 and 1/4 or more of the set normal processing period value (S2609: YES), the specific unit second movable lottery process is executed (S2605), and the acquired value is obtained. If it is determined that the value is smaller than 1/4 of the value of the normal processing period set by (S2609: NO), the specific unit third movable lottery process is executed (S2606), and the specific unit movable lottery process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the first frame button correspondence process (FIG. 72), after executing the specific unit movable lottery process of step 2505, it is determined whether or not the specific unit movable lottery process has been won (S2506), and the specific unit movable lottery is performed. When it is determined that the process has been won (S2506: YES), the specific unit movable flag is stored in the specific unit movable flag storage area 154j. As a result, once the affirmative determination is made in step 2516 and the specific unit movable flag is stored once, the specific unit movable lottery process of step 2505 is not executed.

When the specific unit movable flag is stored in step 2521, or when it is determined that the specific unit movable lottery process has not been won (S2506: NO), after executing the effect unit normal movable process (S2510), the first End the frame button correspondence process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific unit movable flag is stored (S2516: YES), it is determined whether or not the normal processing period timer counter is 0 (S2517). Then, when it is determined that the normal processing period timer counter is not 0 (S2517: NO), the effect unit normal movable processing is executed (S2510), and when it is determined that the normal processing period timer counter is 0 (S2517: NO). S2517: YES), as described in FIG. 66 above, based on the value of the specific unit movable timing timer counter (S2518), the effect unit special movable process (S2519), or the specific unit movable process (S2507) and subsequent processing (S2507). S2508, S2509, S2520) is executed to end the process corresponding to the first frame button.

The timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 152 of the present embodiment is the same as that in FIG. 64, and the specific unit movable lottery process was won (FIG. 72, S2506: YES), but the normal processing period has elapsed. If the first frame button 26 is not operated by the player during the unit operation valid period, the specific unit movable flag is cleared in step 1623.

According to the present embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the present embodiment, the specific unit movable lottery process (S2505) is executed in the first frame button corresponding process (FIG. 72). That is, the specific unit movable lottery process is executed when the player operates the first frame button 26. Therefore, when the game times are the winning results, the more the player operates the first frame button 26, the more the specific unit movable lottery process is executed, and the higher the probability that the specific unit 340 will move. Therefore, the player can positively operate the first frame button 26, and the player is given a sense of expectation until the specific unit 340 moves while enjoying the movement of the various production units 310 to 330. be able to.

Further, since the specific unit movable lottery process is executed when the player operates the first frame button 26, the player operates the first frame button 26 while expecting the player to move the specific unit 340. It is possible to select whether to enjoy the production to the end without operating the first frame button 26. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the game and prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

(Modified example of the seventh embodiment)
A modified example of the seventh embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, similarly to the modification of the sixth embodiment, in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 70), it is determined whether or not the specific unit movable flag is stored (S1621), and the specific unit movable flag is determined. Is stored (S1621), the subsequent processes of steps 1624 to 1628 may be executed. Even with such a configuration, since the specific unit movable flag is stored in the first frame button corresponding process (FIG. 72), the player can positively operate the first frame button 26.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the comparison values of step 2608 and step 2609 in the specific unit movable lottery process (FIG. 73) can be appropriately changed. For example, in step 2608, the value of the normal processing period timer counter is the normal processing period. It may be determined whether or not it is 1/3 or less of the value set in the timer counter.

(8th Embodiment)
An eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, when the first frame button 26 is operated within the special processing period with respect to the sixth embodiment, the movable period of the effect unit is changed so that the movement is completed within the special processing period. be. Others are the same as those in the sixth embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here.

First, the effect unit special movable processing executed by the audio side MPU 152 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. 74 and 75 are flowcharts showing the effect unit special movable processing. This process is basically the same as the effect unit special movable process described with reference to FIG. 67, and it is determined that the movable period (basic movable period) of the effect unit is larger than the value of the specific unit movable timing timer counter. In this case, the effect unit shortening movable process (S2914, S2915, S2916) is executed. The effect unit special movable process is a process executed in step 2519 of the first frame button corresponding process (FIG. 66).

Specifically, when it is determined in step 2903 that the movable period of the first effect unit 310 is equal to or less than the value of the specific unit movable timing timer counter (S2903: YES), the first effect unit normal movable process is executed (S2904). When it is determined that the movable period of the first effect unit 310 is larger than the value of the specific unit movable timing timer counter (S2903: NO), the first effect unit shortened movable process is executed (S2914). The first effect unit normal movable process is the same process as the first effect unit movable process. On the other hand, the first effect unit shortening movable process is a movable process in which one movable period of the first effect unit 310 is shorter than the normal movable process of the first effect unit, and is the process corresponding to the first frame button (FIG. 66). This is a movable process in which the value of the specific unit movable timing timer counter acquired in step 2518 is set as one movable period (shortened movable period). That is, in the first effect unit shortening movement process in step 2914, the first effect unit 310 is moved so that the time point at which the movement ends coincides with the time point of the specific unit movement process. In the present embodiment, in the first effect unit shortening movable process, the movable speed of the first movable portion 311 is made faster than the normal movable process of the first effect unit, so that one movable period is shortened.

Similarly, when it is determined in step 2907 that the movable period of the second effect unit 320 is equal to or less than the value of the specific unit movable timing timer counter (S2907: YES), the second effect unit normal movable process is executed (S2908). When it is determined that the movable period of the second effect unit 320 is larger than the value of the specific unit movable timing timer counter (S2907: NO), the second effect unit shortened movable process is executed (S2915). Further, when it is determined in step 2911 that the movable period of the third effect unit 330 is equal to or less than the value of the specific unit movable timing timer counter (S2911: YES), the third effect unit normal movable process is executed (S2912), and the third effect unit is executed. When it is determined that the movable period of the 3 effect unit 330 is larger than the value of the specific unit movable timing timer counter (S2911: NO), the third effect unit shortening movable process is executed (S2916).

The second effect unit normal movable process in step 2908 and the third effect unit normal movable process in step 2912 are the same processes as the second effect unit movable process and the third effect unit movable process. Further, in the second effect unit shortening movable process of step 2915 and the third effect unit shortening movable process of step 2916, one movable period is shortened by the same method as the first effect unit shortening movable process of step 2914. ..

However, the method of shortening one movable period in the first to third effect unit shortening movable processes (S2914, S2915, S2916) is not limited to the above, and for example, the movable distance of the first movable portion 311. The one movable period may be shortened by shortening (see the eleventh embodiment described later). That is, the first movable portion 311 may shorten one movable period by returning to the first position without reaching the second position from the first position. Further, the method of shortening one movable period in the first to third effect unit shortening movable processing may be a combination of a method of shortening the movable distance and increasing the movable speed.

Next, when the player operates the first frame button 26 during the effect period during which the effect unit is operated, the first effect unit 310 (first movable unit 311), the second effect unit 320 (second movable unit 321), and the second 3 The movable mode of the effect unit 330 (third movable portion 331) and the specific unit 340 (specific movable portion 341) will be described with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76 is a timing chart showing the effect period, the state of the first frame button 26, the state of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, the third effect unit 330, and the state of the specific unit 340. Note that FIG. 76 describes an example in which the game times are the winning results, the button operation instruction (see FIG. 51) is displayed on the display screen 80a, and the specific unit movable lottery process is won.

First, in FIG. 76, similarly to FIG. 68 of the sixth embodiment, the final time point of the effect unit operation valid period set in step 1612 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 64) is set to the time point T45e and is specified. The final time point (specific unit movable timing) of the period until the specific unit movable process set in step 2806 of the unit preprocess (FIG. 65) is set to T45c. Therefore, the period up to the time point T45a obtained by subtracting the movable period of the third effect unit 330 from the period up to the time point T45c is the normal processing period, and the period from the time point T45a to the time point T45c is the special processing period.

Then, when the player operates the first frame button 26 at the time point T45b within the special processing period after the time point T45a, in the example of FIG. 76, the movable period of the first effect unit 310 is from the period until the specific unit movable process. Although it is short (FIG. 74, S2903: YES), the movable period of the second effect unit 320 and the movable period of the third effect unit 330 are longer than the period until the specific unit movement process (FIG. 74, S2907: NO, FIG. 75, S2911). : NO). Therefore, the audio side MPU 152 executes the first effect unit normal movable process (S2904), the second effect unit shortened movable process (S2915), and the third effect unit shortened movable process (S2916). That is, the second effect unit 320 and the third effect unit 330 are subjected to the shortened movable process so that the movable ends when the specific unit movable timing timer counter reaches 0 (time point T45c).

After that, when the player operates the first frame button 26 at the time point T45d after the period until the specific unit movable process at the time point T45c has elapsed, the period until the specific unit movable process has elapsed (FIGS. 66, S2516). : YES), the voice side MPU 152 moves the specific unit 340 by executing the specific unit movement process.

According to the present embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the player operates the first frame button 26 during the special processing period, if there is an effect unit that is not movable, the movable period is shorter than the period until the specific unit movable processing. Executes the normal movable process of the effect unit (S2904, S2908, S2912), and executes the shortened movable process when the movable period is longer than the period until the specific unit movable process (S2914, S2915, S2916). That is, during the special processing period, the effect unit whose movable period is longer than the period until the specific unit movable process is subjected to the movable process in which the movable mode (movable speed, movable distance, etc.) is changed, and the difference in the effect (difference in production). So-called breaking of the law) can be created. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a new effect that the movable mode of the various effect units 310 to 330 changes in the process of operating (continuously hitting) the first frame button 26. In addition, the player who noticed the effect that the movable mode of the various effect units 310 to 330 has changed is in a state where only he / she understands that the specific unit 340 is movable when the first frame button 26 is subsequently operated. Since the first frame button 26 can be operated, the player's attention to various production units 310 to 330 can be further improved.

It should be noted that such a change in the movable mode is less noticeable to the player than the configuration of the sixth embodiment in which the effect unit does not move even though the first frame button 26 is operated. It is possible to further improve the degree of attention to various production units 310 to 330.

(Modified example of the eighth embodiment)
A modified example of the eighth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment, similarly to the modification of the sixth embodiment, when the player determines that it is the timing to move the specific unit 340 without operating the first frame button 26, the specific unit is movable. The process may be performed (see FIGS. 69 and 70).

Further, in the eighth embodiment, as in the seventh embodiment, the specific unit movable lottery process (S2505) may be executed in the first frame button correspondence process (FIG. 72).

(9th Embodiment)
A ninth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, when the first frame button 26 is operated within the special processing period with respect to the sixth embodiment, the end time of the special processing period, the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and The third effect unit 330 is designed to coincide with the end point of movement. Others are the same as those in the sixth embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here.

First, the configuration of the audio side RAM 154 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 77, in addition to various areas 154a to 154g, 154j, 154k, and 154m, the audio side RAM 154 is provided with various effect unit standby timer counter areas 154n and various effect unit standby flag storage areas 154p. There is. Various production unit standby timer counters The area 154n stores various production unit standby timer counters in which the standby period until the production unit is moved is set in the production unit special movable processing (FIGS. 78 and 79) described later. This is the area where you are. The various production unit standby flag storage areas 154p are areas in which the production unit standby flags corresponding to the production unit standby timer counters for which the standby period is set are stored in the production unit special movable processing (FIGS. 78 and 79) described later. be.

Here, the normal processing period of the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, the normal processing period is a period obtained by subtracting the movable period × 1.5 of the third effect unit 330 from the period until the specific unit movable processing (see FIG. 82). Further, the special processing period is a period obtained by subtracting the normal processing period from the effect period during which the effect unit is operated, and is set to a period of the movable period of the third effect unit 330 × 1.5. That is, in the present embodiment, the special treatment period is longer than that in the sixth embodiment.

Further, the standby period of the effect unit in the present embodiment is a state in which the player can move when the first frame button 26 is operated, but waits until the player starts to move after the first frame button 26 is operated. It is a period to do.

Next, the effect unit special movable processing executed by the audio side MPU 152 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 and 79. 78 and 79 are flowcharts showing the effect unit special movable processing. This process is basically the same as the effect unit special movable process described in FIG. 67, and the player can perform the process within the special process period with respect to the effect unit special movable process described in FIG. 67. When the 1-frame button 26 is operated, if the movable period of the effect unit is shorter than the period until the specific unit movable process, the movable process of the effect unit is delayed. The effect unit special movable process is the effect unit special movable process in step 2519 in the first frame button corresponding process described with reference to FIG. 66.

Specifically, in step 2902, it is determined that the first effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2902: YES), and in step 2903, the movable period of the first effect unit 310 is equal to or less than the value of the specific unit movable timing timer counter. (S2902: YES), it is determined whether or not the first effect unit standby timer counter is 0 (S2917). Then, when it is determined that the first effect unit standby timer counter is 0 (S2917: YES), that is, when it is determined that the first effect unit standby period is not set, the first effect unit standby period calculation process is performed. Execute (S2918). In this standby period calculation process, the standby period (the period until the start of movement of the first effect unit 310) is calculated so that the time point at which the movement of the first effect unit 310 ends coincides with the time point until the specific unit moves.

Next, the standby period calculated in step 2918 is set in the first effect unit standby timer counter stored in the various effect unit standby timer counter areas 154n of the audio side RAM 154 (S2919). As a result, after the waiting period is set in step 2919, a negative determination is made in step 2917. Next, the first effect unit standby flag is stored in the various effect unit standby flag storage areas 154p provided in the audio side RAM 154 (S2920).

When the flag storage process of step 2920 is executed, if it is determined in step 2902 that the first effect unit movable period timer counter is not 0 (S2902: NO), or if the first effect unit standby timer counter is not 0 in step 2917. If a determination is made (S2917: NO), the determination process of step 2906 is performed, and if an affirmative determination is made in step 2906, the determination process of step 2907 is performed. Then, when it is determined in step 2907 that the movable period of the second effect unit is equal to or less than the specific unit movable timing timer counter (S2907: YES), it is determined whether or not the second effect unit standby timer counter is 0 (S2921). ). When it is determined that the second effect unit standby timer counter is 0 (S2921: YES), that is, when it is determined that the second effect unit standby period is not set, the second effect is as shown in FIG. 79. The unit standby period calculation process is executed (S2922). In this standby period calculation process, the standby period (the period until the start of movement of the second effect unit 320) is calculated so that the time point at which the second effect unit 320 is movable ends coincides with the time point until the specific unit is moved. ..

Next, the standby period calculated in step 2922 is set in the second effect unit standby timer counter stored in the various effect unit standby timer counter areas 154n of the audio side RAM 154 (S2923). As a result, after the waiting period is set in step 2923, a negative determination is made in step 2921. Next, the second effect unit standby flag is stored in the various effect unit standby flag storage areas 154p provided in the audio side RAM 154 (S2924).

When the flag storage process of step 2924 is executed, if it is determined in step 2906 that the second effect unit movable period timer counter is not 0 (S2906: NO), or if the second effect unit standby timer counter is not 0 in step 2921. If a determination is made (S2921: NO), the determination process of step 2910 is performed, and if an affirmative determination is made in step 2910, the determination process of step 2911 is performed. Then, when it is determined in step 2911 that the third effect unit movable period is equal to or less than the specific unit movable timing timer counter (S2911: YES), it is determined whether or not the third effect unit standby timer counter is 0 (S2925). ). When it is determined that the third effect unit standby timer counter is 0 (S2925: YES), that is, when it is determined that the third effect unit standby period is not set, the third effect unit standby period calculation process is executed. (S2926). In this standby period calculation process, the standby period (the period until the start of movement of the third effect unit 330) is calculated so that the time point at which the third effect unit 330 is movable ends coincides with the time point until the specific unit is moved. ..

Next, the standby period calculated in step 2926 is set in the third effect unit standby timer counter stored in the various effect unit standby timer counter areas 154n of the audio side RAM 154 (S2927). As a result, after the waiting period is set in step 2927, a negative determination is made in step 2925. Next, after storing the third effect unit standby flag in the various effect unit standby flag storage areas 154p provided in the audio side RAM 154 (S2928), the present effect unit special movable process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, the movable period is lengthened in the order of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330. Therefore, within the special processing period, the first frame button 26 is operated by the player while the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are immovable, and the first effect unit When a standby period is set for the 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330, the standby period is the standby period until the first effect unit 310 is moved, and the second effect unit 320 is movable. The waiting period until the third effect unit 330 is moved becomes longer in this order.

Subsequently, the timer interrupt processing executed by the voice MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. 80. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. This process is basically the same as the timer interrupt process described in FIG. 64, and is a process in which the effect unit standby release process (S1629) is added to the timer interrupt process described in FIG. 64. be.

Specifically, in this timer interrupt process, after the timer update process is executed (S1616), the effect unit standby release process is executed (S1629). Here, the effect unit standby release process will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the effect unit standby release process.

In the effect unit standby release process, first, it is determined whether or not the first effect unit standby flag is stored in the various effect unit standby flag storage areas 154p of the audio side RAM 154 (S3001). Then, when it is determined that the first effect unit standby flag is stored (S3001: YES), the value of the first effect unit standby timer counter is acquired, and whether or not the first effect unit standby timer counter is 0. (S3002). When it is determined that the first effect unit standby timer counter is 0 (S3002: YES), the first effect unit movable process is executed (S3003). That is, when the player operates the first frame button 26 during the special processing period and determines that the waiting period set for the first effect unit 310 has elapsed, the first effect unit movable process is executed. After executing the first effect unit movable process, the movable period of the first effect unit 310 is set in the timer counter of the first effect unit movable period (S3004), and after the first effect unit standby flag is cleared (S3005), The process of canceling the standby of the production unit is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, the waiting period until the first effect unit 310 is moved as described above is longer than the waiting period until the second effect unit 320 and the third effect unit 330 are moved. When the first effect unit movable process is executed, the second effect unit movable process (S3008) and the third effect unit movable process (S3013), which will be described later, have already been executed. Therefore, when the first effect unit movable process is executed, the effect unit standby release process is completed without executing the processes (S3006 to S3015) related to the second effect unit 320 and the third effect unit 330, which will be described later. ..

When it is determined in step 3001 that the first effect unit standby flag is not stored (S3001: NO), or when it is determined in step 3002 that the first effect unit standby timer counter is not 0 (S3002: NO). , It is determined whether or not the second production unit standby flag is stored in the various production unit standby flag storage area 154p of the audio side RAM 154 (S3006). Then, when it is determined that the second effect unit standby flag is stored (S3006: YES), the value of the second effect unit standby timer counter is acquired, and whether or not the second effect unit standby timer counter is 0. (S3007). When it is determined that the second effect unit standby timer counter is 0 (S3007: YES), the second effect unit movable process is executed (S3008). That is, when the player operates the first frame button 26 during the special processing period and determines that the waiting period set for the second effect unit 320 has elapsed, the second effect unit movable process is executed. After executing the second effect unit movable process, the movable period of the second effect unit 320 is set in the second effect unit movable period timer counter (S3009), and after the second effect unit standby flag is cleared (S3010), The process of canceling the standby of the production unit is terminated. That is, as described above, the waiting period until the second effect unit 320 is moved is longer than the waiting period until the third effect unit 330 is moved. Therefore, when the second effect unit movement process is executed. The third effect unit movable process, which will be described later, has already been executed. Therefore, when the second effect unit movable process is executed, the effect unit standby release process is terminated without performing the processes (S3011 to S3015) related to the third effect unit 330, which will be described later.

When it is determined in step 3006 that the second effect unit standby flag is not stored (S3006: NO), or when it is determined in step 3007 that the second effect unit standby timer counter is not 0 (S3007: NO). , It is determined whether or not the third effect unit standby flag is stored in the various effect unit standby flag storage areas 154p of the audio side RAM 154 (S3011). Then, when it is determined that the third effect unit standby flag is stored (S3011: YES), the value of the third effect unit standby timer counter is acquired, and whether or not the third effect unit standby timer counter is 0. (S3012). When it is determined that the third effect unit standby timer counter is 0 (S3012: YES), the third effect unit movable process is executed (S3013). That is, when the player operates the first frame button 26 during the special processing period and determines that the waiting period set for the third effect unit 330 has elapsed, the third effect unit movable process is executed. After executing the third effect unit movable process, the movable period of the third effect unit 330 is set in the third effect unit movable period timer counter (S3014), and the third effect unit standby flag is erased (S3015). Ends the effect unit standby release process. On the other hand, when it is determined in step 3011 that the third effect unit standby flag is not stored (S3011: NO), or when it is determined in step 3012 that the third effect unit standby flag is not stored (S3012: NO), the process of canceling the standby of the production unit is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the effect unit standby release process, when the standby period for various effect units 310 to 330 is set, the corresponding effect is produced after the standby period elapses regardless of whether or not the first frame button 26 is operated. Executes the movement process of the unit.

Next, when the player operates the first frame button 26 during the effect period during which the effect unit is operated, the first effect unit 310 (first movable unit 311), the second effect unit 320 (second movable unit 321), and the second 3 The movable mode of the effect unit 330 (third movable portion 331) and the specific unit 340 (specific movable portion 341) will be described with reference to FIG. 82. FIG. 82 is a timing chart showing the effect period, the state of the first frame button 26, the state of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, the third effect unit 330, and the state of the specific unit 340. Note that FIG. 82 describes an example in which the game times are the winning results, the button operation instruction (see FIG. 51) is displayed on the display screen 80a, and the specific unit movable lottery process is won.

First, in FIG. 82, similarly to FIG. 68 of the sixth embodiment, the final time point of the effect unit operation valid period set in step 1612 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 80) is set to the time point T46h and is specified. The final time point (specific unit movable timing) of the period until the specific unit movable process set in step 2806 of the unit preprocess (FIG. 65) is set to T46f. Therefore, the period up to the time point T46a obtained by subtracting the movable period × 1.5 of the third effect unit 330 from the period up to the time point T46c is the normal processing period, and the period from the time point T46a to the time point T46c is the special processing period.

Then, when the player operates the first frame button 26 at the time point T46b within the special processing period after the time point T46a, in the example of FIG. 82, the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit All 330 are non-movable (FIG. 78, S2902: YES, 2906: YES, FIG. 79, S2910: YES), and at the time point T46b, the movable period of the first effect unit 310 and the operation of the second effect unit 320 are movable. Both the period and the movable period of the third effect unit 330 are longer than the period until the specific unit movable process (FIG. 78, S2903: YES, 2907: YES, FIG. 80, S2911: YES). Further, since the operation of the first frame button 26 at the time point T46b is the first operation after the special processing period is started, the operation of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 is still present. The waiting period is not set (FIGS. 79, S2917: YES, S2921: YES, FIG. 80, S2925: YES).

Therefore, the audio side MPU 152 sets a standby period for each of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 so that the end point of movement coincides with the time point until the specific unit movement process. (FIGS. 78, S2919, 79, S2923, S2927).

Then, the audio side MPU 152 executes the third effect unit movable process when the standby period for the third effect unit 330 elapses at the time point T46c (FIG. 81, S3013), and the standby period for the second effect unit 320 elapses at the time point T46d. Then, the second effect unit movable process is executed (FIG. 81, S3008), and when the waiting period for the first effect unit 310 elapses at the time point T46e, the first effect unit movable process is executed (FIG. 81, S3003), and the first effect is executed. In the unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330, the time point T46f is the end point of movement. After that, when the player operates the first frame button 26 at the time point T46g after the period until the specific unit movable process at the time point T46f has elapsed, the period until the specific unit movable process has elapsed (FIGS. 66, S2518). : YES), the voice side MPU 152 moves the specific unit 340 by executing the specific unit movement process.

According to the ninth embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the player operates the first frame button 26 during the special processing period, if the movable period is shorter than the period until the specific unit movable processing, the waiting period is set in the corresponding effect unit. (FIGS. 78, S2919, 79, S2923, S2927). That is, it is possible to create a difference in production (so-called breaking of the law) that the movement of the production unit is not started at the same time as the operation of the first frame button 26. Therefore, in the process of operating (continuously hitting) the first frame button 26, the player expects that the various effect units 310 to 330 that should be movable will not move, and the first frame button 26 Can be operated, and the degree of attention of the player to various production units 310 to 330 can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the waiting period is set, the movable end time points of the various effect units 310 to 330 for which the waiting period is set are set to match. For this reason, the player who noticed or noticed (feeling uncomfortable) the effect that the movement was not started (the waiting period was set) at the same time as the operation of the first frame button 26, then the various effect units 310. Pay attention to the game while expecting that the movement of ~ 330 will end at the same time. Then, when the movement of the production units 310 to 330 for which the standby period is set ends at the same time, only oneself is confident that the specific unit 340 will move after that (while immersing himself in a sense of superiority). The 1-frame button 26 can be operated. Therefore, in the process of operating (continuously hitting) the first frame button 26, the degree of attention of the player to the various production units 310 to 330 can be further improved.

Further, even for the player who did not notice the effect that the movement was not started at the same time as the operation of the first frame button 26, when he noticed that the movement of the various effect units 310 to 330 was completed at the same time, the first step was performed. The first frame button 26 can be operated with the expectation that the specific unit 340 may move when the frame button 26 is operated.

(Modified example of the ninth embodiment)
A modified example of the ninth embodiment will be described. In the ninth embodiment, similarly to the modification of the sixth embodiment, when the player determines that it is the timing to move the specific unit 340 without operating the first frame button 26, the specific unit is movable. The process may be performed (see FIGS. 69 and 70). Further, in the ninth embodiment, as in the seventh embodiment, the specific unit movable lottery process (S2505) may be executed in the first frame button correspondence process (FIG. 72). In the case of such a configuration, when the standby period is set for the production unit, the specific unit 340 moves at the same time as the movement of the production unit ends, so that the player can feel the power of the specific unit 340 (exhilaration). The feeling) can be impressed, and the interest in the game can be improved by giving the impression of smooth movement from the movement of the production unit to the specific unit 340. In particular, as shown in FIG. 82, when a standby period is set for each of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330, all the effect units 310 to 330 are movable. Since the specific unit 340 moves at the same time as the end of, it is possible to provide a more powerful effect to the player.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, when the special processing period is set to be at least twice the movable period of the third effect unit 330 and the effect unit is in motion from the normal processing period to the special processing period, The corresponding effect unit standby flag may be stored regardless of whether or not the first frame button 26 is operated. For example, in FIG. 82, assuming that the special processing period is set to be at least twice the movable period of the third effect unit 330 and the player operates the first frame button 26 immediately before the time point T46a, the third effect unit Since the 330 is in motion from the normal processing period to the special processing period, the third effect unit standby flag is stored and the third effect unit 330 is at the end of operation regardless of whether or not the first frame button 26 is operated. The waiting period may be set so as to coincide with the time point until the specific unit movable process. With such a configuration, the first frame button 26 is actively operated, but the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are operated because the timing of operation was accidentally wrong. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the effect that the movement of the first frame ends at the same time, and the player can positively operate the first frame button 26.

Moreover, you may combine the said 8th Embodiment with the said 9th Embodiment. That is, for example, in FIG. 82, when the player does not operate the first frame button 26 at the time point T46b and the player operates the first frame button 26 at the time point between the time point T46d and the time point T46e, the first frame button 26 is operated. 1 The effect unit 310 is subjected to the movable process after the standby period has elapsed, but the second effect unit 320 and the third effect unit 330 are not subjected to the movable process (FIGS. 78, S2907: NO, FIG. 79, S2911: NO). ). Therefore, when the second effect unit standby flag and the third effect unit standby flag are not stored, the movement is completed within the special processing period as in the eighth embodiment (the second effect at the time point T46f). The shortened movable processing of the second effect unit 320 and the third effect unit 330 may be executed (so that the movement of the unit 320 and the third effect unit 330 is completed). According to this, the probability that the specific unit 340 will move at the same time as the movement of all the effect units 310 to 330 is completed increases, and the player can easily experience the powerful (exhilarating) effect.

(10th Embodiment)
A tenth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In this embodiment, the timing for executing the specific unit movable process is changed with respect to the first embodiment. Others are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here.

First, the audio side RAM 154 of this embodiment has the same configuration as that described in the second embodiment (see FIG. 55), and is provided with various effect unit movable flag storage areas 154h.

Next, the effect unit movable process (S2510) executed by the audio side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the effect unit movable processing. This process is basically the same as the effect unit movable process described with reference to FIG. 48, and is a process of storing the effect unit movable flag with respect to the effect unit movable process described with reference to FIG. 48 (S2721 to). This is a process in which S2723) is added. It should be noted that this effect unit movable process is executed by the process corresponding to the first frame button (FIG. 86), which will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 83, after setting the movable period of the first effect unit 310 in the timer counter for the movable period of the first effect unit in step 2704, various effect unit movable flags provided in the audio side RAM 154. The first effect unit movable flag is stored in the storage area 154h (S2721). Similarly, after setting the movable period of the second effect unit 320 in the timer counter of the second effect unit movable period in step 2707, the second effect unit movable flag is set in the various effect unit movable flag storage areas 154h provided in the audio side RAM 154. Is stored (S2722). Further, after setting the movable period of the third effect unit 330 in the timer counter of the third effect unit movable period in step 2710, the third effect unit movable flag is set in the various effect unit movable flag storage areas 154h provided in the audio side RAM 154. Store (S2723).

Subsequently, the timer interrupt processing executed by the voice MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. This process is basically the same as the timer interrupt process described in FIG. 36, and is a process in which a specific unit corresponding process (S1630) is added to the timer interrupt process described in FIG. 36. .. Specifically, in this timer interrupt process, the timer update process is executed in step 1616, and then the specific unit correspondence process (S1630) is executed.

Next, the specific unit correspondence process will be described with reference to FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing a process corresponding to a specific unit.

In the specific unit correspondence process, first, it is determined whether or not the effect unit operation validity period timer counter is 0 (S3101). That is, it is determined whether or not the button operation instruction is displayed on the display screen 80a. Then, when it is determined that the effect unit operation valid period timer counter is not 0 (S3101: NO), the game of the current game is based on the information stored in the retained data area 154e in step 1706 in the main command correspondence process (FIG. 37). When it is determined whether or not the result is a hit result (S3102) and it is determined that the result is a hit result (S3102: YES), the value of the first to third effect unit movable period timer counters is acquired (S3103).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not all the 1st to 3rd effect unit movable period timer counters are 0 (S3104). That is, it is determined whether or not the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are all immovable. Then, when it is determined that all the 1st to 3rd effect unit movable period timer counters are 0 (S3104: YES), it is determined whether or not all the 1st to 3rd effect unit movable flags are stored (S3105). ). That is, the effect unit movable flag is stored after the effect unit is moved in the effect unit movement process (FIG. 83), and is deleted after the effect unit movable period timer counter becomes 0 (S3106, S3107 described later). By determining whether or not the effect unit movable flag is stored, it is determined whether or not the effect unit has been movable until immediately before.

When it is determined that all the 1st to 3rd effect unit movable flags are not stored (S3105: NO), or when it is determined in step 3104 that at least one of the 1st to 3rd effect unit movable period timer counters is not 0. (S3104: NO), when the corresponding effect unit movable flag is stored, the corresponding effect unit flag is deleted (S3106). For example, if it is determined in step 3105 that only the first effect unit movable flag is stored, the first effect unit movable flag is deleted in step 3106.
Further, when it is determined in step 3104 that only the first effect unit movable period timer counter is 0, in step 3106, if the first effect unit movable flag is stored, the first effect unit movable flag is deleted.

On the other hand, when it is determined that all the first to third effect unit movable flags are stored (S3105: YES), that is, the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are movable. When the operations are completed at the same time (when the first movable unit 311, the second movable unit 321 and the third movable unit 331 reach their respective first positions at the same time), the movable flags of the first to third effect units are erased. (S3107), the specific unit movable process (S3108), the specific unit movable effect command transmission process (S3109), and the effect unit operation valid period timer counter 0 clear process (S3110) are executed to end the specific unit correspondence process. The specific unit movable process in step 3108, the specific unit movable effect command transmission process in step 3109, and the effect unit operation valid period timer counter 0 clear process in step 3110 have been described in the first frame button corresponding process (FIG. 46). The process is the same as in step 2507, step 2508, and step 2509.

Further, when it is determined in step 3101 that the effect period timer counter for the effect unit operation is 0 (S3101: YES), or when it is determined that the game result of the current game is not a winning result (S3102: NO). The processing for this specific unit is terminated as it is.

Subsequently, the process corresponding to the first frame button executed by the voice-side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing a process corresponding to the first frame button. This process is basically the same as the process corresponding to the first frame button described with reference to FIG. 46, and is a specific unit movable process or the like (S2505) with respect to the process corresponding to the first frame button described with reference to FIG. 46. This is a process that does not execute ~ S2509).

That is, when it is determined in step 2504 that the effect period timer counter for the effect unit operation is not 0 (S2504: NO), the effect unit movable process in step 2510 is executed. The specific unit movable process and the like are executed in the specific unit corresponding process (FIG. 86) as described above.

Next, when the player operates the first frame button 26 during the effect period during which the effect unit is operated, the first effect unit 310 (first movable unit 311), the second effect unit 320 (second movable unit 321), and the second 3 The movable mode of the effect unit 330 (third movable portion 331) and the specific unit 340 (specific movable portion 341) will be described with reference to FIG. 87. FIG. 87 is a timing chart showing the effect period, the state of the first frame button 26, the state of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, the third effect unit 330, and the state of the specific unit 340. In addition, in FIG. 87, an example in which the game times are the winning results and the button operation instruction (see FIG. 51) is displayed on the display screen 80a will be described.

As described above, when the operation valid period is started, the button operation instruction is displayed on the display screen 80a (see FIG. 51). Then, at the time point T47a or the like, the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are non-movable, and the timer counters for the first to third effect units are all set to 0 ( 85, S3104: NO), the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are immovable (not movable) until immediately before the time point T47a (FIG. 85, S3105). : NO), the voice side MPU 152 does not execute the specific unit movable process.

In that state, when the player operates the first frame button 26 at the time point T47b or the like, the audio side MPU 152 determines whether or not the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are in motion. Is determined, and the movable processing of the effect unit that is not moving is executed (FIG. 83). Then, in the process in which the player operates (continuously hits) the first frame button 26, when the movable end points of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 coincide with each other at the time point T47c (FIG. 85). , S3104: YES, S3105: YES), the voice side MPU 152 executes the specific unit movable process (FIG. 85, S3108), and moves the specific unit 340.

According to the present embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

First, in the present embodiment, when the game result is a winning result in the process of operating the first frame button 26 (FIG. 85, S3102: YES), the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, And when the movable end points of the third effect unit 330 coincide with each other (the first movable portion 311 and the second movable portion 321 and the third movable portion 331 reach the first position at the same time) (FIG. 85, S3104: YES, S3105: YES), the specific unit 340 is made movable (FIG. 85, S3108). Therefore, the specific unit 340 does not move unless the player operates the first frame button 26, and the player can actively operate the first frame button 26.

In addition, the player simply operates (continuously hits) the first frame button 26 while expecting that the movable end points of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 coincide with each other. ), Or intentionally change the timing of operating the first frame button 26 in order to match the movable end points of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330. You can also. Therefore, different playability can be given to the player even in the process of operating (continuously hitting) the first frame button 26, and the player himself can select the method of operating the first frame button 26. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, in the present embodiment, the specific unit 340 moves at the same time as the movement of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 ends. Therefore, it is possible to impress the player with the power (exhilaration) of the specific unit 340, and it is possible to smoothly switch from the movable of the various production units 310 to 330 to the movable of the specific unit 340.

(Modified example of the tenth embodiment)
A modified example of the tenth embodiment will be described. In the tenth embodiment, when the movements of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are completed at the same time, the specific unit movable flag and the like are stored in the audio side RAM 154, and the player The specific unit 340 may be moved when the first frame button 26 is operated next time. With such a configuration, the player who notices that the movements of the first production unit 310, the second production unit 320, and the third production unit 330 have ended at the same time will generate an effect in which the specific unit 340 is movable. Next, the first frame button 26 can be operated while expecting that, and the degree of attention of the player to various production units 310 to 330 can be improved.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, in the determination process of step 3104, an affirmative determination may be made when the effect unit movable period timer counter is equal to or less than a predetermined value. That is, in addition to the case where the movements of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are completed at the same time, a slight difference that does not give the player a sense of discomfort is allowed. May be good. That is, the description of "simultaneous" in the tenth embodiment may be regarded as meaning that it is permissible as long as the deviation does not give a sense of discomfort to the player, in addition to the case where they are exactly the same.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, at least one production unit (for example, the first production unit 310 and the second production unit 320) of the first production unit 310, the second production unit 320, and the third production unit 330. The specific unit 340 may be moved when the movement is completed at the same time.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, the specific movable portion 341 is not made movable when the first movable portion 311 and the second movable portion 321 and the third movable portion 331 reach the first position at the same time. When the first movable portion 311 and the second movable portion 321 and the third movable portion 341 reach the second position at the same time, the specific movable portion 341 may reach the fourth position at the same time (see FIG. 10). ). According to this, when the specific movable portion 341 is movable, all the movable portions 311, 321, 333, 343 of the present embodiment are moved at the same time, so that a more powerful effect is provided to the player. can do.

In the case of such a configuration, for example, a position detecting means for detecting the positions of the first movable portion 311 and the second movable portion 321 and the third movable portion 331 is provided, and the first movable portion 311 and the second movable portion 311 and the second movable portion 331 are provided. The specific movable portion 341 may be controlled based on the movable positions of the portions 321 and the third movable portion 331.

Further, when the first movable portion 311 and the second movable portion 321 and the third movable portion 341 do not reach their respective second positions at the same time but reach their respective predetermined positions at the same time, the specific movable portion 341 is moved. It may be. At least one movable portion (for example, the first movable portion 311 and the second movable portion 321) of the first movable portion 311 and the second movable portion 321 and the third movable portion 331 reach their respective predetermined positions at the same time. At that time, the specific unit 340 may be movable.

(11th Embodiment)
The eleventh embodiment of the present invention will be described. This embodiment is a modification of the effect unit movable process with respect to the first embodiment. Others are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here.

First, the movable modes of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 of the present embodiment will be described. The first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 of the present embodiment have the same basic configurations as those described with reference to FIG. 9, but each have two movable modes. There is.

Specifically, the first movable portion 311 will be moved to the first position after reaching the second position (FIG. 9 (c)) from the first position (FIG. 9 (a)). Return The first movable mode and the first position (FIG. 9 (a)) return to the first position after reaching the fifth position (FIG. 9 (b)) between the first position and the second position. Two movable modes are set. That is, in the second movable mode, the first movable portion 311 starts to move from the first position and returns to the first position without reaching the second position. That is, the first effect unit 310 is set with a first movable mode and a second movable mode in which the movable distance of the first movable portion 311 is different.

In the present embodiment, the fifth position is an intermediate position between the first position and the second position.
Further, in the present embodiment, the movable speeds of the first movable portion 311 are made equal in the first movable mode and the second movable mode. Therefore, the movable period of the first movable mode is longer than the movable period of the second movable mode.

Similarly, although not particularly shown, also in the second effect unit 320 and the third effect unit 330, the first movable mode of returning to the first position after reaching the second position from the first position and the first movable mode from the first position. A second movable mode is set in which the player returns to the first position after reaching the fifth position between the first position and the second position. In the second effect unit 320 and the third effect unit 330, the movable speeds of the movable portions 321 and 331 are equal in the first movable mode and the second movable mode, respectively, and the movable period of the first movable mode is , It is longer than the movable period of the second movable mode.

Next, the configuration of the audio side RAM 154 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 88.
FIG. 88 is a diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93. As shown in FIG. 88, the voice side ROM 153 is provided with a table storage area 153g for a specified number of operations lottery in addition to the various areas 153a to 153e. The specified number of operations lottery table storage area 153 g is an area in which a table referred to when determining the specified number of operations (predetermined number of times) is stored in the timer interrupt process described later (FIG. 89).

In addition to the various areas 154a to 154g, the voice side RAM 154 is provided with a specified number of operations storage area 154q, an operation number counter area area (operation number storage means) 154r, and a specified number of operation number exceeding flag storage area 154s. The specified number of operations storage area 154q is an area in which the specified number of operations of the first frame button 26 is set in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 89) described later. The operation number counter area 154r is an area in which a counter for counting the number of times the player operates the first frame button 26 in the specified operation number correspondence process (FIG. 91) described later is stored. The specified number of operations exceeding flag storage area 154s is an area in which the specified number of operations exceeding flag is stored when the value of the specified number of operations counter is equal to or greater than the value of the specified number of operations counter in the specified number of operations corresponding process (FIG. 91) described later. Is.

Next, the timer interrupt processing executed by the voice-side MPU 152 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. This process is basically the same as the timer interrupt process described in FIG. 36, and is a process for setting the specified number of operations of the first frame button 26 with respect to the timer interrupt process described in FIG. 36. This is a process in which (S1631, S1632) is added.

Specifically, after clearing the effect unit operation valid period waiting flag in step 1613, the specified number of operations lottery process is executed (S1631). That is, this specified number of operations lottery process is executed when the button operation instruction is displayed on the display screen 80a. In the specified number of operations lottery process, the value of the specified number of operations lottery counter is read from various counter areas 154 g provided in the voice side RAM 154. Here, the specified number of operations lottery counter is configured to be able to store a counter value of "0 to 99", and is configured to add 1 in a predetermined cycle such as a 2 msec cycle and reach the maximum value. After that, it is initialized to 0. Then, the specified number of operations lottery table stored in the specified number of operations lottery table storage area 153g of the voice side ROM 153 is referred to, and the specified number of operations is determined based on the read-out value of the specified number of operations lottery counter.

In the present embodiment, the specified number of operations lottery table storage area is such that the specified number of operations is 1/4 in 10 times, 1/4 in 15 times, and 1/2 in 20 times. 153 g is set.

Next, the specified number of operations drawn in step 1631 is set in the specified number of operations storage area 154q provided in the voice-side RAM 154 (S1632), and the processes after step 1614 are executed. Then, when the process corresponding to the first frame button in step 1618 is executed, or when it is determined in step 1617 that the first frame button 26 is not operated (S1617: NO), the effect unit operation valid period timer counter is set. It is determined whether or not it is 0 (S1633). When it is determined that the effect period unit operation valid period timer counter is 0 (S1633: YES), the operation count counter is cleared to 0 (S1634), and the specified number of operations exceeds the specified number of operations of the audio side RAM 154. The specified number of operations is stored in the flag storage area 154s. When the super flag is stored, the super flag for the specified number of operations is deleted (S1635). The specified number of operations exceeding flag is a flag that may be stored by the specified number of operations corresponding process (FIG. 91) described later. If it is determined in step 1635 that the flag clearing process for exceeding the specified number of operations or in step 1633 the effect period timer counter is not 0 (S1633: NO), the timer interrupt process is terminated as it is.

Subsequently, the effect unit movable processing executed by the audio side MPU 152 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the effect unit movable processing. This process is basically the same as the effect unit movable process described in FIG. 48, and is a process in which a specified number of operations corresponding process (S2724) is added to the effect unit movable process described in FIG. 48. Is. The effect unit movable process is a process executed in step 2519 of the first frame button corresponding process described with reference to FIG. 48.

In the effect unit movable process, first, the process corresponding to the specified number of operations is executed (S2724).
Here, the process corresponding to the specified number of operations will be described with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing a process corresponding to a specified number of operations.

In the process corresponding to the specified number of operations, first, it is determined whether or not the over-specified number of operations flag is stored in the specified number of times over-numbered flag storage area 154s of the voice RAM 154 (S3201), and the over-specified number of operations flag is stored. If it is determined that there is (S3201: YES), the process corresponding to the specified number of operations is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the specified operation count exceeding flag is not stored (S3201: NO), the value of the operation count counter stored in the operation count counter area 154r of the voice side RAM 154 is acquired, and the acquired value is acquired. The process of adding 1 to is executed (S3202).

Subsequently, the specified number of operations set in step 1632 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 89) is acquired from the specified number of operations storage area 154q of the voice side RAM 154, and the value of the operation number counter added by 1 in step 3202 is acquired. It is determined whether or not the number of operations is equal to or greater than the number of operations (S3203). Then, when it is determined that the value of the operation count counter is equal to or greater than the specified number of operations (S3203: YES), the specified number of operations exceeding flag storage area 154s stores the specified number of operations exceeding flag (S3204), and this specification is used as it is. Ends the operation count processing. As a result, once the flag exceeding the specified number of operations is stored, a negative determination is made in step 3201. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the operation count counter is smaller than the specified number of operations (S3203: NO), the process corresponding to the specified number of operations is terminated as it is.

Returning to the description of the effect unit movable process (FIG. 90), after executing the process corresponding to the specified number of operations in step 2724, the values of the first to third effect unit movable period timer counters are acquired in step 2701. Then, when it is determined in step 2702 that the timer counter for the movable period of the first effect unit is 0 (S2702: YES), it is determined whether or not the flag for exceeding the specified number of operations is stored (S2725). That is, it is determined whether or not the effect unit movable process this time is after the specified number of operations has been exceeded.

When it is determined that the specified number of operations exceeding flag is not stored (S2725: NO), the first movable process of the first effect unit is executed (S2703a), and it is determined that the specified number of operations exceeding flag is stored. In the case (S2725: YES), the second movable process of the first effect unit is executed (S2703b).

Here, the first effect unit first movable process is a process of moving the first effect unit 310 in the first movable mode, and the first effect unit second movable process is a process of moving the first effect unit 310. This is a process of moving in the second movable mode. That is, before the number of operations of the player's first frame button 26 exceeds the specified number of operations, the first effect unit 310 is moved in the first movable mode in which the movable period is long, and the player's first frame button 26 After the number of operations exceeds the specified number of operations, the first effect unit 310 is moved in the second movable mode in which the movable period is short.

When the first effect unit first movable process of step 2703a is executed, or when the first effect unit second movable process of step 2703b is executed, the set process of the movable period of step 2704 is executed. Then, when it is determined in step 2705 that the second effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2705: YES), it is determined whether or not the specified number of operations exceeding flag is stored as in step 2725 (S2726). ).

When it is determined that the specified number of operations exceeding flag is not stored (S2726: NO), the first movable process of the second effect unit is executed (S2706a), and it is determined that the specified number of operations exceeding flag is stored. In the case (S2726: YES), the second movable processing of the second effect unit is executed (S2706b). The second effect unit first movable process is a process for moving the second effect unit 320 in the first movable mode, and the second effect unit second movable process is a process for moving the second effect unit 320 to the second movable mode. It is a process of moving in a mode. That is, before the number of operations of the player's first frame button 26 exceeds the specified number of operations, the second effect unit 320 is moved in the first movable mode in which the movable period is long, and the player's first frame button 26 is operated. After the number of operations exceeds the specified number of operations, the second effect unit 320 is moved in the second movable mode in which the movable period is short.

When the second effect unit first movable process of step 2706a is executed, or when the second effect unit second movable process of step 2706b is executed, the set process of the movable period of step 2707 is executed. Then, when it is determined in step 2708 that the third effect unit movable period timer counter is 0 (S2708: YES), it is determined whether or not the specified number of operations exceeding flag is stored as in step 2725 (S2727). ).

When it is determined that the specified number of operations exceeding flag is not stored (S2727: NO), the first movable process of the third effect unit is executed (S2709a), and it is determined that the specified number of operations exceeding flag is stored. In the case (S2727: YES), the second movable process of the third effect unit is executed (S2709b). The first movable process of the third effect unit is a process of moving the third effect unit 330 in the first movable mode, and the second movable process of the third effect unit is the second movable process of the third effect unit 330. It is a process of moving in a mode. That is, before the number of operations of the player's first frame button 26 exceeds the specified number of operations, the third effect unit 330 is moved in the first movable mode in which the movable period is long, and the player's first frame button 26 is operated. After the number of operations exceeds the specified number of operations, the third effect unit 330 is moved in the second movable mode in which the movable period is short.

Next, when the player operates the first frame button 26 during the effect period during which the effect unit is operated, the first effect unit 310 (first movable unit 311) and the second effect unit 320 (second movable unit 321) , The movable mode of the third effect unit 330 (third movable portion 331) will be described with reference to FIG. 92. FIG. 92 shows the effect period, the state of the first frame button 26, the first effect unit 310 (first movable unit 311), the second effect unit 320 (second movable unit 321), and the third effect unit 330 ( It is a timing chart which shows the state of the 3rd movable part 331).

When the operation valid period is started, the button operation instruction is displayed on the display screen 80a as described above (see FIG. 51). Since the value of the operation count counter is smaller than the value of the specified operation count counter at the time point before the time point T48a (FIGS. 90, 2725: NO, S2726: NO, S2727: NO), the voice side MPU 152 is the first effect. The unit first movable process (FIG. 90, S2703a), the second effect unit first movable process (FIG. 90, S2706a), and the third effect unit first movable process (FIG. 90, S2709a) are appropriately executed.

On the other hand, after the time point T48a, since the value of the operation number counter is equal to or more than the value of the specified operation number counter (FIG. 90, S2725: YES, S2726: YES, S2727: YES), the first effect unit second movable process (S2703b). ), The second movable processing of the second effect unit (S2706b), and the second movable process of the third effect unit (S2709b) are appropriately executed. That is, after the time point T48a, one movable period of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 is shortened.

According to the present embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the present embodiment, the number of times the player operates the first frame button 26 is counted, and when the number of operations exceeds the specified number of operations, the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit The 330 is movably processed in the second movable mode. That is, when the player positively operates the first frame button 26, the movable period of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 is shortened. Therefore, the responsiveness to the operation of the first frame button 26 can be further improved for the player who actively operates the first frame button 26, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the process in which the player operates (continuously hits) the first frame button 26, the player can change the movable modes of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330. It is possible to prevent early getting bored with operating the 1-frame button 26.

(Modified example of the eleventh embodiment)
A modified example of the eleventh embodiment will be described. In the eleventh embodiment, the specified number of operations may not be determined by lottery, but may be a predetermined number.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the number of times the various effect units are moved is counted instead of determining whether or not to execute the second movable process of the various effect units using the number of times the first frame button 26 is operated. However, when the number of movements of the various production units is equal to or greater than the specified number of movements, the second movement processing of the various production units may be executed. With such a configuration, the time points at which the specified number of movements is reached differs between the various production units. For example, the first effect unit 310 and the second effect unit 320 may move in the second movable mode, and the third effect unit 330 may move in the first movable mode. Therefore, it is possible to increase the combinations of the movable modes of the various effect units 310 to 330, and to allow the player to experience the movable modes of the various combinations of the various effect units 310 to 330.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, instead of determining whether or not to execute the second movable processing of various effect units using the predetermined number of operations, the movable mode is determined by the interval at which the player's first frame button 26 is operated. May be changed. For example, when the interval for operating the first frame button 26 of the player is less than or equal to a predetermined period, the second movable processing of various effect units is executed, and the interval for operating the first frame button 26 of the player is longer than the predetermined period. In some cases, the first movable processing of various effect units may be executed. In such a configuration, for example, a measuring means (calculation) for measuring (calculating) the period (operation interval) from the operation of the first frame button 26 to the next operation of the first frame button 26. Means) and an operation interval storage means for storing the period, and the period stored in the operation interval storage means is compared with a predetermined period, and the period stored in the operation interval storage means is equal to or longer than the predetermined period. In this case, the first movable process of various effect units may be executed, and when the period stored in the operation interval storage means is less than a predetermined period, the second movable process of various effect units may be executed.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, as in the eighth embodiment, the movable distance is made equal between the first movable mode and the second movable mode of the various production units, and the movable speed of the second movable mode is set to the first movable mode. By making it faster than the movable speed of the mode, the movable period of the second movable mode may be shorter than the movable period of the first movable mode. By making the movable distance and the movable speed different between the first movable mode and the second movable mode, the movable period of the second movable mode may be shorter than the movable period of the first movable mode.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game result of the game times is a hit result, and if the game result is a hit result, the game result is a missed result. The probability that the specified number of operations is reduced may be higher than in some cases. That is, when the game result is a hit result, the various effect units 310 to 330 may be more easily moved in the second movable mode than when the game result is a miss result.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the effect unit movable process may be further subdivided to include a third movable mode having a shorter movable period than the second movable mode.

(Other embodiments)
The content is not limited to the description of each of the above-described embodiments, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Then, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually to the configuration of each of the above embodiments, or may be applied in combination with each other. In addition, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied to an embodiment different from the embodiment exemplified as an application target.

(A) Other application examples (1) In each of the above embodiments, an example in which "100" is set in the time reduction counter in step 1305 of the special electric power termination process (FIG. 32) has been described, but the present invention is limited to this. For example, it may be "50" or "120".

(2) In each of the above embodiments, the content of each game result is not limited to the above configuration. For example, the large winning opening 56a is opened once or a plurality of times in a long time mode, and then the large winning opening 56a is opened for a short time. The configuration may include a so-called rank-up (RU) hit that is opened once or a plurality of times depending on the embodiment. Further, although the winning / failing lottery mode shifts from the low-probability mode to the high-probability mode, the support mode may be configured to have a winning result in which the low-probability support mode remains. For example, in the case of 4R probability variation, the support mode may remain in the low frequency support mode.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the hit numerical information in the low probability mode is included in the hit numerical information in the high probability mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the hit numerical information in the low probability mode is high. The configuration may not be included in the hit numerical information in the probability mode.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the type of the winning result by the distribution lottery regarding the first starting port 54 and the type of the winning result by the distribution lottery regarding the second starting port 55 may be completely the same. With such a configuration, the lottery games may be executed in the order in which they are held. In each of the above embodiments, the lottery games may be executed in the order in which they are held.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration of granting the game ball to the variable winning device 56 or the like for winning the game ball is not limited to the configuration of directly paying out the game ball, and the function of storing the virtual game medium. In the configuration having the above, the virtual game medium may be provided.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the reserved symbols (holding notice) related to the first and second lottery games are not displayed in the lower display area Dn of the symbol display device 80, but are provided separately from the symbol display device 80. The hold symbol may be displayed on the display screen of the display device, or the hold notice may be given by setting the movable decorative member in a predetermined notice mode, or the lamp ( The hold notice may be given by turning on the predetermined light emitting unit), or the hold notice may be given by the output of the sound from the speaker unit 34, and all or a part of each of the above embodiments may be combined. It may be configured in which a hold notice is given by.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, instead of the configuration in which the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 are separately provided, both control devices 92 and 93 may be provided as one control device. Further, the functions of the voice lamp control device 92 or the display control device 93 may be integrated in the main control device 91, and the functions of both the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 may be integrated in the main control device 91. It may be configured as a new type. Further, the voice lamp control device 92 does not control the display control device 93 based on the command output from the main control device 91, but the display control device 93 controls the display control device 93 based on the command output from the main control device 91. It may be configured to control the control device 92.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the audio lamp control device 92 does not control the driving of the various effect units 310 to 330 and the specific unit 340, but the display control device 93 is the various effect units as shown in FIG. 93. It may be configured to control the drive of the 310-330 and the specific unit 340. In this way, by configuring the display control device 93 to control the drive of the various effect units 310 to 330 and the specific unit 340, the display effect displayed on the symbol display device 80 and the first to third effects are further formed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a gap between the unit movable effect and the specific unit movable effect. Further, by configuring the display control device 93 to control the drive of the various effect units 310 to 330 and the specific unit 340, the first signal line group 170 and the first signal line group 170 connecting the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 are connected. When an abnormality occurs or noise is applied to the two signal line group 180, it is possible to prevent the various effect units 310 to 330 and the specific unit 340 from malfunctioning. Further, in FIG. 93, the first frame button detection sensor 26a and the second frame button detection sensor 27a may be connected to the display control device 93. Further, the main control device 91 may be configured to control the drive of various effect units 310 to 330 and the specific unit 340.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the first movable portion 311, the second movable portion 321 and the third movable portion 331 and the specific movable portion 341 may have a rectangular shape, for example, instead of a circular shape. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, when the first movable portion 311 and the second movable portion 321 and the third movable portion 331 are arranged at the first positions, they are not arranged so as to cover a part of the display screen 80a from the front. Also, for example, when it is arranged in the first position, it may not be visible to the player, and when it is moved, it may be visible to the player for the first time. Similarly, when the specific movable portion 341 is arranged at the third position, it does not have to be arranged so as to cover a part of the display screen 80a from the front, and when it is arranged at the third position, it does not have to be arranged. It may be made invisible to the player so that the player can see it only when it moves. On the contrary, even when the first movable portion 311 and the second movable portion 321 and the third movable portion 331 are arranged at the first positions, the whole may be arranged on the display screen 80a. Even when the specific movable portion 341 is arranged at the third position, the entire portion may be arranged on the display screen 80a.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, the third effect unit 330, and the specific unit 340 are movable portions 311 and 321 along the rails 311a, 321a, 331a, and 341a. In addition to the movement of 3,331 and 341, the movable portions 311, 321, 331 and 341 may be configured to move while rotating. Further, in addition to the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330, in response to the operation of the first frame button 26, the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 can be rotated while being arranged at the initial position (without moving). , An auxiliary effect unit that emits a predetermined light may be provided.

Further, each of the rails 311a, 321a, 331a, and 341a may have a curved shape instead of a straight line, or may have a shape in which a straight line portion and a curved portion are combined. That is, each movable portion 311, 321, 331, 341 may have a portion that moves in a curved line instead of moving only in a straight line. For example, when the first rail 311a has a shape in which a straight portion and a curved portion are combined, as shown in FIG. 94, a portion on one end side (back side of the center frame 81) is a straight portion, and the other The portion on the end side (the end side located in the opening 82) can be formed into a curved portion. In this case, the movable mode of the first effect unit 310 provided in the lower left corner of the opening 82 in the front view will be described. As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95 (a), the first movable portion 311 is in the initial position. Is placed in the first position as. Then, when the first driving unit 311c is in the driving state, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), the first movable unit 311 moves along the linear portion of the first rail 312a to form a linear portion and a curved portion. After reaching the boundary of, it moves along the curved portion as it is, and reaches the second position as the limit movable position as shown in FIG. 95 (c). Then, the first movable portion 311 that has reached the second position returns to the first position in FIG. 95 (a) after being in the state shown in FIG. 95 (b). That is, the first driving unit 311c may be configured to drive the first movable unit 341 in two stages (driving a straight line portion and driving a curved portion).

Here, an example in which the first rail 311a has a shape in which a straight portion and a curved portion are combined has been described, but the second rail 321a, the third rail 331a, and the specific rail 341a are defined as the straight portion and the curved portion. The shape may be a combination of. Further, a part of the first rail 311a, the second rail 321a, the third rail 331a and the specific rail 341a may be formed by combining a straight portion and a curved portion, or all of them may be combined by the straight portion and the curved portion. It may be in the shape of a rail.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, the first movable portion 311, the second movable portion 321 and the third movable portion 331 and the specific movable portion 341 are not movable along the respective rails 312a, 322a, 332a, and 342a. For example, it may be supported by an arm and may be movable by moving (expanding / contracting) the arm.

(12) Further, in each of the above embodiments, any one of the second positions in the first movable portion 311, the second movable portion 321 and the third movable portion 331 is the same position as the fourth position in the specific movable portion 341. You may. In particular, in the fifth embodiment and the tenth embodiment, the specific unit 340 is movable when the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are not movable. With the configuration, the movable range of the specific movable portion 341 can be further increased, and the movable mode can give the player a feeling of exhilaration. Further, by appropriately controlling the movable modes of the first movable portion 311 and the second movable portion 321 and the third movable portion 331, the first movable portion 311, the second movable portion, and the third movable portion 331 are the first. At least a part of the two positions may be in the same position.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, the first movable portion 311 and the second movable portion 321 and the third movable portion 331 are configured to have a light emitting portion, and while emitting light, along the rails 311a, 321a, 331a, and 341a. It may be movable. In this case, the emission color is changed in the order of white → blue → green → red, and based on the game result, the number of operations, etc. The color may change to red when the number of times is small.

(14) In each of the above embodiments, the number of effect units may be two or four or more instead of three. Further, in the sixth to ninth and eleventh embodiments, only one effect unit may be used.

(15) In the first to ninth embodiments and the eleventh embodiment, the specific unit 340 may not be provided. In this case, in these embodiments, for example, instead of moving the specific unit 340, a predetermined moving image effect or the like may be displayed on the display screen 80a.

(16) In each of the above embodiments, a plurality of specific units 340 may be provided.
In this case, the specific unit 340 may be divided into a plurality of units and may form one shape by being movable. For example, in FIG. 8, the third movable portion 331 and the specific movable portion 341 are each formed of a semicircle and have the same diameter, and by moving while rotating at the same time, one in the center of the screen. You may try to form a circle. In such a configuration, the third effect unit 330 becomes a specific unit and is moved by the specific unit movement process.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, when the player continuously presses (operates) the first frame button 26 (so-called long press), the player continuously presses the first frame button 26 on the voice side MPU 152. It may be determined that the user is operating (striking repeatedly) and various processes may be executed. In this case, it is preferable that the button operation instruction also displays "long press for automatic continuous striking" or the like to indicate to the player that the long press operation of the first frame button 26 is effective. The pressing period of the first frame button 26, which is determined to be long-pressed, may change depending on the remaining period of the effect unit operation valid period. For example, if the remaining period of the effect unit operation valid period is 5 seconds or more, it is determined that the first frame button 26 is pressed for 3 seconds, and the remaining period of the effect unit operation valid period is 5 seconds. If it is shorter, it may be determined that the first frame button 26 is pressed for 1 second. However, regardless of the remaining period of the effect unit operation valid period, if the first frame button 26 is pressed for a certain period (for example, 2 seconds), it may be determined to be a long press.

Further, in the case of the configuration in which the long press operation is enabled in this way, the various effect units 310 to 330 and the specific unit 340 may be controlled in consideration of the gaming state. For example, in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined that the specific unit 340 is to be moved, the portion of the set effect unit valid period in which the effect displayed by the symbol display device 80 is most exciting (the player expects the most). The movement of the various effect units 310 to 330 may be controlled so that the timing of moving the specific unit 340 coincides with the portion). Further, in other embodiments other than the fifth embodiment, the various effect units 310 to 330 and the specific unit 340 may be moved in consideration of the effect displayed by the symbol display device 80.

(18) In each of the above embodiments, when it is determined that the second frame button 27 has been operated by the player when the effect unit operation is valid, the button operation is processed in the same manner as the first frame button operation. You may try to do it. That is, depending on the player, when the first frame button 26 is operated (continuously hit), the second frame button 27 may also be operated with excessive momentum.
Therefore, during the effective period of the effect unit operation, the second frame button operation is performed in the same manner as the first frame button operation, so that the probability that one of the effect units will be in the movable state is further increased, and the player You can fully enjoy the movement of various production units 310 to 340.

(19) In each of the above embodiments, the length of the indicator M (effect period of operation of the effect unit) may be changed according to the effect displayed on the symbol display device 80. For example, when the symbol display device 80 displays an effect suggesting that a hit result is likely to occur (so-called high reliability effect), the indicator M is displayed for a long time so that the hit result is unlikely to occur. When the suggestive effect (so-called low reliability effect) is displayed, the indicator M may be displayed short.

Further, although the indicator M is configured to change the display color based on the decrease in the operation validity period (see FIG. 51), the speed at which the display color changes may be different for each part. For example, in the indicator M, when the remaining period of the operation valid period is displayed in white and the portion changes to black when the remaining period decreases, the period until half of the portion displayed in white changes to black is set. It may be shorter than the period until the remaining white color turns black. That is, the indicator M may have a high rate of increase in the portion that becomes black at first, and a slow rate of increase in the portion that becomes black in the middle. In this case, in step 2602 and step 2603 in the specific unit movable lottery process (FIG. 47), the determination may be made based on the remaining length of the indicator M (the length of the white portion). Further, even in such a configuration, the length of the indicator M may be changed by the effect.

By configuring the indicator M as described above, it is possible to diversify the game and prevent the player from getting bored at an early stage. Further, in step 2602 and step 2603 in the specific unit movable lottery process (FIG. 47), even if the length of the indicator M is changed based on the effect by making a determination based on the remaining length of the indicator M. It is possible to deal with common processing without increasing special processing.

(20) Each of the above embodiments may be combined as appropriate. For example, the sixth embodiment is combined with the second to fifth embodiments to determine the timing (time point) for moving the specific unit 340, and at that timing, the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the second effect unit 320. The first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 may be controlled so that the three effect units 330 are not in motion. Further, the seventh embodiment may be combined with the second to fifth embodiments to draw a lottery as to whether or not the specific unit 340 can be moved. Further, the eighth embodiment may be combined with the second to fifth embodiments, and the movable mode of the effect unit may be changed so that the movable state is completed within the special processing period, or the ninth embodiment may be changed. May be combined with the above-mentioned second to fifth embodiments, and the movable start time of the effect unit may be delayed so that the movable end time of the various effect units and the movable timing of the specific unit 340 coincide with each other.

Further, the tenth embodiment may be combined with the second to fifth embodiments so that the specific unit 340 may be moved when the movable end points of the effect units 310 to 330 coincide with each other.

Further, the eleventh embodiment is combined with the second to tenth embodiments so that the movable modes of the first effect unit 310, the second effect unit 320, and the third effect unit 330 are different depending on the operation of the player. It may be. In particular, when the eleventh embodiment is combined with the eighth embodiment, the movable period is longer than the movable period of the first movable mode when the movable is to be completed at a specific timing in the first movable mode. When the various production units 310 to 330 are appropriately moved in the short first special movable period and the movement is completed at a specific timing in the second movable mode, the movable period is longer than the movable period of the second movable mode. The various effect units 310 to 330 may be appropriately moved in the short second special movable period. In this case, when the first special movable period or the second special movable period is set, the movable distance of the various effect units 310 to 330 is shortened or the movable speed is increased as in the eighth embodiment. The configuration is adopted.

In addition, the player's interest in the game may be improved by appropriately combining the respective embodiments or further combining the combinations.

(21) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines in which the electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when the game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game ball in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, etc.

In addition, a non-ballistic gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined time has passed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.
In addition, the game machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts the rotation of the reel.

For example, when the present invention is applied to a slot machine, an effect unit, a specific unit, an effect button, and the like are provided, and when the rotation of the reel is started, the reel is in the middle of rotation or the reel is stopped. By operating (continuously hitting) the effect button later, the effect unit may be moved, and the specific unit may be moved when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when it is a hit). .. As described above, when the present invention is applied to a slot machine, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiments can be obtained by appropriately combining the above-mentioned embodiments.

(B) Invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments The characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

(1) Feature A Group Conventionally, a gaming machine including a button (operating means) that can be operated by a player and a plurality of movable parts that can be moved based on the button operation of the player has been proposed (for example, a special feature). Open 2014-128522 (see). In such a gaming machine, the player can be made to participate in the game by having the player operate a button, so that the player's attention to the game can be increased.

By the way, in a gaming machine having the above-mentioned buttons and movable parts, when the player operates the buttons, a plurality of movable parts are simultaneously moved, and the player continuously operates the buttons within a predetermined period (). It is known that the movable part is continuously moved in the case of repeated hits).

However, in a gaming machine that simultaneously moves a plurality of movable parts in response to a button operation, if one movable part is moving, the button operation is invalid for the entire movable part, and the responsiveness of the movable part to the button operation. Will decrease. Therefore, in such a gaming machine, the player's motivation for button operation tends to decrease, and the player's attention to the game may decrease.

In such a gaming machine, it is necessary to satisfactorily raise the degree of attention to the game, and the feature A group solves the problem.

Features A1. Operation means that can be operated by the player (first frame button 26),
An operation detection means (first frame button detection sensor 26a) for detecting the presence or absence of operation of the operation means, and
Normal effect means (first to third effect units) having normal movable portions (first to third movable portions 31 to 341) that are movable between the first position and a second position different from the first position. 310-330) and
Based on the detection result of the operation detection means, the normal effect means control means (a function of executing the first frame button corresponding process in the MPU 152 of the voice lamp control device 92) that controls the normal effect means, and
A valid period determining means (a function of determining the valid period of the voice lamp control device 92) for determining the valid period of the operating means is provided.
A plurality of the normal effect means are provided, and in a gaming machine in which the normal movable portions of the plurality of normal effect means are movable between the first position and the second position, which are different from each other.
When the normal effect means control means determines that the operation means has been operated within the valid period, and determines that at least one of the normal effect means that is immovable exists, the effect means that is immovable. A gaming machine characterized by being able to move.

According to the feature A1, when the operating means is operated within the valid period, if it is determined that there is at least one non-movable normal effect means, the non-movable normal effect means is moved. Therefore, as compared with the case where all the normal effect means are moved at the same time, the probability that the normal effect means is moved when the player operates the operation means is high. That is, it is possible to increase the responsiveness (reactivity) of the normal effect means when the player operates the operation means. Therefore, the player can easily experience that the normal effect means is moved in response to the operation of the operation means. As a result, the player can be made to actively operate the operation means, and the degree of attention of the player to the game can be improved.

Feature A2. The above-described feature A1 wherein the normal effect means controlling means moves only one non-movable normal effect means when it is determined that a plurality of non-movable normal effect means exist. Gaming machine.

According to the feature A2, since the normal effect means are moved one by one, there is a high probability that the normal effect means will move when the player operates the operation means. That is, the responsiveness of the normal effect means when the player operates the operation means can be further enhanced. Therefore, the degree of attention of the player to the game can be further improved, and the player can fully enjoy the effect (movable) of the normal effect means (normally movable portion) when the operation means is operated.

Feature A3. When the plurality of normal effect means are non-movable, the normal movable portion is arranged at the first position, and when the normal movable portion is moving, the normally movable portion reaches the second position from the first position. Assuming that the movable period until returning to the first position is the basic movable period, the basic movable period of at least one of the normal effect means is longer than the basic movable period of the other normal effect means.
When the normal effect means controlling means determines that there are a plurality of the normal effect means that are non-movable, the normal effect means having the longest basic movable period among the non-movable normal effect means is used as another normal effect means. The gaming machine according to feature A2, which is characterized in that it is moved with priority over normal production means.

According to the feature A3, in order to preferentially move the normal effect means having the longest basic movable period over the other normal effect means, the player continuously operates (continuously hits) the operation means to perform a plurality of normal effect means. Is more likely to move at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to fully enjoy the effect (movement, combination) of the normal movable portion when the player operates the operating means, and it is possible to improve the player's willingness to operate the operating means.

Feature A4. It has a movable history storage means (various effect unit movable flag storage area 154h of the voice lamp control device 92) for storing the movable history of the normal effect means.
When the normal effect means control means determines that there are a plurality of the normal effect means that are not movable, the normal effect means is different from the previously moved normal effect means based on the movement history stored in the movable history storage means. The gaming machine according to feature A2, which is characterized in that a normal production means is movable.

According to the feature A4, it is difficult for the same normal effect means to move continuously. Therefore, the player can fully enjoy the movement of the normal effect means, which differs depending on the operation means. Therefore, the player's willingness to operate the operating means can be further improved.

Feature A5. An information acquisition means (a function of executing the processing of S404 and S409 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
Grant determination means for executing grant determination as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the validity information group in the grant information (executes the special information determination process in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91). Function) and
A privilege game (for example, a variable winning device) is given to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the hit / fail information group. It has a privilege giving means (a function of executing the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for giving the opening / closing execution mode for controlling the opening / closing of the 56.
When the grant determination means determines that the special information corresponds to the hit / miss information group, the normal effect means control means has a probability of moving the specific normal effect means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A4, which is characterized in that the probability of moving the production means is higher than that of the moving means.

According to the feature A5, when the special information corresponds to the hit / miss information group (when it is a hit result), the specific normal effect means is easily movable. Therefore, the player can infer the result of the game times by confirming whether or not the specific normal effect means is moving more than the other normal effect means in the process of operating (continuously hitting) the operation means. .. That is, it is possible to give the player a new game property of guessing the result of the game times by operating the operating means. Therefore, by diversifying the games, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the games.

In addition, a launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and a starting ball entry unit provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area. In the configuration provided with, the "information acquisition means" replaces the configuration of "acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions", and "a game ball enters the starting ball entry portion". It may be configured to "acquire special information based on what has been done".

Feature A6. It has a specific movable part (specific movable part 341) that is movable between the third position and a fourth position different from the third position, and the specific movable part is movable by moving the specific movable part. Specific production means (specific unit 340) that are more likely to give a result that is more advantageous to the player than if not.
When it is determined that the predetermined first condition is satisfied within the valid period, the specific effect means control means (the specific movable process in the MPU 152 of the voice lamp control device 92) for controlling the specific effect means is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A5, which is characterized by having (function) and.

The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine provided with a specific effect means different from the normal effect means, such as the feature A6. Note that controlling the specific effect means within the valid period here includes starting the movement of the specific effect means within the valid period and ending the movement of the specific effect means after the valid period has elapsed.

Feature A7. The gaming machine according to feature A6, wherein the specific effect means control means moves the specific effect means when it is determined that the normal effect means is not movable as one of the first conditions. ..

Feature A8. When the specific effect means control means determines that the specific effect means is movable, the normal effect means control means determines that the specific effect means control means moves the specific effect means, and then the operation means determines that the specific effect means is movable. The gaming machine according to feature A6 or A7, wherein the normal effect means is not moved even if it is operated.

According to the features A7 and A8, it becomes difficult for the normal effect means and the specific effect means to move at the same time within the valid period, and the effect means that the player should pay attention to can be clearly distinguished. Further, in the configuration including the feature A8, when it is determined that the specific effect means control means moves the specific effect means, even if there is a normal effect means that is not movable when the player operates the operation means, the normal effect means is normal. It is possible to create a difference in production (so-called breaking of the law) that the production means is not movable. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a new playability of searching for an effect (state) in which the normal effect means that should be movable does not move in the process of operating the operation means, and the player's attention to the game can be given. Can be improved.

Feature A9. In the normal movable portion in the plurality of normal effect means and the specific movable portion in the specific effect means, at least one normal movable portion in the normal effect means is movable to the second position, and the specific movable portion in the specific effect means is movable. The gaming machine according to feature A7 or A8, characterized in that the pachinko and pachislot machine is in contact with the pachinko and pachislot machine when the pachinko and pachislot machine is moved to the fourth position.

When the configuration of the feature A7 or A8 is provided as in the feature A9, since the normal effect means and the specific effect means do not move at the same time, the normal movable portion of the normal effect means can move to the second position and the specific effect. The shape may be such that when the specific movable portion of the means moves to the fourth position, it comes into contact with each other. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the normal movable part of the normal effect means and the specific movable part of the specific effect means can be improved, and the normal movable part of the normal effect means and the specific movable part of the specific effect means have a novel shape for the player. , It can be a powerful shape.

(2) Feature B Group Conventionally, a gaming machine including a button (operating means) that can be operated by a player and a movable portion that can be moved based on the button operation of the player has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014). -128522A). In such a gaming machine, the player can be made to participate in the game by having the player operate a button, so that the player's attention to the game can be increased.

In such a gaming machine, it is necessary to satisfactorily raise the degree of attention of the player to the game by devising a method of controlling the movable portion, and the feature B group solves the problem.

Feature B1. Operation means that can be operated by the player (first frame button 26),
An operation detection means (first frame button detection sensor 26a) for detecting the presence or absence of operation of the operation means, and
Normal effect means (first to third effect units) having normal movable portions (first to third movable portions 31 to 341) that are movable between the first position and a second position different from the first position. 310-330) and
Based on the detection result of the operation detection means, the normal effect means control means (a function of executing the first frame button corresponding process in the MPU 152 of the voice lamp control device 92) that controls the normal effect means, and
In a gaming machine including a valid period determining means (a function of determining the valid period of the voice lamp control device 92) for determining the valid period of the operating means.
Specific timing determining means for determining a specific timing within the valid period when it is determined that a predetermined first condition is satisfied (a function of determining a specific timing of the voice lamp control device 92 (a function of executing the process of S2805). ))
When the normal effect means control means determines that the operating means has been operated within the valid period and determines that the specific timing has been determined, it determines that a predetermined second condition has been satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that the normal effect means is moved so that the movement of the normal effect means ends at the specific timing.

According to the feature B1, when the specific timing is determined, the normal effect means moves the normal effect means so that the movement of the normal effect means ends at the specific timing when it is determined that the second condition is satisfied. .. Therefore, in such a situation, since the normal production means does not move after the specific timing, the player can smoothly pay attention to another production started after the specific timing, and the player's attention to the game can be achieved. Can be improved.

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the normal effect means control means changes the control of the normal effect means based on the remaining period until the specific timing.

According to the feature B2, the control of the normal effect means changes based on the remaining period until the specific timing. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a new playability of confirming whether or not a specific timing has been determined by paying attention to the movement of the normal effect means in the process of operating the operation means. You can improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature B3. When the normal effect means is non-movable, the normal movable portion is arranged at the first position.
The normal effect means control means is non-movable, where the movable period from the first position to the second position after the normally movable portion reaches the first position and then returns to the first position is set as the basic movable period. The gaming machine according to feature B2, wherein the normal effect means is movable, and the basic movable period is equal to or less than the period from the time when the operating means is operated to the specific timing.

According to the feature B3, immediately before the specific timing, only the normal effect means whose basic movable period is shorter than the period until the specific timing is moved. For this reason, a new game in which the player guesses whether or not a specific timing has been determined by searching for an effect (state) in which the normal effect means that should be movable does not move in the process of operating the operation means. Gender can be given, and the degree of attention of the player to the game can be improved.

Feature B4. When the normal effect means is non-movable, the normal movable portion is arranged at the first position.
The normal effect means control means is non-movable, where the movable period from the first position to the second position after the normally movable portion reaches the first position and then returns to the first position is set as the basic movable period. When it is determined that there is a normal effect means whose basic movable period is longer than the period from the time when the operating means is operated to the specific timing, the normal effect means is moved for a longer period than the basic movable period. The gaming machine according to feature B2, which is characterized in that it can be moved in a short movable period.

According to the feature B4, immediately before the specific timing, the normal effect means whose basic movable period is longer than the period until the specific timing is moved in the shortened movable period. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a new game property of guessing whether or not a specific timing is determined from the movable period of the normal effect means in the process of operating the operation means, and the player's game can be given. You can improve the degree of attention.

Feature B5. The normal effect means control means is movable by moving the normal effect means so that the normal movable portion returns to the first position without reaching the second position from the first position. The gaming machine according to feature B4, wherein the period is the shortened movable period.

According to the feature B5, since the movable period is shortened by shortening the movable distance, the player can pay attention to the way (reaching point) of the normal movable part, and the player pays attention to the normal movable part. The degree can be improved.

Feature B6. The normal effect means control means shortens the movable period of the normal effect means by moving the normal effect means at a higher moving speed than when the normal effect means is operated in the basic movable period. The gaming machine according to the feature B4.

According to the feature B6, since the movable period is shortened by increasing the movable speed, the player can pay attention to the moving state (speed) of the normally movable part, and the player pays attention to the normally movable part. The degree can be improved.

Feature B7. When the normal effect means is non-movable, the normal movable portion is arranged at the first position.
Assuming that the period from the first position to the return to the first position after the normally movable portion reaches the first position and then returns to the first position during movement is defined as the basic movable period, it is before the basic movable period from the specific timing. It has a special processing period determining means (a function of determining the special processing period in the MPU 152 of the voice lamp control device 92) that determines a predetermined period up to a time point as a special processing period.
When the normal effect means control means determines that the operation means has been operated within the special processing period, the basic movable period is less than the period from the time when the operation means is operated to the specific timing. The gaming machine according to feature B2, wherein the movement of the normal effect means is delayed, and the delayed movement end time of the normal effect means coincides with the specific timing.

According to the feature B7, the movement of the normal effect means is delayed immediately before the specific timing. Therefore, in the process of operating the operating means, the player guesses whether or not the specific timing is determined by searching for whether or not the normal effect means can be moved after operating the operating means. It is possible to impart a high degree of playability, and it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the game. Further, in the feature B7, since the movable end time point of the normal effect means is made to coincide with the specific timing, the player can be more smoothly focused on another effect started after the specific timing.

Feature B8. It has a specific movable part (specific movable part 341) that is movable between the third position and a fourth position different from the third position, and the specific movable part is movable by moving the specific movable part. Specific production means (specific unit 340) that are more likely to give a result that is more advantageous to the player than if not.
When it is determined that the predetermined third condition is satisfied within the valid period, the specific effect means control means (the specific movable process in the MPU 152 of the voice lamp control device 92) for controlling the specific effect means is executed. Function), and has
When the specific effect means control means determines that the movement of the normal effect means is controlled to end at the specific timing as one of the third conditions, the specific effect means can be moved after the specific timing. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B7, which is characterized in that the pachinko and pachinko machines are made to play.

According to the feature B8, as another effect that is started after the specific timing, the specific effect means that is likely to give a favorable result to the player is movable. Therefore, by completing the movement of the normal effect means by the specific timing, the player can smoothly pay attention to the specific effect means. Note that controlling the specific effect means within the valid period here includes starting the movement of the specific effect means within the valid period and ending the movement of the specific effect means after the valid period has elapsed.

Feature B9. In the normal movable part in the normal effect means and the specific movable part in the specific effect means, the normal movable part in the normal effect means moves to the second position, and the specific movable part in the specific effect means moves to the fourth position. The gaming machine according to feature B8, which is characterized in that it has a shape that makes contact when it moves up to.

When the configuration of the feature B8 is provided as in the feature B9, since the normal effect means and the specific effect means do not move at the same time, the normal movable portion of the normal effect means can move to the second position and the specific effect means can be moved. It is also possible to have a shape in which the specific movable portions come into contact with each other when they move to the fourth position. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the normal movable part of the normal effect means and the specific movable part of the specific effect means can be improved, and the normal movable part of the normal effect means and the specific movable part of the specific effect means have a novel shape for the player. , It can be a powerful shape.

Feature B10. The characteristic B8 or B9, wherein the specific effect means control means moves the specific effect means when it is determined that the operation means has been operated within the valid period and after the specific timing. Pachinko machine.

According to the feature B10, when the configuration of the feature B2 or the like is provided, the player who notices that the movement of the normal effect means has changed because the specific timing is set, then the specific effect means can be moved. You can operate the operating means in a state that only you understand. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the degree of attention of the player to the normal production means.

Feature B11. The gaming machine according to feature B8 or B9, wherein the specific effect means control means is movable at the specific timing.

According to the feature B11, when the configuration of the feature B2 or the like is provided, the player who notices that the movement of the normal effect means has changed due to the setting of the specific timing causes the specific effect means to move after that. You can wait for a specific timing to be reached with only you understanding. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the degree of attention of the player to the normal production means.

Feature B12. Specific effect means movable determining means (specific unit movable of voice lamp control device 92) for determining whether or not to move the specific effect means when the operation means is operated within the valid period and before the specific timing. Has a function to execute lottery processing)
As one of the second conditions, the normal effect means control means can move the normal effect means at the specific timing when the specific effect means movable determination means determines to move the specific effect means. Move the normal production means so that it ends,
As one of the third conditions, the specific effect means control means is characterized in that the specific effect means is moved when the specific effect means movable determination means determines that the specific effect means is movable. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B8 to B11.

According to the feature B12, it is determined whether or not to operate the specific effect means when the operation means is operated by the player. That is, even if the specific timing is determined, the specific effect means does not move if the player does not operate the operation means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in operating the operating means.

Feature B13. A plurality of the normal effect means are provided, and the normal movable portions of the plurality of normal effect means are movable between the first position and the second position, which are different from each other. The gaming machine according to any one of B1 to B12.

As in the feature B13, it is also possible to have a configuration in which a plurality of normal effect means are provided. Then, when all the movable end time points of the plurality of normal effect means coincide with the specific timing, another effect is started at the same time when all the movable end points of the plurality of normal effect means are completed, and the player can use the other effect. It is possible to give a powerful (exhilarating) effect.

Feature B14. The gaming machine according to feature B13, wherein the normal effect means has a movable period of at least one of the normal effect means longer than that of the other movable period.

According to the feature B14, since the movable period of at least one of the plurality of normal effect means is longer than the other movable period, the movable state (combination) of the plurality of normal effect means can be diversified. This can be achieved, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of seeing the movement of the normal production means at an early stage.

(3) Feature C Group Conventionally, a gaming machine including a button (operating means) that can be operated by a player and a plurality of movable parts that can be moved based on the button operation of the player has been proposed (for example, special features). Open 2014-128522 (see). In such a gaming machine, the player can be made to participate in the game by having the player operate a button, so that the player's attention to the game can be increased.

In such a gaming machine, it is necessary to satisfactorily increase the degree of attention of the player to the game by devising a method of controlling the movable portion, and the feature C group solves the problem.

Feature C1. Operation means that can be operated by the player (first frame button 26),
An operation detection means (first frame button detection sensor 26a) for detecting the presence or absence of operation of the operation means, and
Normal effect means (first to third effect units) having normal movable portions (first to third movable portions 31 to 341) that are movable between the first position and a second position different from the first position. 310-330) and
Based on the detection result of the operation detection means, the normal effect means control means (a function of executing the first frame button corresponding process in the MPU 152 of the voice lamp control device 92) that controls the normal effect means, and
The valid period determining means (function for determining the valid period of the voice lamp control device 92) for determining the valid period of the operating means, and
It has a specific movable part (specific movable part 341) that is movable between the third position and a fourth position different from the third position, and the specific movable part is movable by moving the specific movable part. Specific production means (specific unit 340) that are more likely to give a result that is more advantageous to the player than if not.
When it is determined that the predetermined first condition is satisfied within the valid period, the specific effect means control means (the specific movable process in the MPU 152 of the voice lamp control device 92) for controlling the specific effect means is executed. Function), equipped with,
A plurality of the normal effect means are provided, and in a gaming machine in which the normal movable portions of the plurality of normal effect means are movable between the first position and the second position, which are different from each other.
In the normal effect means, when the normal movable portion is non-movable, the normal movable portion is arranged at the first position, and after the normal movable portion reaches the second position from the first position while being moved. Assuming that the movable period until returning to the first position is the basic movable period, the basic movable period of at least one of the normal effect means is longer than the other basic movable period.
As one of the first conditions, the specific effect means control means can move at least a part of the normal movable portions of the plurality of normal effect means having different basic movable periods within the effective period, and at the same time, each of them can move. A gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect means is moved when it is determined that a predetermined location is reached.

According to the feature C1, as one of the first conditions, when at least a part of the normal movable parts of the normal effect means having different movable periods move and reach each predetermined place at the same time, an advantageous result is given to the player. The specific production means that is easy to be hit (easy to get a hit result) is movable. Therefore, the player can positively operate the operation means, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in such a configuration, the player can accidentally operate the operating means while expecting that at least a part of the normal movable parts of the normal effect means reach a predetermined position at the same time, or intentionally. It is also possible to change the timing of operating the operating means so that at least a part of the normal moving parts of the normal effect means reach a predetermined position at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to impart different playability to the player in the process of operating the operating means, and to allow the player himself to select the method of operating the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

It should be noted that the term “simultaneous” here includes not only the case where the normal movable portion of the normal effect means reaches a predetermined position completely at the same time, but also a slight difference to the extent that the player does not feel uncomfortable. Further, controlling the specific effect means within the valid period here includes starting the movement of the specific effect means within the valid period and ending the movement of the specific effect means after the valid period has elapsed.

Feature C2. The specific effect means control means. Pachinko machine.

According to the feature C2, when the normal movable portions in the plurality of normal effect means reach their respective first positions at the same time, the specific effect means is movable. Therefore, the movement of the specific production means can be more impressed on the player, the movement of the specific production means can be made more powerful (exhilaration), and the specific production means of the player can be moved. You can improve your expectations for.

Feature C3. In the normal movable part in the normal effect means and the specific movable part in the specific effect means, the normal movable part in the normal effect means moves to the second position, and the specific movable part in the specific effect means moves to the fourth position. The gaming machine according to feature C2, which is characterized in that it has a shape that makes contact when it moves up to.

According to the feature C3, the structure of the feature C2 is provided, and since the normal effect means and the specific effect means do not move at the same time, the normal movable portion of the normal effect means can move to the second position and the specific effect means can be specified. It is also possible to have a shape in which the movable portions come into contact with each other when they move to the fourth position. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the normal movable part of the normal effect means and the specific movable part of the specific effect means can be improved, and the normal movable part of the normal effect means and the specific movable part of the specific effect means have a novel shape for the player. , It can be a powerful shape.

Feature C4. The specific effect means control means. Gaming machine.

According to the feature C4, when it is determined that the normally movable portions of the plurality of normal effect means reach their respective second positions at the same time, the specific effect means is movable. For this reason, it is possible to provide the player with a powerful effect produced by simultaneously moving the normal movable part of the normal effect means and the specific movable part of the specific effect means, and it is expected that the player's specific effect means will move. You can improve the feeling.

Feature C5. In the normal movable part in the normal effect means and the specific movable part in the specific effect means, the normal movable part in the normal effect means moves to the second position, and the specific movable part in the specific effect means moves to the fourth position. The gaming machine according to feature C4, which is characterized in that it has a shape that does not come into contact when it moves up to.

According to the feature C5, when the normal movable part of the normal effect means and the specific movable part of the specific effect means move, it is possible to suppress the movable parts from coming into contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress giving a player a sense of discomfort.

Feature C6. When the specific effect means control means determines that the specific effect means is movable, the normal effect means control means determines that the specific effect means control means moves the specific effect means, and then the operation means determines that the specific effect means is movable. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, characterized in that the normal effect means is not moved even when operated.

According to the feature C6, when the configuration of the feature C2 or the like is provided, it becomes difficult for the normal effect means and the specific effect means to move at the same time, and the effect means that the player should pay attention to can be clearly distinguished. Further, when the features C2, C4, and the like are provided, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a sense of discomfort in the production that the movement of the normal production means is started after the specific production means is moved.

Feature C7. When the normal effect means control means determines that the operation means has been operated within the valid period, and determines that at least one of the normal effect means that is immovable exists, the effect means that is immovable. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C6, which is characterized in that the machine is movable.

According to the feature C7, since the non-movable normal effect means is moved, the probability that the normal effect means will move when the player operates the operation means as compared with the case where all the normal effect means are moved at the same time. Will be higher. That is, it is possible to increase the responsiveness (reactivity) of the normal effect means when the player operates the operation means. Therefore, the player can easily experience that the normal effect means is moved in response to the operation of the operation means. As a result, the player can be made to actively operate the operation means, and the degree of attention of the player to the game can be improved.

Feature C8. The plurality of normal production means have different basic movable periods from each other.
The feature C7, wherein the normal effect means controlling means moves only one non-movable normal effect means when it is determined that a plurality of the normal effect means that are non-movable exist. Gaming machine.

According to the feature C8, since the normal effect means are moved one by one, there is a high probability that the normal effect means will move when the player operates the operation means. That is, the responsiveness of the normal effect means when the player operates the operation means can be further enhanced. Therefore, the degree of attention of the player to the game can be further improved, and the player can fully enjoy the effect (movable) of the normal effect means (normally movable portion) when the operation means is operated.

Feature C9. When the normal effect means controlling means determines that there are a plurality of the normal effect means that are non-movable, the normal effect means having the longest basic movable period among the non-movable normal effect means is used as another normal effect means. The gaming machine according to feature C8, which is characterized in that it is moved with priority over normal production means.

According to the feature C9, since the normal effect means having the longest basic movable period is moved preferentially over the other normal effect means, there is a probability that a plurality of normal effect means can be moved at the same time by the player operating the operation means. It gets higher. Therefore, it is possible to fully enjoy the effect (movement, combination) of the normal movable portion when the player operates the operating means, and it is possible to improve the player's willingness to operate the operating means.

(4) Feature D Group Conventionally, a gaming machine including a button (operating means) that can be operated by a player and a movable portion that can be moved based on the button operation of the player has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014). -128522A). In such a gaming machine, the player can be made to participate in the game by having the player operate a button, so that the player's attention to the game can be increased.

In such a gaming machine, it is necessary to satisfactorily raise the degree of attention of the player to the game by devising a method of controlling the movable portion, and the feature D group solves the problem.

Feature D1. Operation means that can be operated by the player (first frame button 26),
An operation detection means (first frame button detection sensor 26a) for detecting the presence or absence of operation of the operation means, and
Normal effect means (first to third effect units) having normal movable portions (first to third movable portions 31 to 341) that are movable between the first position and a second position different from the first position. 310-330) and
Based on the detection result of the operation detection means, the normal effect means control means (a function of executing the first frame button corresponding process in the MPU 152 of the voice lamp control device 92) that controls the normal effect means, and
In a gaming machine including a valid period determining means (a function of determining the valid period of the voice lamp control device 92) for determining the valid period of the operating means.
In the normal effect means, when the normal movable portion is non-movable, the normal movable portion is arranged at the first position, and after the normal movable portion reaches the second position from the first position during the basic movable period. It has a first movable mode for returning to the first position and a second movable mode in which the normal movable portion is movable in a shortened movable period in which the movable period is shorter than the basic movable period of the first movable mode.
When the normal effect means control means determines that the operation means has been operated within the valid period, it determines that the predetermined first condition due to the operation status of the operation means of the player is not satisfied. Then, the normal effect means is moved in the first movable mode, and when it is determined that the first condition is satisfied, the normal effect means is moved in the second movable mode.

According to the feature D1, the movable mode of the normal effect means differs depending on the operation situation of the player. Therefore, the player can experience different movable modes of the normal effect means by changing the operation state of the operation means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of operating the operating means at an early stage, and it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the second movable mode returns the normally movable portion from the first position to the first position without reaching the second position.

According to the feature D2, since the movable period is shortened by shortening the movable distance, the player can pay attention to the way (reaching point) of the normal movable part can be moved, and the player's attention to the game is improved. can.

Feature D3. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, wherein the second movable mode is characterized in that the movable speed of the normal movable portion is faster than the movable speed of the first movable mode.

According to the feature D3, since the movable period is shortened by increasing the movable speed, the player can pay attention to the moving state (speed) of the normally movable part, and the player's attention to the game is improved. can.

Feature D4. It has an operation number storage means (operation number counter area 154r of the voice lamp control device 92) that stores the number of times the operation means is operated within the valid period.
When it is determined that the number of times stored in the operation number storage means is less than a predetermined number of times as one of the first conditions, the normal effect means control means moves the normal effect means in the first movable mode. Described in any one of features D1 to D3, characterized in that the normal effect means is moved in the second movable mode when it is determined that the number of times stored in the operation number storage means is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of times. Game machine.

According to the feature D4, the movable mode of the normal effect means changes depending on the number of times the player operates the operating means. Therefore, when the player actively operates the operating means, the normal effect means can be easily moved in the second movable mode, and the responsiveness of the normal effect means to the operation of the operating means can be improved.

Feature D5. It has an operation interval storage means for storing the operation interval in which the operation means is operated within the valid period.
When it is determined that the operation interval is equal to or longer than a predetermined interval as one of the first conditions, the normal effect means control means moves the normal effect means in the first movable mode, and the operation interval is the predetermined interval. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, wherein the normal effect means is moved in the second movable mode when it is determined that the interval is less than the interval.

According to the feature D5, the movable mode of the normal effect means changes depending on the operation interval in which the player operates the operation means. Therefore, the player can select the movable mode of the normal effect means by the player himself, and can prevent the player from getting tired of operating the operation means at an early stage. Further, since the movable mode changes depending on the operation interval, the player can enjoy, for example, the movement of the first movable mode and the second movable mode of the normal effect means alternately.

Feature D6. An information acquisition means (a function of executing the processing of S404 and S409 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
Grant determination means for executing grant determination as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the validity information group in the grant information (executes the special information determination process in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91). Function) and
A privilege game (for example, a variable winning device) is given to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the hit / fail information group. It has a privilege giving means (a function of executing the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for giving the opening / closing execution mode for controlling the opening / closing of the 56.
When the normal effect means control means determines that the special information corresponds to the pass / fail information group by the grant determination means, the grant determination means transfers the special information to the pass / fail information group. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein the probability that the first condition is satisfied is higher than when it is not determined that the first condition is supported.

According to the feature D6, when the special information corresponds to the pass / fail information group (when it is a hit result), the first condition is likely to be satisfied. That is, the normal effect means is easily moved in the second movable mode. Therefore, the player can infer the result of the game times by confirming at what stage the normal effect means becomes the second movable mode in the process of operating (continuously hitting) the operating means. That is, it is possible to give the player a new game property of guessing the result of the game times by operating the operating means, and it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game by diversifying the game. ..

In addition, a launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and a starting ball entry unit provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area. In the configuration provided with, the "information acquisition means" replaces the configuration of "acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions", and "a game ball enters the starting ball entry portion". It may be configured to "acquire special information based on what has been done".

Feature D7. A plurality of the normal effect means are provided, and the normal movable portions of the plurality of normal effect means are movable between the first position and the second position, which are different from each other.
When the normal effect means control means determines that the operation means has been operated within the valid period, and determines that at least one of the normal effect means that is immovable exists, the effect means that is immovable. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D6, which is characterized in that the machine is movable.

According to the feature D7, if it is determined that there is at least one non-movable normal effect means, the non-movable normal effect means is moved. Therefore, as compared with the case where all the normal effect means are moved at the same time, the probability that the normal effect means is moved when the player operates the operation means is high. That is, it is possible to increase the responsiveness (reactivity) of the normal effect means when the player operates the operation means. Therefore, the player can easily experience that the normal effect means is moved in response to the operation of the operation means. As a result, the player can be made to actively operate the operation means, and the degree of attention of the player to the game can be improved.

Feature D8. The above-described feature D7, wherein the normal effect means controlling means moves only one non-movable normal effect means when it is determined that a plurality of the normal effect means that are non-movable exist. Gaming machine.

According to the feature D8, since the normal effect means are moved one by one, there is a high probability that the normal effect means will move when the player operates the operation means. That is, the responsiveness of the normal effect means when the player operates the operation means can be further enhanced. Therefore, the degree of attention of the player to the game can be further improved, and the player can fully enjoy the effect (movable) of the normal effect means (normally movable portion) when the operation means is operated.

Feature D9. At least one of the normal effect means in the plurality of normal effect means has a basic movable period longer than the basic movable period of the other normal effect means, and the shortened movable period is shortened of the other normal effect means. It is longer than the movable period,
When the normal effect means control means determines that there are a plurality of the normal effect means that are non-movable, the most of the normal effect means that are non-movable when they are moved in the first movable mode. When the normal effect means having a long basic movable period is moved preferentially over the other normal effect means and is moved in the second movable mode, the shortest movable period of the non-movable normal effect means is the shortest movable period. The gaming machine according to feature D8, characterized in that a long normal production means is moved preferentially over other normal production means.

According to the feature D9, since the normal effect means having a long basic movable period or shortened movable period is moved preferentially over other normal effect means, a plurality of normal effect means can be moved at the same time by the player operating the operation means. The probability of doing it increases. Therefore, it is possible to fully enjoy the effect (movement, combination) of the normal movable portion when the player operates the operating means, and it is possible to improve the player's willingness to operate the operating means.

Feature D10. It has a movable history storage means (various effect unit movable flag storage area 154h of the voice lamp control device 92) for storing the movable history of the normal effect means.
When the normal effect means control means determines that there are a plurality of the normal effect means that are not movable, the normal effect means is different from the previously moved normal effect means based on the movement history stored in the movable history storage means. The gaming machine according to feature D8, which is characterized in that a normal production means is movable.

According to the feature D10, it is difficult for the same normal effect means to move continuously. Therefore, the player can fully enjoy the movement of the normal effect means, which differs depending on the operation means. Therefore, the player's willingness to operate the operating means can be further improved.

Feature D11. An information acquisition means (a function of executing the processing of S404 and S409 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
Grant determination means for executing grant determination as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the validity information group in the grant information (executes the special information determination process in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91). Function) and
A privilege game (for example, a variable winning device) is given to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the hit / fail information group. It has a privilege giving means (a function of executing the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for giving the opening / closing execution mode for controlling the opening / closing of the 56.
When the grant determination means determines that the special information corresponds to the pass / fail information group, the normal effect means control means has a probability of moving a specific normal effect means to another normal effect means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D7 to D10, which is characterized in that the probability of moving the machine is higher than the probability of moving the machine.

According to the feature D11, when the special information corresponds to the hit / miss information group (when it is a hit result), the specific normal effect means is easily movable. Therefore, the player can infer the result of the game times by confirming whether or not the specific normal effect means is moving more than the other normal effect means in the process of operating (continuously hitting) the operation means. .. That is, it is possible to give the player a new game property of guessing the result of the game times by operating the operating means, and it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game by diversifying the game. ..

In addition, a launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and a starting ball entry unit provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area. In the configuration provided with, the "information acquisition means" replaces the configuration of "acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions", and "a game ball enters the starting ball entry portion". It may be configured to "acquire special information based on what has been done".

Feature D12. It has a specific movable part (specific movable part 341) that is movable between the third position and a fourth position different from the third position, and the specific movable part is movable by moving the specific movable part. Specific production means (specific unit 340) that are more likely to give a result that is more advantageous to the player than if not.
A function of executing a specific movable process in the MPU 152 of the specific effect means control means (voice lamp control device 92) that controls the specific effect means when it is determined that the predetermined second condition is satisfied within the valid period. ), The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D11.

The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine provided with a specific effect means different from the normal effect means, such as the feature D12. Note that controlling the specific effect means within the valid period here includes starting the movement of the specific effect means within the valid period and ending the movement of the specific effect means after the valid period has elapsed.

Feature D13. The specific effect means control means is described in feature D11, characterized in that, as one of the second conditions, the specific effect means is moved when it is determined that a plurality of the normal effect means are not movable. Pachinko machine.

Feature D14. When the specific effect means control means determines that the specific effect means is movable, the normal effect means control means determines that the specific effect means control means moves the specific effect means, and then the operation means determines that the specific effect means is movable. The gaming machine according to feature D11 or D12, wherein the normal effect means is not moved even if it is operated.

According to the features D13 and D14, the normal effect means and the specific effect means do not move at the same time, and the effect means that the player should pay attention to can be clearly distinguished. Further, in the configuration including the feature D14, when the specific effect means control means determines that the specific effect means is movable, even if there is a normal effect means that is not movable when the player operates the operation means, the normal effect means is normal. It is possible to create a difference in production (so-called breaking of the law) that the production means is not movable. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a new playability of searching for an effect (state) in which the normal effect means that should be movable does not move in the process of operating the operation means, and the player's attention to the game can be given. Can be improved.

Feature D15. In the normal movable portion in the normal effect means and the specific movable portion in the specific effect means, the normal movable portion in the normal effect means moves to the second position, and the specific movable portion in the specific effect means moves to the fourth position, respectively. The gaming machine according to feature D13 or D14, which is characterized in that it has a shape that makes contact when it moves to a position.

When the configuration of the feature D13 or D14 is provided as in the feature D15, since the normal effect means and the specific effect means do not move at the same time, the normal movable portion of the normal effect means can move to the second position and the specific effect. The shape may be such that when the specific movable portion of the means moves to the fourth position, it comes into contact with each other. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the normal movable part of the normal effect means and the specific movable part of the specific effect means can be improved, and the normal movable part of the normal effect means and the specific movable part of the specific effect means have a novel shape for the player. , It can be a powerful shape.

Feature D16. A specific timing determining means (a function of determining a specific timing of the voice lamp control device 92 (a function of executing the process of S2805)) for determining a specific timing within the valid period when a predetermined second condition is satisfied. Have and
When the normal effect means control means determines that the operating means has been operated within the valid period and determines that the specific timing has been determined, it determines that a predetermined third condition has been satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, wherein the normal effect means is moved so that the movement of the normal effect means ends at the specific timing.

According to the feature D16, when the specific timing is determined, the normal effect means moves the normal effect means so that the movement of the normal effect means ends at the specific timing when it is determined that the third condition is satisfied. .. Therefore, in such a situation, since the normal production means does not move after the specific timing, the player can smoothly pay attention to another production started after the specific timing, and the player's attention to the game can be achieved. Can be improved.

Further, when the specific timing is determined and the third condition is satisfied, the normal effect means is moved so as to end the movement at the specific timing immediately before the specific timing. Therefore, in such a situation, since the normal production means does not move after the specific timing, the player can smoothly pay attention to another production started after the specific timing, and the player's attention to the game can be achieved. Can be improved.

Feature D17. The gaming machine according to feature D16, wherein the normal effect means control means changes the control of the normal effect means based on the remaining period until the specific timing.

According to the feature D17, the control of the normal effect means changes based on the remaining period until the specific timing. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a new playability of confirming whether or not a specific timing has been determined by paying attention to the movement of the normal effect means in the process of operating the operation means. You can improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature D18. When the normal effect means control means determines that the first condition is not satisfied, the basic movable period is equal to or less than the period from the time when the operation means is operated to the specific timing. When the means is moved in the first movable mode and it is determined that the first condition is satisfied, the shortened movable period is equal to or less than the period from the time when the operating means is operated to the specific timing. The gaming machine according to feature D17, wherein the effect means is moved in the second movable mode.

According to the feature D18, immediately before the specific timing, only the normal effect means whose basic movable period or shortened movable period is shorter than the period until the specific timing is moved. For this reason, a new game in which the player guesses whether or not a specific timing has been determined by searching for an effect (state) in which the normal effect means that should be movable does not move in the process of operating the operation means. Gender can be given, and the degree of attention of the player to the game can be improved.

Feature D19. When it is determined that the first condition is not satisfied, the normal effect means control means is non-movable, and the basic movable period is the specific timing from the time when the operation means is operated. When it is determined that there is a normal effect means longer than the period up to, the normal effect means is operated in the first special movable period whose movable period is shorter than the basic movable period, and it is determined that the first condition is satisfied. When it is determined that there is a normal effect means that is non-movable and whose shortened movable period is longer than the period from the time when the operating means is operated to the specific timing, the normal effect means is shortened and movable. The gaming machine according to feature D17, which is characterized in that it is operated in a second special movable period in which the movable period is shorter than the period.

According to the feature D19, immediately before the specific timing, the normal effect means whose basic movable period or shortened movable period is longer than the period until the specific timing is moved in the first special movable period or the second special movable period. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a new game property of guessing whether or not a specific timing is determined from the movable period of the normal effect means in the process of operating the operation means, and the player's game can be given. You can improve the degree of attention.

Feature D20. The normal effect means control means sets the movable period of the normal effect means to be shorter than the movable distance of the first movable mode and moves the normal effect means, thereby setting the movable period of the normal effect means to the first special. By setting the movable period and making the movable distance of the normal movable portion shorter than the movable distance of the second movable mode to move the normal effect means, the movable period of the normal effect means is set to the second special movable period. The gaming machine according to the feature D19.

According to the feature D20, since the movable period is shortened by shortening the movable distance, the player can pay attention to the way (reaching point) of the normal movable part can be moved, and the degree of attention of the player to the game is improved. can.

Feature D21. The normal effect means control means sets the movable period of the normal effect means to the first special by making the movable speed of the normal movable portion faster than the movable speed of the first movable mode and moving the normal effect means. By setting the movable period as the movable period and making the movable speed of the normal movable portion faster than the movable speed of the second movable mode to move the normal effect means, the movable period of the normal effect means is set to the second special movable period. The gaming machine according to the feature D19.

According to the feature D21, since the movable period is shortened by increasing the movable speed, the player can pay attention to the moving state (speed) of the normally movable part, and the player's attention to the game is improved. can.

Feature D22. It has a special processing period determining means (a function of determining a special processing period in the MPU 152 of the voice lamp control device 92) that determines a predetermined period from the specific timing to a time point before the basic movable period as a special processing period.
When the normal effect means control means determines that the operation means has been operated within the special processing period, and determines that the first condition is not satisfied, the basic movable period is the operation means. When it is determined that the first condition is satisfied by delaying the movement of the normal effect means, which is less than the period from the time when is operated to the specific timing, the shortened movable period is operated by the operating means. A feature characterized by delaying the movement of the normal effect means, which is less than the period from the time when the normal effect is performed to the specific timing, so that the delayed movement end time of the normal effect means coincides with the specific timing. The gaming machine described in D17.

According to the feature D22, the movement of the normal effect means is delayed immediately before the specific timing. Therefore, in the process of operating the operating means, the player guesses whether or not the specific timing is determined by searching for whether or not the normal effect means can be moved after operating the operating means. It is possible to impart a high degree of playability, and it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the game. Further, in the feature D22, since the movable end time point of the normal effect means is made to coincide with the specific timing, the player can be more smoothly focused on another effect started after the specific timing.

Feature D23. It has a specific movable part (specific movable part 341) that is movable between the third position and a fourth position different from the third position, and the specific movable part is movable by moving the specific movable part. Specific production means (specific unit 340) that are more likely to give a result that is more advantageous to the player than if not.
When it is determined that the predetermined fourth condition is satisfied within the valid period, the specific effect means control means (the specific movable process in the MPU 152 of the voice lamp control device 92) for controlling the specific effect means is executed. Function), and has
The gaming machine according to any one of features D16 to D22, wherein the specific effect means control means moves the specific effect means after the specific timing.

According to the feature D23, as another effect that is started after the specific timing, the specific effect means that is likely to give a favorable result to the player is movable. Therefore, by completing the movement of the normal effect means by the specific timing, the player can smoothly pay attention to the specific effect means. Note that controlling the specific effect means within the valid period here includes starting the movement of the specific effect means within the valid period and ending the movement of the specific effect means after the valid period has elapsed.

Feature D24. In the normal movable part in the normal effect means and the specific movable part in the specific effect means, the normal movable part in the normal effect means moves to the second position and the specific movable part in the specific effect means moves to the fourth position. The gaming machine according to feature D23, which is characterized in that it has a shape that makes contact when it moves.

When the configuration of the feature D23 is provided as in the feature D24, since the normal effect means and the specific effect means do not move at the same time within the valid period, the normal movable portion of the normal effect means can move to the second position and also. The shape may be such that when the specific movable portion of the specific effect means moves to the fourth position, it comes into contact with each other. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the normal movable part of the normal effect means and the specific movable part of the specific effect means can be improved, and the normal movable part of the normal effect means and the specific movable part of the specific effect means have a novel shape for the player. , It can be a powerful shape.

Feature D25. The characteristic D23 or D24, wherein the specific effect means control means moves the specific effect means when it is determined that the operation means has been operated within the valid period and after the specific timing. Gaming machine.

According to the feature D25, when the configuration of the feature D17 or the like is provided, the player who notices that the movement of the normal effect means has changed because the specific timing is set, then the specific effect means is movable. You can operate the operating means in a state that only you understand. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the degree of attention of the player to the normal production means.

Feature D26. The gaming machine according to feature D23 or D24, wherein the specific effect means control means is movable at the specific timing.

According to the feature D26, when the configuration of the feature D17 or the like is provided, the player who notices that the movement of the normal effect means has changed due to the setting of the specific timing causes the specific effect means to move after that. You can wait for a specific timing to be reached with only you understanding. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the degree of attention of the player to the normal production means.

Feature D27. Specific effect means movable determining means (specific unit movable of voice lamp control device 92) for determining whether or not to move the specific effect means when the operation means is operated within the valid period and before the specific timing. Has a function to execute lottery processing)
As one of the fourth conditions, the specific effect means control means is characterized in that the specific effect means is moved when the specific effect means movable determination means determines that the specific effect means is movable. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D23 to D26.

According to the feature D27, it is determined whether or not to operate the specific effect means when the operation means is operated by the player. That is, even if the specific timing is determined, the specific effect means does not move if the player does not operate the operation means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in operating the operating means.

Feature D28. It has a specific movable part (specific movable part 341) that is movable between the third position and a fourth position different from the third position, and the specific movable part is movable by moving the specific movable part. Specific production means (specific unit 340) that are more likely to give a result that is more advantageous to the player than if not.
When it is determined that the predetermined second condition is satisfied, the specific effect means control means (a function of executing the specific movable process in the MPU 152 of the voice lamp control device 92) for controlling the specific effect means is provided.
A plurality of the normal effect means are provided, and at least one of the normal effect means has a basic movable period longer than the basic movable period of the other normal effect means, and the shortened movable period is the other normal effect period. It is longer than the shortened movable period of the production means,
As one of the second conditions, the specific effect means control means can move at least a part of the normal movable portions of the plurality of normal effect means having different basic movable periods within the effective period, and simultaneously. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, characterized in that the specific effect means is moved when it is determined that a predetermined location is reached.

According to the feature D28, as one of the second conditions, there is a specific effect means that is likely to give a favorable result to the player (easy to be a hit result) when a part of the movement of a plurality of normal effect means is completed at the same time. Movable. Therefore, the player can positively operate the operation means, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in such a configuration, the player can accidentally operate the operating means while expecting that at least a part of the normal movable parts of the normal effect means reach a predetermined position at the same time, or intentionally. It is also possible to change the timing of operating the operating means so that at least a part of the normal moving parts of the normal effect means reach a predetermined position at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to impart different playability to the player in the process of operating the operating means, and to allow the player himself to select the method of operating the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

It should be noted that the term “simultaneous” here includes not only the case where the normal movable portion of the normal effect means reaches a predetermined position completely at the same time, but also a slight difference to the extent that the player does not feel uncomfortable. Further, controlling the specific effect means within the valid period here includes starting the movement of the specific effect means within the valid period and ending the movement of the specific effect means after the valid period has elapsed.

Feature D29. The feature D28, wherein the specific effect means control means moves the specific effect means when it is determined that the normal movable portions of the plurality of the normal effect means reach the first position at the same time. Pachinko machine.

According to the feature D29, when the normal movable portions in the plurality of normal effect means reach their respective first positions at the same time, the specific effect means is movable. Therefore, the movement of the specific production means can be more impressed on the player, the movement of the specific production means can be made more powerful (exhilaration), and the specific production means of the player can be moved. You can improve your expectations for.

Feature D30. In the normal movable part in the normal effect means and the specific movable part in the specific effect means, the normal movable part in the normal effect means moves to the second position, and the specific movable part in the specific effect means moves to the fourth position. The gaming machine according to feature D29, which is characterized in that it has a shape that makes contact when it moves up to.

According to the feature D30, the structure of the feature D29 is provided, and since the normal effect means and the specific effect means do not move at the same time, the normal movable portion of the normal effect means can move to the second position and the specific effect means can be specified. It is also possible to have a shape in which the movable portions come into contact with each other when they move to the fourth position. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the normal movable part of the normal effect means and the specific movable part of the specific effect means can be improved, and the normal movable part of the normal effect means and the specific movable part of the specific effect means have a novel shape for the player. , It can be a powerful shape.

Feature D31. The characteristic D28, wherein the specific effect means control means moves the specific effect means when it is determined that the normally movable portions of the plurality of the normal effect means reach the second positions at the same time. Gaming machine.

According to the feature D31, when it is determined that the normally movable portions of the plurality of normal effect means reach their respective second positions at the same time, the specific effect means is movable. For this reason, it is possible to provide the player with a powerful effect produced by simultaneously moving the normal movable part of the normal effect means and the specific movable part of the specific effect means, and it is expected that the player's specific effect means will move. You can improve the feeling.

Feature D32. In the normal movable part in the normal effect means and the specific movable part in the specific effect means, the normal movable part in the normal effect means moves to the second position, and the specific movable part in the specific effect means moves to the fourth position. The gaming machine according to feature D31, which is characterized in that it has a shape that does not come into contact when it moves up to.

According to the feature D32, when the normal movable part of the normal effect means and the specific movable part of the specific effect means move, it is possible to suppress the movable parts from coming into contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress giving a player a sense of discomfort.

Feature D33. When the specific effect means control means determines that the specific effect means is movable, the normal effect means control means determines that the specific effect means control means moves the specific effect means, and then the operation means determines that the specific effect means is movable. The gaming machine according to any one of features D28 to D32, characterized in that the normal effect means is not moved even when operated.

According to the feature D33, when the configuration of the feature D29 or the like is provided, it becomes difficult for the normal effect means and the specific effect means to move at the same time, and the effect means that the player should pay attention to can be clearly distinguished. Further, when the features D29 and D31 and the like are provided, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a sense of discomfort in the production that the movement of the normal production means is started after the specific production means is moved.

Further, the basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a picture display device that variably displays a plurality of pictures, the variable display of the plurality of pictures is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a privilege is given to the player according to the symbols after the stop.
<Others>
Conventionally, a gaming machine including a button (operating means) that can be operated by a player and a movable portion that can be moved based on the button operation of the player has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In such a gaming machine, the player can be made to participate in the game by having the player operate a button, so that the degree of attention of the player to the game can be increased (for example, Patent Document 1: Special Patent Document 1: Open 2014-128522).
In such a gaming machine, it is desired to satisfactorily increase the degree of attention of the player to the game by devising a method of controlling the movable portion.
In view of the above points, the present technical idea aims to provide a gaming machine capable of satisfactorily increasing the degree of attention to gaming.
<Means>
In order to achieve the above object, in the gaming machine of the technical idea 1, the operating means that can be operated by the player, the operation detecting means that detects the presence or absence of the operation of the operating means, and the first position and the first position are different from each other. The validity period of the normal effect means controlling means for controlling the normal effect means and the operation means is determined based on the detection result of the normal effect means having a normal movable portion movable between the two positions and the operation detection means. A gaming machine including a valid period determining means for determining a specific timing means for determining a specific timing within the valid period when it is determined that a predetermined first condition is satisfied, and a normal effect means controlling means. If it is determined that the operating means has been operated within the valid period and the specific timing has been determined, and if it is determined that the predetermined second condition is satisfied, the normal effect means of the normal effect means at the specific timing. It is characterized in that the normal production means is moved so that the movement is completed.
<Effect>
According to this, when the specific timing is determined, the normal effect means moves the normal effect means so that the movement of the normal effect means ends at the specific timing when it is determined that the second condition is satisfied. Therefore, in such a situation, since the normal production means does not move after the specific timing, the player can smoothly pay attention to another production started after the specific timing, and the player's attention to the game can be achieved. Can be improved.

10 ... Pachinko machine (game machine), 54 ... 1st start port, 55 ... 2nd start port, 80 ... Design display device, 91 ... Main control device, 92 ... Voice lamp control device, 93 ... Display control device, 112 ... M
PU (main side MPU), 113 ... ROM (main side ROM), 114 ... RAM (main side RAM),
152 ... MPU (voice side MPU), 153 ... ROM (voice side ROM), 154 ... RAM (
Audio side RAM), 154c ... Production unit operation validity period Timer counter area, 154d
… Various production unit movable period timer counter area, 162… MPU (display side MPU),
163 ... Program ROM, 164 ... Work RAM, 165 ... VDP, 310 ... 1st production unit, 320 ... 2nd production unit, 330 ... 3rd production unit, 340 ... Specific unit.

Claims (1)

Operation means that can be operated by the player,
Movable means and
A movable control means capable of movably controlling the movable means when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied in a state where the first condition that can be satisfied by operating the operating means is satisfied. In a gaming machine equipped with
Said movable control means, moving period before Symbol movable means is capable of executing a first control for a first period,
The gaming machine
It can be suggested during the execution period of the first control that the player is in a state where advantageous benefits can be given.
From the time when the first condition is satisfied to the time when the second condition is satisfied, a specific period can be set as a non-movable period in which the movable means is not moved .
When the specific period elapses and the second condition is satisfied, the first period is set so as to end the predetermined movable control to the movable means at a specific timing.
During said immovable period, Ri suggested that der that the first control is executed,
A gaming machine characterized by having means for shortening the movable period of the movable means by the first control to be shorter than the first period when a specific condition is satisfied.

Images